The Project Gutenberg eBook of M. Fabi Quintiliani institutionis oratoriae
liber decimus, by Marcus Fabius Quintilianus
Title: M. Fabi Quintiliani institutionis oratoriae liber decimus
Produced by: Louise Hope, Robert Connal and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team
i
I.
Life of Quintilian.
It would be possible to state in a
very few lines all that is certainly known about Quintilian’s personal
history; but much would remain to be said in order to convey an adequate
idea of the large place he must have filled in the era of which he is so
typical a representative. The period of his activity at Rome is nearly
co-extensive with the reign of the Flavian emperors,—Vespasian,
Titus, and Domitian. For twenty years he was the recognised head of the
teaching profession in the capital, and a large proportion of those who
came to maturity in the days of Trajan and Hadrian must have received
their intellectual training in his school. It is in itself a sign of the
tendencies of the age that Quintilian should have enjoyed the immediate
patronage of the reigning emperor in the conduct of work which would
formerly have attracted little notice. In earlier days the profession of
teaching had been held in low repute at Rome1. The first attempt to open a
school of rhetoric, in B.C. 94, was
looked on with the greatest suspicion and disfavour. Even Cicero adopts
a tone of apology in the rhetorical text-books which he wrote for the
instruction of others. But now all was changed, and education had come
to be, as it was in a still greater degree under Nerva, Trajan, and the
Antonines, a department of the government itself. Vespasian was the
founder of a new dynasty; and, though he had little culture to boast of
himself, he was shrewd enough to appreciate the advantages to be derived
from systematising the education of the Roman youth, and maintaining
friendly relations
ii
with those to whom it was entrusted. Quintilian, for his part, seems to
have diligently seconded, in the scholastic sphere, his patron’s efforts
to efface the memory of the time of trouble and unrest which had
followed the extinction of the Julian line in the person of Nero. After
his retirement from the active duties of his profession, he received the
consular insignia from Domitian,—the promotion of a teacher of
rhetoric to the highest dignity in the State being regarded as a most
unexampled phenomenon by the conservative opinion of the day, which had
failed to recognise the significance of the alliance between prince and
pedagogue. The interest with which the publication of the Institutio
Oratorio was looked forward to, at the close of his laborious
professional career, is sufficient evidence of the authoritative
position Quintilian had gained for himself at Rome. It was a tribute not
only to the successful teacher, but also to the man of letters who,
conscious that his was an age of literary decadence, sought to probe the
causes of the national decline and to counteract its evil
influences.
Like so many of the distinguished men of his time, Quintilian was a
Spaniard by birth. There must have been something in the Spanish
national character that rendered the inhabitants of that country
peculiarly susceptible to the influences of Roman culture: certainly no
province assimilated more rapidly than Spain the civilisation of its
conquerors. The expansion of Rome may be clearly traced in the history
of her literature. Just as Italy, rather than the imperial city itself,
had supplied the court of Augustus with its chiefest literary ornaments,
so now Spain sends up to the centre of attraction for all things Roman a
band of authors united, if by nothing else, at least by the ties of a
common origin. Pomponius Mela is said to have come from a place called
Cingentera, on the bay of Algesiras; Columella was a native of Gades,
Martial of Bilbilis; the two Senecas and Lucan were born in Corduba. The
emperor Trajan came from Italica, near Seville; while Hadrian belonged
to a family which had long been settled there. Quintilian’s birthplace
was the town of Calagurris (Calahorra) on the Ebro, memorable in
previous history only for the resistance which it enabled Sertorius to
offer to Metellus and Pompeius: it was the last place that submitted
after the murder of the insurgent general in B.C. 72.
In most of the older editions of Quintilian an anonymous Life
appears, the author of which (probably either Omnibonus Leonicenus or
Laurentius Valla) prefers a conjecture of his own to the ‘books of the
time,’ and makes out that Quintilian was born in Rome. His main argument
is that Martial does not include his name among those of the
distinguished authors to whom he refers as being of Spanish origin (e.g.
Epigr. i.
iii
61 and 49), though he addresses him separately in complimentary terms
(Epigr. ii. 90). Against this we may set, however, the line in which
Ausonius embodies what was evidently a well-known and accepted tradition
(Prof. i. 7):—
Adserat usque licet Fabium Calagurris
alumnum;
and the statement of Hieronymus in the Eusebian
Chronicle:—Quintilianus, ex Hispania
Calagurritanus, primus Romae publicam scholam [aperuit]. The
latter extract carries additional weight if we accept the conjecture of
Reifferscheid2 that Jerome here follows the authority of Suetonius
(Roth, p. 272) in his work on the grammarians and rhetoricians.
The fact of Quintilian’s Spanish origin may therefore be regarded as
fully established, though we cannot cite the authority of Quintilian
himself on the subject. His removal to Rome, at a very early period of
his life, would naturally make him more of a Roman than a Spaniard; and
this is probably the reason why he nowhere refers to the accident of his
birth-place. Indeed his work does not lend itself to autobiographical
revelations. Most of his reminiscences, some of which occur in the Tenth
Book (1 §§23 and
86,
3 §12: cp. v. 7, 7: vi. 1,
14: xii. 11, 3) are suggested by some detail connected with his
subject. Apart from the famous introduction to Book VI, where his grief
for the loss of his wife and two sons is allowed to interrupt the
continuity of his argument, he speaks of his father only once (ix.
3, 73), and then simply to quote, not without some diffidence,
a bon mot of his in illustration of a figure of speech. The
father was himself a rhetorician, and seems to have taught the subject
both at Calagurris and also after the family removed to Rome: whether he
is identical with the Quintilianus mentioned as a declaimer of moderate
reputation by the elder Seneca (Controv. x. praef. 2: cp. ib.
33, 19) cannot now be ascertained.
The date of Quintilian’s birth has been variously given as A.D. 42, A.D. 38, and A.D.
35, the last being now most commonly adopted. It cannot be determined
with certainty, though a few considerations may here be adduced to show
why it seems necessary to discard any theory that would put it after
A.D. 38. Dodwell, in his ‘Annales
Quintilianei’ (see Burmann’s edition, vol. ii. p. 1117), arrived at
the year A.D. 42, after a careful
examination of all the passages on which he thought it allowable to base
an inference. But Quintilian tells us himself that he was a young man
(nobis adulescentibus vi. 1, 14) at the trial of Cossutianus
Capito,
iv
which we know from Tacitus (Ann. xiii. 33) took place in A.D. 57: a fact which is in itself enough to show
that Dodwell is at least two years too late. Another indication is
derived from the references which Quintilian makes to his teacher
Domitius Afer, who is known to have died at a ripe old age in A.D. 59: cp. xii. 11, 3 vidi ego ...
Domitium Afrum valde senem: v. 7, 7 quem adulescentulus senem
colui: x.
1, 86 quae ex Afro
Domitio iuvenis excepi. Unfortunately we do not know the date of the
trial of Volusenus Catulus referred to in x.
1, 23: Quintilian was a
boy at the time (nobis pueris). In the preface to Book VI he
writes like an old man: this appears especially in the reference he
makes to the wife whom he had lost and who was only
nineteen,—aetate tam puellari praesertim meae comparata
§5. If we may infer that
Quintilian was nearer sixty than fifty when he wrote these words, in
A.D. 93 or 94, we may be certain that
he was born not later than A.D. 38,
and probably two or three years earlier.
Quintilian received his early education at Rome, and his father’s
position as a teacher of rhetoric, as well as the whole tendency of the
education of the day, no doubt gave it a rhetorical turn from the very
first. Even boys at school practised declamation, as may be seen from
the following passage of the Institutio:—
‘Non inutilem scio servatum esse a praeceptoribus meis morem, qui
cum pueros in classes distribuerant, ordinem dicendi secundum vires
ingenii dabant; et ita superiore loco quisque declamabat ut praecedere
profectu videbatur. Huius rei iudicia praebebantur: ea nobis ingens
palma, ducere vero classem multo pulcherrimum. Nec de hoc semel decretum
erat: tricesimus dies reddebat victo certaminis potestatem. Ita nec
superior successu curam remittebat, et dolor victum ad depellendam
ignominiam concitabat. Id nobis acriores ad studia dicendi faces
subdidisse quam exhortationem docentium, paedagogorum custodiam, vota
parentium, quantum animi mei coniectura colligere possum,
contenderim.’—i. 2, 23-25.
The same style of exercise was kept up at a later stage, when the boy
passed into the hands of a professed teacher of rhetoric, such as the
notorious Remmius Palaemon, who is said by the scholiast on Juvenal (vi.
451) to have been Quintilian’s master:—
‘Solebant praeceptores mei neque inutili et nobis etiam iucundo
genere exercitationis praeparare nos coniecturalibus causis, cum
quaerere atque exsequi iuberent “cur armata apud Lacedaemonios Venus” et
“quid ita crederetur Cupido puer atque volucer et sagittis ac face
armatus” et similia, in quibus scrutabamur voluntatem.’—ii.
4, 26.
He now came into contact with, and listened to the eloquence of, the
most celebrated orators of the day. In his relations with the greatest
of
v
these, Domitius Afer, Quintilian seems to have acted on the maxim which
he himself lays down for the budding advocate: oratorem sibi aliquem,
quod apud maiores fieri solebat, deligat, quem sequatur, quem
imitetur x.
5, 19. To Afer he
attached himself (adsectabar Domitium Afrum Plin. Ep. ii.
14, 10), and was in all probability by him initiated in the
business of the law-courts and public life generally: cp. v. 7, 7
adulescentulus senem colui (Domitium). In this passage
Afer is said to have written two books on the examination of witnesses;
and from vi. 3, 42 it would appear that his ‘dicta’ or witticisms were
sufficiently distinguished to merit the honour of publication. He had
held high office under Tiberius, Caligula, and Nero, and his
pre-eminence at the bar was undisputed: xii. 11, 3 principem fuisse
quondam fori non erat dubium. In his review of Latin oratory,
Quintilian gives him high praise: arte et toto genere dicendi
praeferendus, et quem in numero veterum habere non timeas x.
1, 118. The pupil was
fortunate therefore in his master, and he drew upon his reminiscences of
Afer’s teaching when he himself came to instruct others (Plin. l.c.).
Among other notable orators of the day were Servilius Nonianus (x.
1, 102), Iulius
Africanus (x.
1, 118: xii.
10, 11), Iulius Secundus (x.
1, 120:
3, 12: xii. 10, 11),
Galerius Trachalus (x.
1, 119: xii.
10, 11), and Vibius Crispus (ibid.).
When he was about twenty-five years of age some motive induced
Quintilian to return to Calagurris, his native town; and there he spent
several years in the practice of his profession as teacher and
barrister. We know that he came back to Rome with Galba in A.D. 68: the evidence for this is again the
statement made by Hieronymus in the Eusebian Chronicle,
M. Fabius Quintilianus Romam a Galba perducitur. Galba had
been governor of Hispania Tarraconensis under Nero (A.D. 61-68), and it is not improbable that
Quintilian, when he returned to his native country, was in some way
attached to his official retinue; the numerous bons mots which he
records in the third chapter of the Sixth Book (§§62, 64, 66,
80, 90) seem to point to a certain amount of personal intercourse
between himself and the future emperor3.
At Rome Quintilian must soon have proved himself thoroughly qualified
for the work of teaching and training the young. The imperial
countenance afterwards shown him by Vespasian was in all probability
only an official expression of the esteem felt in the Roman community
for one who was serving with such distinction in a sphere of which the
importance was coming now to be more adequately recognised. Quintilian
was not only a learned man and a great teacher: he was a great
vi
moral power in the midst of a people which had long been demoralised by
the vices of its rulers. The fundamental principle of his teaching,
non posse oratorem esse nisi virum bonum (i. pr. §9 and
xii. 1), shows the high ideal he cherished and the wide view he
took of the opportunities of his position. He felt himself strong enough
to make a protest against the literary influence of Seneca, then the
popular favourite, and to endeavour to recall a vitiated taste to more
rigorous standards: corruptum et omnibus vitiis fractum dicendi genus
revocare ad severiora iudicia contendo (x.
1, 125). And when, in
the evening of his days, he wrote his great treatise on the ‘technical
training’ of the orator, it was from himself and his own successful
practice that he drew many of his most cogent illustrations, e.g. vi. 2,
36, and (in regard to his powers of memory) xi. 2, 39 and iv.
2, 86.
In the earlier years of his career at Rome, before he became absorbed
in the work of teaching, Quintilian must have had a considerable amount
of practice at the bar. He tells us himself of a speech which he
published, ductus iuvenali cupiditate gloriae viii. 2, 24. It was
of a common type. A certain Naevius Arpinianus was accused of
having killed his wife, who had fallen from a window; and we may infer
with certainty from the tone of Quintilian’s reference to the
circumstances of the case that he succeeded in securing the acquittal of
Naevius—more fortunate than the wife-killer of whom we read in
Tacitus (Ann. iv. 22). A more distinguished cause was that of
Berenice, the Jewish Queen before whom St. Paul appeared (Acts xxv.
13), and whose subsequent visit to Rome was connected with the
ascendency she had established over the heart of the youthful Titus
(Tac. Hist. ii. 2: Suet. Tit. 7). We can only speculate on the
nature of the issue involved, as Quintilian confines himself to a bare
statement of fact—ego pro regina Berenice apud ipsam causam
dixi iv. 1, 19. It was in all probability a civil suit brought or
defended by Berenice against some Jewish countryman; and the phenomenon
of the queen herself presiding over a trial in which she was an
interested party is accounted for by the hypothesis that, at least in
civil suits, Roman tolerance allowed the Jews to settle their own
disputes according to their national law. On such occasions the person
of highest rank in the community to which the disputants belonged might
naturally be designated to preside over the tribunal4.
vii
In another case, Quintilian seems to have shown some of the dexterity
attributed to him in the oft-quoted line of Juvenal (vi. 280) Dic
aliquem, sodes, dic, Quintiliane, colorem. He was counsel for a
woman who had been party to an arrangement by which the provisions of
the Voconian law (passed B.C. 169 to
prevent the accumulation of property in the hands of females) had been
evaded by the not uncommon method of a fraudulent disposition to a third
person5.
Quintilian’s client was accused of having produced a forged will. This
charge it was easy to rebut, though it rendered necessary the
explanation that the heirs named in the will had really undertaken to
hand the property over to the woman; and if this explanation were openly
given it would involve the loss of the estate. There is an evident tone
of satisfaction in Quintiiian’s description of what happened: ita
ergo fuit nobis agendum ut iudices illud intellegerent factum, delatores
non possent adprehendere ut dictum, et contigit utrumque (ix.
2, 74).
Unlike his great model Cicero, who was considered most effective in
the peroratio of a great case, where the work was divided among
several pleaders, Quintilian was generally relied on to state a case
(ponere causam) in its main lines for subsequent elaboration:
me certe, quantacunque nostris experimentis habenda est fides,
fecisse hoc in foro, quotiens ita desiderabat utilitas, probantibus et
eruditis et iis qui iudicabant, scio: et (quod non adroganter dixerim,
quia sunt plurimi quibuscum egi qui me refellere possint si mentiar)
fere a me ponendae causae officium exigebatur iv. 2, 86. His
methodical habit of mind would render him specially effective for this
department of work. Other orators may have been more brilliant, more
full of fire, and more able to work upon the feelings of an audience: if
Quintilian had not the ‘grand style’—if he represents the type of
an orator that is ‘made’ rather than ‘born’—we may at least
believe that he was unsurpassed for judicious, moderate, and effective
statement. His model in this as in other matters was probably Domitius
Afer, of whom Pliny says (Ep. ii. 14, 10) apud decemviros
dicebat graviter et lente, hoc enim illi actionis genus erat. His
character and training would secure him a place apart from the common
herd. ‘Among the orators of the day, some ignorant and coarse, having
left mean occupations, without any preliminary study, for the bar, where
they made up in audacity for lack of talent, and in noisy conceit for a
defective knowledge
viii
of law—others trained in the practice of delation to every form of
trickery and violence—Quintilian, honest, able, and moderate stood
by himself6.’
It was after Quintilian had attained some distinction in the practice
of his profession, probably in the year 72, that his activity became
invested with an official and public character. We learn the facts from
Suetonius’s Life of Vespasian (ch. 18): primus e fisco latinis
graecisque rhetoribus annua centena constituit: and the Eusebian
chronicle (see Roth’s Suetonius, p. 272), Quintilianus, ex
Hispania Calagurritanus, qui primus Romae publicam
(‘state-supported’) scholam [aperuit] et salarium e
fisco accepit, claruit—the zenith of his fame being placed
between the years 85 and 89 A.D.
Vespasian, in fact, created and endowed a professorial Chair of
Rhetoric, and Quintilian was its first occupant. He thus became the
official head of the foremost school of oratory at Rome, and the
‘supreme controller of its restless youth’:
Quintiliane, vagae moderator summe iuventae,
Gloria Romanae, Quintiliane, togae.
—Mart. ii. 90, 1-2.
In this capacity he must have exercised the greatest possible
influence on the rising youth of Rome. The younger Pliny was his pupil,
and evidently retained a grateful memory of the instruction which he
received from him: Ep. ii. 14, 9 and vi. 6, 3. The same is true, in
all probability, of Pliny’s friend Tacitus, who has much in common with
Quintilian: possibly also of Suetonius. If Juvenal was not actually his
pupil,—he is believed to have practised declamation till well on
in life,—we may infer from the complimentary references which
occur in his Satires that he at least appreciated Quintilian’s work and
recognised its healthy influence7.
After a public career at Rome, extending over a period of twenty
years8,
Quintilian definitely retired from both teaching and pleading at
ix
the bar. He seems to have profited by the example of his model, Domitius
Afer, who would have done better if he had retired earlier (xii.
11, 3): Quintilian thought it was well to go while he would still
be missed,—et praecipiendi munus iam pridem deprecati sumus et
in foro quoque dicendi, quid honestissimum finem putabamus desinere dum
desideraremur, ii. 12, 12. The wealth which he had acquired by the
practice of his profession (Juv. vii. 186-189) enabled him to go into
retirement with a light heart. The first-fruits of his leisure was a
treatise in which he sought to account for that decline in eloquence for
which the Institutio Oratoria was afterwards to provide a remedy.
It was entitled De causis corruptae eloquentiae, and was long
confounded with the Dialogue on Oratory, now ascribed to Tacitus: he
refers to this work in vi. pr. §3: viii. 6, 76: possibly also in ii. 4,
42: v. 12, 23: vi. pr. §3: viii. 3, 58, and 6, 769. This treatise is no longer
extant, and we have lost also the two books Artis Rhetoricae,
which were published under Quintilian’s name (1 pr. §7), neque
editi a me neque in hoc comparati: namque alterum sermonem per biduum
habitum pueri quibus id praestabatur exceperant, alterum pluribus sane
diebus, quantum notando consequi potuerant, interceptum boni iuvenes sed
nimium amantes mei temerario editionis honore vulgaverant10. In a recent
edition of the ‘Minor Declamations’ (M. Fabii Quintiliani
declamationes quae supersunt cxlv Lipsiae, 1884), Const. Ritter
endeavours to show that this is the work referred to in the passage
quoted above, from the preface to the Institutio: cp. Die
Quintilianischen Declamationen, Freiburg i.B., und
x
Tübingen, 1881, p. 246 sqq.11 Meister’s view, however, is that, like the
‘Greater Declamations,’ which are generally admitted to have been
composed at a later date, the ‘Minor Declamations’ also were written
subsequently either by Quintilian himself or (more probably) by
imitators who had caught his style and were glad to commend their
compositions by the aid of his great name. Even in his busy professional
days Quintilian had suffered from the zeal of pirate publishers: he
tells us (vii. 2, 24) that several pleadings were in circulation
under his name which he could by no means claim as entirely his own:
nam ceterae, quae sub nomine meo feruntur, neglegentia excipientium
in quaestum notariorum corruptae minimam partem mei habent.
While living in retirement, and engaged on the composition of his
work, Quintilian received a fresh mark of Imperial favour, this time
from Domitian. This prince had adopted two grand-nephews, whom he
destined to succeed him on the throne,—the children of his niece
Flavia Domitilla, and of Flavius Clemens, a cousin whom he associated
with himself about this time in the duties of the consulship. They were
rechristened Vespasian and Domitian (Suet. Dom. 15), and the care of
their education was entrusted to Quintilian (A.D. 93). He accepted it with fulsome expressions of
gratitude and appreciation12; but did not exercise it for long13, as the
children, with their parents, became the victims of the tyrant’s
capriciousness shortly before his murder, and were ruined as rapidly as
they had risen. Flavius Clemens was put to death, and his wife
Domitilla, probably accompanied by her two sons, was sent into exile.
They seem to have embraced the Jewish faith; and it is interesting to
speculate on the possibility that through intercourse with them, and
with their children, Quintilian may have come into contact with a
religion which was the forerunner of that which was destined soon
afterwards to achieve so universal a triumph.
It was while he was acting as tutor to the two princes that
Quintilian received, through the influence of their father Flavius
Clemens, the compliment of the consular insignia. This we learn from
Ausonius, himself the recipient of a similar favour from his pupil
Gratian: Quintilianus per Clementem ornamenta consularia sortitus,
honestamenta nominis potius videtur quam insignia potestatis
habuisse. It was probably in allusion to
xi
this promotion, unexampled at that time in the case of a teacher of
rhetoric, that Juvenal wrote (vii. 197-8)—
Si Fortuna volet, fies de rhetore consul;
Si volet haec eadem, fies de consule rhetor:
while another parallel is chronicled by Pliny, Ep. iv. 11, 1
praetorius hic modo ... nunc eo decidit ut exsul de senatore, rhetor
de oratore fieret. Itaque ipse in praefatione dixit dolenter el
graviter: ‘quos tibi Fortuna, ludos facis?’ facis enim ex professoribus
senatores, ex senatoribus professores.
The flattery with which Quintilian loads the emperor for these and
similar favours is the only stain on a character otherwise invariably
manly, honourable, and straightforward. It is startling for us to hear
that monster of iniquity, the last of the Flavian line, invoked as an
‘upright guardian of morals’ (sanctissimus censor iv. pr. §3),
even when he was ‘tearing in pieces the almost lifeless world.’ There
may have been a grain of sincerity in the compliments which Quintilian,
like Pliny, pays to his literary ability. Domitian’s poetical
productions are said not to have been altogether wanting in merit; and
his attachment to literary pursuits is shown by the festivals he
instituted in honour of Minerva and Jupiter Capitolinus, in which
rhetorical, musical, and artistic contests were a prominent feature (see
on x.
1, 91). But this is no
justification for the fulsome language employed by Quintilian in the
introduction to the Fourth Book, where the emperor is spoken of as the
protecting deity of literary men: ut in omnibus ita in eloquentia
eminentissimum ... quo neque praesentius aliud nec studiis magis
propitium numen est; nor for his profession of belief that nothing
but the cares of government prevented Domitian from becoming the
greatest poet of Rome: Germanicum Augustum ab institutis studiis
deflexit cura terrarum, parumque dis visum est esse eum maximum
poetarum x.
1, 91 sq. Few would
recognise Domitian in the following reference: laudandum in quibusdam
quod geniti immortales, quibusdam quod immortalitatem virtute sint
consecuti: quod pietas principis nostri praesentium quoque temporum
decus fecit iii. 7, 9. Such servility can only be partially
explained by Quintilian’s official relations to the Court and by the
circumstances of the time at which he wrote. It was a vice of the age:
Quintilian shares it with Martial, Statius, Silius Italicus, and
Valerius Flaccus. The indignant silence which Tacitus and Juvenal
maintained during the horrors of this reign is a better expression of
the virtue of old Rome, which seems to have burned with steadier flame
in the hearts of her genuine sons than in those of the ‘new men’
xii
from the provinces, with neither pride of family nor pride of
nationality to save them from the corrupting influences of their
surroundings14.
That Quintilian acquired considerable wealth, partly as a teacher and
partly by work at the bar, is evident from the pointed references made
by Juvenal in the seventh Satire. After showing how insignificant are
the fees paid by Roman parents for their children’s education, when
compared with their other expenses, the satirist suddenly breaks
off,—unde igitur tot Quintilianus habet saltus? How does it
come about (if his profession is so unremunerative) that Quintilian owns
so many estates? The only answer which Juvenal can give to this
conundrum is that the great teacher was one of the fortunate: ‘he is a
lucky man, and your lucky man, like Horace’s Stoic, unites every good
quality in himself, and can expect everything15.’ We must remember however,
that, while Quintilian acquired wealth in the practice of his
profession, no charge is made against him as having placed his abilities
at the disposal of an unscrupulous ruler for his own advancement. Under
Nero, Marcellus Eprius assisted in procuring the condemnation of
Thrasea, and received over £42,000 for the service (Tac. Ann. xvi. 33):
if Quintilian’s name had ever been associated with such a trial, Juvenal
would have been more direct in his reference. But with Quintilian, as
with so many others, the advantages of position and fortune were
counterbalanced by grave domestic losses. In a less rhetorical age the
memorable introduction to the Sixth Book of the Institutio would
perhaps have taken a rather more simple form; but it is none the less a
testimony to the warm human heart of the writer, now a childless
widower. He had married, when already well on in life, a young girl
whose death at the early age of nineteen made him feel as if in her he
had lost a daughter rather than a wife: cum omni virtute quae in
feminas cadit functa insanabilem attulit marito dolorem, tum aetate tam
puellari, praesertim meae comparata, potest et ipsa numerari inter
vulnera orbitatis vi. pr. 5. She left him two sons, the younger
of whom did not long survive her; he had just completed his fifth year
when he died. The father now concentrated all his affection
xiii
on the elder, and it was with his education in view that he made all
haste to complete his great work, which he considered would be the best
inheritance he could leave to him,—hanc optimum partem
relicturus hereditatis videbar, ut si me, quod aequum et optabile fuit,
fata intercepissent, praeceptore tamen patre uteretur ib. §1. But
the blow again descended, and his house was desolate: at me fortuna
id agentem diebus ac noctibus festinantemque metu meae mortalitatis ita
subito prostravit ut laboris mei fructus ad neminem minus quam ad me
pertineret. Illum enim, de quo summa conceperam et in quo spem unicam
senectutis reponebam, repetito vulnere orbitatis amisi ib. §2.
This would be about the year 94 A.D., and the Institutio Oratoria is said to
have seen the light in 95. After that we hear no more of Quintilian.
Domitian was assassinated in 96, and under the new régime it is
possible that the favourite of the Flavian emperors may have been under
a cloud. But his work was done; even if he lived on for a few years
longer in retirement, his career had virtually closed with the
publication of his great treatise. It used to be believed that he lived
into the reign of Hadrian, and died about 118 A.D., but this idea is founded on a misconception16.
Probably he did not even see the accession of Nerva in 96: if he did, he
must have died soon afterwards, for there are two letters of Pliny’s
(one written between 97 and 100, and the other about 105) in which Pliny
does not speak of his old teacher as of one still alive.
II.
The Institutio Oratoria.
Though Quintilian spent little more than two years on the composition
of the Institutio Oratorio, his work really embodies the
experience of a
xiv
lifetime. No doubt much of it lay ready to his hand, even before he
began to write, and he would willingly have kept it longer; but the
solicitations of Trypho, the publisher, were too much for him. His
letter to Trypho shows that he fully appreciated the magnitude of his
task; and there is even the suggestion that (like many a busy teacher
since his time) he only realised when called upon to publish that he had
not covered the whole ground of his subject17. The opening words of the
introduction (post impetratam studiis meis quietem, quae per viginti
annos erudiendis iuvenibus impenderam, &c.) show that the
Institutio was the work of his retirement: and various
indications lead us to fix the date of its composition as falling
between A.D. 93 and 95. The
introduction to the Fourth Book was evidently written when (probably in
93) Domitian had appointed Quintilian tutor to his grand-nephews; the
Sixth Book, where he refers to his family losses, must have followed
shortly afterwards; while the harshness of his references to the
philosophers in the concluding portions of the work (cp. xi. 1, 30, xii.
3, 11, with 1, pr. 15, which may have been written, or at least revised,
after the rest was finished) seems to suggest that their expulsion by
Domitian (in 94) was already an accomplished fact18. The book is dedicated to
Victorius Marcellus, to whom Statius also addresses the Fourth Book of
his Silvae, evidently as to a person of some consideration and an
orator of repute (cp. Stat. Silv. iv. 4, 8, and 41 sq.). Marcellus had a
son called Geta (Inst. Or. i. pr. 6: Stat. Silv. iv. 4, 71), and it
was originally with a view to the education of this youth (erudiendo
Getae tuo) that Quintilian associated the father’s name with his
work. Geta is again referred to, along with Quintilian’s elder son, and
also the grand-nephews of Domitian, in the introduction to the Fourth
Book; but the opening words of the Sixth Book show that they are all
gone, and the epilogue, at the conclusion of Book xii, is addressed to
Marcellus on behoof of ‘studiosi iuvenes’ in general.
The plan of the Institutio Oratorio cannot be better given
than in its author’s own words (i. pr. 21 sq.): Liber primus ea quae
sunt ante officium rhetoris continebit. Secundo prima apud rhetorem
elementa et quae de ipsa rhetorices substantia quaeruntur tractabimus,
quinque deinceps inventioni (nam huic et dispositio subiungitur)
quattuor elocutioni, in cuius partem memoria ac pronuntiatio veniunt,
dabuntur. Unus accedet in quo nobis orator ipse informandus est, et qui
mores eius, quae in
xv
suscipiendis, discendis, agendis causis ratio, quod eloquentiae genus,
quis agendi debeat esse finis, quae post finem studia, quantum nostra
valebit infirmitas, disseremus. The first book deals with what the
pupil must learn before he goes to the rhetorician; it gives an account
of home-training and school discipline, and contains also a statement of
Quintilian’s views of grammar. The second book treats of rhetoric in
general: the choice of a proper instructor, as well as his character and
function, and the nature, principles, aims, and use of oratory. It is in
these early books especially that Quintilian reveals the high tone which
has made him an authority on educational morals, as well as rhetorical
training: see especially i. 2, 8, where he enlarges on Juvenal’s dictum,
maxima debetur puero reverentia; ii. 4, 10, where he advocates
gentle and conciliatory methods in teaching; and ii. 2, 5,—a
picture of the ideal teacher in language which might be applied to
Quintilian himself19. The remaining books, except the twelfth, are devoted
to the five ‘parts of rhetoric,’—invention, arrangement, style,
memory, and delivery (Cic. de Inv. i. 7, 9). In the third book we
have a classification of the different kinds of oratory. Next he treats
of the ‘different divisions of a speech, the purpose of the exordium,
the proper form of a statement of facts, what constitutes the force of
proofs, either in confirming our own assertions or refuting those of our
adversary, and of the different powers of the peroration, whether it be
regarded as a summary of the arguments previously used, or as a means of
exciting the feelings of the judge rather than of refreshing his
memory.’ This brings us to the end of the sixth book,
which closes with remarks on the uses of humour and of altercation20. The
discussion of arrangement finishes with the seventh book, which is
extremely technical: style (elocutio) is the main subject of the
four books which follow. Of these the eighth and ninth treat of the
elements of a good style,—such as perspicuity, ornament, &c.;
the tenth of the practical studies and exercises (including a course of
reading) by which the actual command of these elements may be obtained;
while the eleventh deals with appropriateness (i.e. the different kinds
of oratory which suit different audiences), memory, and delivery. The
twelfth book—which Quintilian calls the most grave and important
part of the whole work—treats of the high moral qualifications
requisite in the perfect orator:
xvi
just as the first book, introductory to the whole, describes the early
training which should precede the technical studies of the orator, so
the last book sets forth that ‘discipline of the whole man’ which is
their crown and conclusion21. “Lastly, the experienced teacher gives advice
when the public life of an orator should begin, and when it should end.
Even then his activity will not come to an end. He will write the
history of his times, will explain the law to those who consult him,
will write, like Quintilian himself, a treatise on eloquence, or set
forth the highest principles of morality. The young men will throng
round and consult him as an oracle, and he will guide them as a pilot.
What can be more honourable to a man than to teach that of which he has
a thorough knowledge? ‘I know not,’ he concludes, ‘whether an orator
ought not to be thought happiest at that period of his life when,
sequestered from the world, devoted to retired study, unmolested by
envy, and remote from strife, he has placed his reputation in a harbour
of safety, experiencing while yet alive that respect which is more
commonly offered after death, and observing how his character will be
regarded by posterity22.’”
The Institutio Oratoria differs from all other previous
rhetorical treatises in the comprehensiveness of its aim and method. It
is a complete manual for the training of the orator, from his cradle to
the public platform. Founding on old Cato’s maxim, that the orator is
the vir bonus dicendi peritus, Quintilian considers it necessary
to take him at birth in order to secure the best results, as regards
both goodness of character and skill in speaking. His work has therefore
for us a double value and a twofold interest: it is a treatise on
education in general, and on rhetorical education in particular.
Throughout the whole, oratory is the end for the sake of which
everything is undertaken,—the goal to which the entire moral and
intellectual training of the student is to be directed. Quintilian’s
high conception of his subject is reflected in the language of the
‘Dialogue on Oratory’: Studium quo non aliud in civitate nostra vel
ad utilitatem fructuosius vel ad voluptatem dulcius vel ad dignitatem
amplius vel ad urbis famam pulchrius vel ad totius imperii atque omnium
gentium notitiam inlustrius excogitari potest (ch. 5). Though
the field for the practical display of eloquence had been greatly
limited by
xvii
the extinction of the old freedom of political life, rhetoric
represented, in Quintilian’s day, the whole of education. It was to the
Romans what μουσική was
to the Greeks, and was valued all the more by them because of its
eminently practical purpose. The student of rhetoric must therefore be
fully equipped. “Quintilian postulates the widest culture: there is no
form of knowledge from which something may not be extracted for his
purpose; and he is fully alive to the importance of method in education.
He ridicules the fashion of the day, which hurried over preliminary
cultivation, and allowed men to grow grey while declaiming in the
schools, where nature and reality were forgotten. Yet he develops all
the technicalities of rhetoric with a fulness to which we find no
parallel in ancient literature. Even in this portion of the work the
illustrations are so apposite and the style so dignified and yet sweet,
that the modern reader, whose initial interest in rhetoric is of
necessity faint, is carried along with much less fatigue than is
necessary to master most parts of the rhetorical writings of Aristotle
and Cicero. At all times the student feels that he is in the company of
a high-toned Roman gentleman who, so far as he could do without ceasing
to be a Roman, has taken up into his nature the best results of ancient
culture in all its forms23.”
It is in connection with the general rather than with the technical
training of his pupils that Quintilian establishes a claim to rank with
the highest educational authorities,—as for example in his
insistence on the necessity of good example both at home24 and in school, and
on the respect due to the young25, as well as his catalogue of the
qualifications required in the trainer of youth (ii. 2, 5: 4, 10),
his protest against corporal punishment (i. 3, 14), and his
consistent advocacy of the moral as well as the intellectual aspects of
education. His system was conceived as a remedy for the existing state
of things at Rome, where eloquence and the arts in general had, as
Messalla puts it in the ‘Dialogue on Oratory,’ “declined from their
ancient glory, not from the dearth of men, but from the indolence of the
young, the carelessness of parents, the ignorance of teachers, and
neglect of the old discipline26.” Under it parents and teachers were to
be united in the effort to develop the moral and intellectual qualities
of the Roman youth: and through education the state was to recover
something of her old vigour and virtue.
The work was expected with the greatest interest before its
publication, and we may infer, from the high authority assigned to
Quintilian in the
xviii
literature of the period, that it long held an honoured place in Roman
schools. But it is curious that the earliest known references are not to
the Institutio but to the Declamationes. In an interesting
chapter of the Introduction to a recent volume27, M. Fierville has
gathered together all the references that occur in the literature of the
early centuries of our era. Trebellius Pollio and Lactantius (both of
the 3rd century) speak of the Declamations, and Ausonius (4th century)
refers to Quintilian without naming his writings: the first definite
mention of the Institutio is made by Hilary of Poitiers (died
367) and afterwards by St. Jerome (died 420). Later Cassiodorus
(468-562) pronounced a eulogy which may stand as proof of his high
appreciation: Quintilianus tamen doctor egregius, qui post fluvios
Tullianos singulariter valuit implere quae docuit, virum bonum dicendi
peritum a prima aetate suscipiens, per cunctas artes ac disciplinas
nobilium litterarum erudiendum esse monstravit, quem merito ad
defendendum totius civitatis vota requirerent (de Arte
Rhetor.—Rhet. Lat. Min., ed. Halm, p. 498). The Ars Rhetorica
of Julius Victor (6th century) is largely borrowed from Quintilian: see
Halm, praef. p. ix. Isidore, Bishop of Seville (570-630), studied
Quintilian in conjunction with Aristotle and Cicero. After the Dark Age,
Poggio’s discovery, at St. Gall in 1416, of a complete manuscript
of Quintilian was ranked as one of the most important literary events in
what we know now as the era of the Renaissance28. The great scholars of the
fifteenth century worked hard at the emendation of the text. The
editio princeps was given to the world by G. A. Campani in
1470; and in the concluding words of his preface the editor reflects
something of the enthusiasm for his author which had already been
expressed by Petrarch, Poggio, and others,—proinde de
Quintiliano sic habe, post unam beatissimam et unicam felicitatem
M. Tullii, quae fastigii loco suspicienda est omnibus et tamquam
adoranda, hunc unum esse quem praecipuum habere possis in eloquentia
ducem: quem si assequeris, quidquid tibi deerit ad cumulum
consummationis id a natura desiderabis non ab arte deposces. This
edition was followed in rapid succession by various others, so that by
the end of the 16th century Quintilian had been edited a hundred times
over29. The 17th century is not so rich in editions, but
Quintilian still reigned in the schools as the great master of rhetoric:
students of English literature
xix
will remember how Milton (Sonnet xi) uses the authority of his name when
referring to the roughness of northern nomenclature:—
Those rugged names to our like mouths grow sleek
That would have made Quintilian stare and gasp.
In his ‘Tractate on Education’ too Milton strongly recommends the
first two or three books of the Institutio. The 18th century
provided the notable editions of Burmann (1720), Capperonier (1725),
Gesner (1738), and witnessed also the commencement of Spalding’s
(1798-1816), whose text, as revised by Zumpt and Bonnell, practically
held the field till the publication of Halm’s critical edition (1868).
Towards the close of last century it would appear that Quintilian was as
much studied as he had ever been,—probably by many who believed
in, as well as by some who would have rejected the application of the
maxim ‘orator nascitur non fit.’ William Pitt, for example,
shortly after his arrival at Cambridge (1773), and while ‘still bent on
his main object of oratorical excellence,’ attended a course of lectures
on Quintilian, which caused him on one occasion to interrupt his
correspondence with his father30. His lasting popularity must have been
due, not only to his own intrinsic merits, but to the fact that his
writings harmonised well with the studies of those days: it was promoted
also by the serviceable abridgments of the Institutio, either in
whole or in part, that were from time to time published,—notably
that of Ch. Rollin in 1715. In our own day men whose education was
moulded on the old lines—such as J. S. Mill—considered
Quintilian an indispensable part of a scholar’s equipment. Macaulay read
him in India, along with the rest of classical literature. Lord
Beaconsfield professed that he was ‘very fond of Quintilian31.’ But by our
classical scholars he has been almost entirely neglected, no complete
edition having appeared in this country since a revised text was issued
in London in 1822. German criticism, on the other hand, has of late paid
Quintilian special attention, with conspicuous results for the
emendation and illustration of his text: to the great names of Spalding,
Zumpt, and Bonnell, must be added those of Halm, Meister, Becher,
Wölfflin, and Kiderlin.
Besides the literary criticism for which it has always attracted
attention, and which will form the subject of the next section, the
Tenth Book of the Institutio contains valuable precepts in regard
to various practical matters which are still of as great importance as
they were in Quintilian’s day. Among these are the practice of writing,
the use of an amanuensis,
xx
the art of revision, the limits of imitation, the best exercises in
style, the advantages of preparation, and the faculty of
improvisation.
The following list of Loci
Memoriales (mainly taken from Krüger’s third edition, pp.
108-110) will give some idea of the various points on which, especially
in the later chapters of the Tenth Book, Quintilian states his opinion
weightily and often with epigrammatic terseness:
1 §112
(p. 110) Ille se profecisse sciat cui Cicero valde placebit.
2 §4
(p. 124) Pigri est ingenii contentum esse iis quae sint ab aliis
inventa.
2 §7
(p. 125) Turpe etiam illud est, contentum esse id consequi quod
imiteris.
2 §8
(p. 126) Nulla mansit ars qualis inventa est, nec intra initium
stetit.
2 §10
(pp. 126-7) Eum vero nemo potest aequare cuius vestigiis sibi utique
insistendum putat; necesse est enim semper sit posterior qui
sequitur.
2 §10
(p. 127) Plerumque facilius est plus facere quam idem.
2 §12
(ibid.) Ea quae in oratore maxima sunt imitabilia non sunt, ingenium,
inventio, vis, facilitas, et quidquid arte non traditur.
2 §18
(p. 131) Noveram quosdam qui se pulchre expressisse genus illud
caelestis huius in dicendo viri sibi viderentur, si in clausula
posuissent ‘esse videatur.’
2 §20
(p. 132) (Praeceptor) rector est alienorum ingeniorum atque formator.
Difficilius est naturam suam fingere.
2 §22
(ibid.) Sua cuique proposito lex, suus decor est.
2 §24
(p. 134) Non qui maxime imitandus, et solus imitandus est.
3 §2
(p. 136) Scribendum ergo quam diligentissime et quam plurimum. Nam ut
terra alte refossa generandis alendisque seminibus fecundior fit, sic
profectus non a summo petitus studiorum fructus effundit uberius et
fidelius continet.
3 §2
(p. 137) Verba in labris nascentia.
3 §3
(ibid.) Vires faciamus ante omnia, quae sufficiant labori certaminum et
usu non exhauriantur. Nihil enim rerum ipsa natura voluit magnum effici
cito, praeposuitque pulcherrimo cuique operi difficultatem.
3 §7
(p. 139) Omnia nostra dum nascuntur placent, alioqui nec
scriberentur.
3 §9
(ibid.) Primum hoc constituendum, hoc obtinendum est, ut quam optime
scribamus: celeritatem dabit consuetudo.
3 §10
(ibid.) Summa haec est rei: cito scribendo non fit ut bene scribatur,
bene scribendo fit ut cito.
3 §15
(p. 142) Curandum est ut quam optime dicamus, dicendum tamen pro
facultate.
3 §22
(p. 146) Secretum in dictando perit.
xxi
3 §26
(p. 148) Cui (acerrimo labori) non plus inrogandum est quam quod somno
supererit, haud deerit.
3 §27
(ibid.) Abunde, si vacet, lucis spatia sufficiunt: occupatos in noctem
necessitas agit. Est tamen lucubratio, quotiens ad eam integri ac
refecti venimus, optimum secreti genus.
3 §29
(ibid.) Non est indulgendum causis desidiae. Nam si non nisi refecti,
non nisi hilares, non nisi omnibus aliis curis vacantes studendum
existimarimus, semper erit propter quod nobis ignoscamus.
3 §31
(p. 149) Nihil in studiis parvum est.
4 §1
(p. 151) Emendatio, pars studiorum longe utilissima; neque enim sine
causa creditum est stilum non minus agere, cum delet. Huius autem operis
est adicere, detrahere, mutare.
4 §4
(p. 152) Sit ergo aliquando quod placeat aut certe quod sufficiat, ut
opus poliat lima, non exterat.
5 §23
(p. 166) Diligenter effecta (sc. materia) plus proderit quam plures
inchoatae et quasi degustatae.
6 §1
(p. 167) Haec (sc. cogitatio) inter medios rerum actus aliquid invenit
vacui nec otium patitur.
6 §2
(p. 168) Memoriae quoque plerumque inhaeret fidelius quod nulla
scribendi securitate laxatur.
6 §5
(ibid.) Sed si forte aliqui inter dicendum effulserit extemporalis
color, non superstitiose cogitatis demum est inhaerendum.
6 §6
(p. 169) Refutare temporis munera longe stultissimum est.
6 §6
(ibid.) Extemporalem temeritatem malo quam male cohaerentem
cogitationem.
7 §1
(p. 170) Maximus vero studiorum fructus est et velut praemium quoddam
amplissimum longi laboris ex tempore dicendi facultas.
7 §4
(p. 171) Perisse profecto confitendum est praeteritum laborem, cui
semper idem laborandum est. Neque ego hoc ago ut ex tempore dicere
malit, sed ut possit.
7 §12
(p. 175) Mihi ne dicere quidem videtur nisi qui disposite, ornate,
copiose dicit, sed tumultuari.
7 §15
(p. 176) Pectus est enim, quod disertos facit, et vis mentis.
7 §§16-17
(p. 177) Extemporalis actio auditorum frequentia, ut miles congestu
signorum, excitatur. Namque et difficiliorem cogitationem exprimit et
expellit dicendi necessitas, et secundos impetus auget placendi
cupido.
7 §18
(ibid.) Facilitatem quoque extemporalem a parvis initiis paulatim
perducemus ad summam, quae neque perfici neque contineri nisi usu
potest.
7 §20
(p. 178) Neque vero tanta esse umquam fiducia facilitatis
xxii
debet ut non breve saltem tempus, quod nusquam fere deerit, ad ea quae
dicturi sumus dispicienda sumamus.
7 §21
(p. 178) Qui stultis videri eruditi volunt, stulti eruditis
videntur.
7 §24
(p. 179) Rarum est ut satis se quisque vereatur.
7 §26
(p. 180) Studendum vero semper et ubique.
7 §27
(p. 180-1) Neque enim fere tan est ullus dies occupatus ut nihil
lucrativae ... operae ad scribendum aut legendum aut dicendum rapi
aliquo momento temporis possit.
7 §28
(p. 181) Quidquid loquemur ubicumque sit pro sua scilicet portione
perfectum.
7 §28
(ibid.) Scribendum certe numquam est magis, quam cum multa dicemus ex
tempore.
7 §29
(p. 181-2) Ac nescio an si utrumque cum cura et studio fecerimus,
invicem prosit, ut scribendo dicamus diligentius, dicendo scribamus
facilius. Scribendum ergo quotiens licebit, si id non dabitur,
cogitandum; ab utroque exclusi debent tamen sic dicere ut neque
deprehensus orator neque litigator destitutus esse videatur.
III.
Quintilians’s Litary Criticism.
It was the conviction that a cultured orator is better than an orator
with no culture that induced Quintilian to devote so considerable a part
of the Tenth Book to a review of Greek and Roman literature. He was
aware that in order to speak with effect it is necessary for a man to
know a good deal that lies outside the scope of the particular case
which he may undertake to plead; and while the ‘firm facility’ ἕξις at which he taught the
orator to aim could only be attained by a variety of exercises and
qualifications, a course of wide and careful reading must always, he
considered, form one of the factors in the combination.
In judging of the merits of Quintilian’s literary criticism we must
not forget the point of view from which he wrote. He is not dealing with
literature in and for itself. His was not the cast of mind in which the
faculty of literary appreciation finds artistic expression in the form
in which criticism becomes a part of literature itself. We cannot think
of the author of the Tenth Book of the Institutio as one whom a
divinely implanted instinct for literature impelled, towards the evening
of his days, to leave a record of the personal impressions he had
derived from contact with those whom we now recognise as the
master-minds of classical antiquity. Quintilian writes, not as the
literary man for a sympathetic brotherhood, but as the professor of
rhetoric for students in his school. If, in the
xxiii
course of his just and sober, but often trite and obvious criticisms, he
characterises a writer in language which has stood the test of time, it
is always when that writer touches his main interest most nearly, as one
from whom the student of style may learn much. In short, his work in the
department of literary criticism is done much in the same spirit as that
which, in these later days, has moved many sober and sensible, but on
the whole average persons, conversant with the general current of
contemporary thought, and not without the faculty of appreciative
discrimination, to draw up a list of the ‘Best Hundred Books.’ Their
aim, however, has been to guide and direct the work of that peculiar
product of modern times, the ‘general reader’: Quintilian’s victim was
the professed student of rhetoric.
But this limitation, arising partly out of the special aim which he
had imposed upon himself, partly, also, in all probability, from the
constitution of his own mind, ought not to blind us to the value of the
comprehensive review of ancient literature which Quintilian has left us
in this Tenth Book. “His literary sympathies are extraordinarily wide.
When obliged to condemn, as in the case of Seneca, he bestows generous
and even extravagant praise on such merit as he can find. He can
cordially admire even Sallust, the true fountain-head of the style which
he combats, while he will not suffer Lucilius to lie under the
aspersions of Horace.... The judgments which he passes may be in many
instances traditional, but, looking to all the circumstances of the
time, it seems remarkable that there should then have lived at Rome a
single man who could make them his own and give them expression. The
form in which these judgments are rendered is admirable. The gentle
justness of the sentiments is accompanied by a curious felicity of
phrase. Who can forget the ‘immortal swiftness of Sallust,’ or the
‘milky richness of Livy,’ or how ‘Horace soars now and then, and is full
of sweetness and grace, and in his varied forms and phrases is most
fortunately bold’? Ancient literary criticism perhaps touched its
highest points in the hands of Quintilian.”32
The course of reading which Quintilian recommends is selected with
express reference to the aim which he had in view, and which is put
prominently forward in connection with nearly every individual
criticism. The young man who aspires to success in speaking must have
his taste formed: when he reads Homer, let him note that, great poet as
Homer is, and admirable in every respect, he is also oratoria virtute
eminentissimus (1 §46). Alcaeus is plerumque
oratori similis (1 §63): Euripides is, on that
ground, to be preferred to Sophocles (1 §67): Lucan is magis
oratoribus quam poetis imitandus (1 §70): and the old Greek comedy
is
xxiv
specially recommended as a form of poetry ‘than which probably none is
better suited to form the orator’ (1 §65). With the prose writers
Quintilian is thoroughly at home, and he nowhere lets in so much light
on his own sympathies as in the estimates he gives us of Cicero (1 §§105-112) and Seneca (1 §§125-131). His
criticism of Cicero is precisely what might have been expected from the
general tone of the references throughout the Institutio. Cicero
is Quintilian’s model, to whom he looks up with reverential admiration:
he will not hear of his faults. In his own day the great orator had been
attacked by Atticists of the severer type for the richness of his style
and the excessive attention which they alleged that he paid to rhythm.
The ‘plainness’ of Lysias was their ideal, and they failed to recognise
the fact that, with the more limited resources of the Latin language,
such simplicity and condensation would be perilously near to baldness
(cp. note on
1 §105). Cicero they
regarded as an Asianist in disguise; in the words of his devoted
follower, they “dared to censure him as unduly turgid and Asiatic and
redundant; as too much given to repetition, and sometimes insipid in his
witticisms; and as spiritless, diffuse, and (save the mark!) even
effeminate in his arrangement” (Inst. Or. xii. 10, 12, quoted on
1 §105). That this
criticism had not been forgotten in Quintilian’s own day is obvious not
only from the Institutio but also from the discussion in the
Dialogus de Oratoribus, where Aper is represented as saying “We
know that even Cicero was not without his disparagers, who thought him
inflated, turgid, not sufficiently concise, but unduly diffuse and
luxuriant, and far from Attic” (ch. 18). To such detractors of his great
model Quintilian will have nothing to say, and in his criticism of
Cicero he gives full expression to his enthusiastic admiration for the
genius of one who had brought eloquence to the highest pinnacle of
perfection (vi. 31 Latinae eloquentiae princeps: cp. x.
1 §§105-112: xii. 1,
20 stetisse ipsum in fastigio eloquentiae fateor: 10, 12 sqq.
in omnibus quae in quoque laudantur eminentissimum).
With such an absorbing enthusiasm for Cicero, it was hardly to be
expected that Quintilian would show an adequate appreciation of Seneca.
Seneca’s influence was the great obstacle in the way of a general return
to the classical tradition of the Golden Age, and this was the literary
reform which Quintilian had at heart—corruptum et omnibus
vitiis fractum dicendi genus revocare ad severiora iudicia contendo
x.
1, 125. It is probable
that, in spite of the appearance of candour which he assumes in dealing
with him, Quintilian approached Seneca with a certain degree of
prejudice33. Quintilian represents the literature of erudition, and
his
xxv
standard is the best of what had been done in the past: Seneca was, like
Lucan, the child of a new era, to whom it seemed perfectly natural that
new thoughts should find utterance in new forms of expression. Seneca’s
motto was ‘nullius nomen fero,’—he gave free rein to the play of
his fancy, and rejected all method34: Quintilian looked with horror (in the
interest of his pupils) on a liberty that was so near to licence, and
set himself to check it by recalling men’s minds to the ‘good old ways,’
and extolling Cicero as the synonym for eloquence itself. In such a
conflict of tastes as regards things literary, and apart from the
ambiguous character of Seneca’s personal career, it is not surprising
that Quintilian should have been unfavourably disposed towards him. He
had a grudge, moreover, against philosophers in general, especially the
Stoics. They had encroached on what his comprehensive scheme of
education impelled him to believe was the province of the teacher of
rhetoric,—the moral training of the future orator35.
He was morbidly anxious to show that rhetoric stood in need of no
extraneous assistance: even the ‘grammatici’ he teaches to know their
proper place (see esp. i. 9, 6). But it was mainly, no doubt, as
representing certain literary tendencies of which he disapproved that
Seneca must have incurred Quintilian’s censure. It is probable that in
many passages of the Institutio, where he is not specially named,
it is Seneca that is in the writer’s mind: the tone of the references
corresponds in several points with the famous passage of the Tenth
Book36. In this passage
xxvi
Quintilian is evidently putting forward the whole force of his authority
in order to counteract Seneca’s influence. He has kept him waiting in a
marked manner, to the very end of his literary review: and when he comes
to deal with him he does not confine his criticism to a few words or
phrases, but devotes nearly as much space to him as he did to Cicero
himself. In his estimate of Seneca nothing is more remarkable than the
careful manner in which Quintilian mingles praise and blame. But the
praise is reluctant and half-hearted: it is Seneca’s faults that his
critic wishes to make prominent. He admits his ability (ingenium
facile et copiosum
§128), and even goes the
length of saying that it would be well if his imitators could rise to
his level (foret enim optandum pares ac saltem proximos illi viro
fieri
§127). But praise is no
sooner given than it is immediately recalled. It was his faults that
secured imitators for Seneca (placebat propter sola vitia ib.);
if he was distinguished for wide knowledge (plurimum studii, multa
rerum cognitio
§128), he was often misled
by those who assisted him in his researches; if there is much that is
good in him, ‘much even to admire’ (multa ... probanda in eo, multa
etiam admiranda sunt
§131), still it requires
picking out. In short, so dangerous a model is he, that he should be
read only by those who have come to maturity, and then not so much,
evidently, for improvement, as for the reason that it is good to ‘see
both sides,’—quod exercere potest utrimque iudicium,
ib.
It has already been suggested that the secret of a great part of
Quintilian’s antipathy to Seneca may have been his dislike of the
philosophers, whom his imperial patrons found it necessary from time to
time to suppress. He was anxious to exalt rhetoric at the expense of
philosophy. But he was no doubt also honestly of opinion—and his
position as an instructor of youth would make him feel bound to express
his view distinctly—that Seneca was a dangerous model for the
budding orator to imitate. His merits were many and great: but his
peculiarities lent themselves readily to degradation. Quintilian wished
to put forward a counterblast to the fashionable tendency of the day,
and to recall—in their own interests—to severer models
Seneca’s youthful imitators,—those of whom he writes ad ea
(i.e. eius vitia) se quisque dirigebat effingenda, quae
poterat; deinde quum se iactaret eodem modo dicere, Senecam
infamabat
§127. Seneca was of course
not responsible for the exaggerations of his imitators, and Quintilian
would never have encouraged in his pupils exclusive devotion to any
particular model, especially if that model were characterised by such
peculiar features of style as distinguished Sallust or Tacitus. But he
could not forgive
xxvii
Seneca for his share in the reaction against Cicero37. Admirers of Seneca think
that he failed to make allowance for the influences at work on the
philosopher’s style, and that he judged him too much from the standpoint
of a rhetorician. They admit Seneca’s faults—his tendency to
declamation, the want of balance in his style, his excessive subtlety,
his affectation, his want of method: but they contend that these faults
are compensated by still greater virtues38.
M. Rocheblave, who possesses the appreciation of Seneca traditional among
Frenchmen, follows Diderot in inclining to believe that the philosopher was the
victim of envy and dislike39. For himself he protests in the following terms against what
he considers the inadequacy of Quintilian’s estimate: ‘Da mihi quemvis Annaei
librorum ignarum, et dicito num ex istis Quintiliani laudibus non modo
perspicere, sed suspicari etiam possit quanto sapientiae doctrinaeque gradu
steterit scriptor qui in tota latina facundia optima senserit, humanissima
docuerit, maxima et multo plurima excogitaverit, ita ut, multis ex antiqua
morali philosophia seu graeca seu latina depromptis, adiectis pluribus,
potuerit in unum propriumque saporem omnia illa quasi sapientiae humanae
libamenta confundere? Credisne a tali lectore scriptorem vivo gurgite
exundantem, sensibus scatentem, legentes in perpetuas rapientem cogitationes,
eum denique quem ob vim animi ingeniique acumen iure anteponat Tullio Montanius
noster40, protinus
agnitum iri? ...facile credo pusillas Fabii laudes multum infra viri meritum
stetisse (quod detrectationis sit tutissimum genus) omnes mecum confessuros’
(pp. 44-5).
Whether they were altogether deserved or not, there can be no doubt
xxviii
that the strictures made by so great a literary leader as Quintilian was
in his own day must have greatly contributed to the overthrow of
Seneca’s influence. There is more than one indication, in the literature
of the next generation, that he is no longer regarded as a safe model
for imitation. Tacitus, in reporting the panegyric which Nero delivered
on Claudius after his death, and which was the work of Seneca, says that
it displayed much grace of style (multum cultus), as was to be
expected from one who possessed ingenium amoenum et temporis eius
auribus accommodatum (Ann. xiii. 3). Suetonius tell us how
Caligula disparaged the lenius comtiusque scribendi genus which
Seneca represented; and here (Calig. 53) occurs a similar reference to a
fame that had passed away,—Senecam tum maxime
placentem, just as the elder Pliny, writing about the time of
Seneca’s death, speaks of him as princeps tum eruditorum
(Nat. Hist. xiv. 51). Later writers, such as Fronto and Aulus Gellius41 were
much more unreserved and even immoderate in their censure. And it is a
remarkable fact (noted by M. Rocheblave) that the name of the great
Stoic nowhere occurs in the writings of his successors, Epictetus and
Marcus Aurelius. He who had been the greatest literary ornament of
Nero’s reign disappears almost from notice in the second century.
In regard to the general body of Quintilian’s literary criticism, the
question of greatest interest for modern readers is the degree of its
originality. How far is Quintilian giving us his own independent
judgments on the writings of authors whom he had read at first hand? How
far is he merely registering current criticism, which must already have
found more or less definite expression in the writings and teaching of
previous rhetoricians and grammarians? The circumstances of the case
make it impossible for us to approach the special questions which it
involves with any great prejudice in favour of Quintilian’s originality
in general. The extent of his indebtedness to previous writers, as
regards the main body of his work, may be inferred from a glance at the
‘Index scriptorum et artificum’ in Halm’s edition. In many places he is
merely simplifying the rules of the Greek rhetoricians whom he followed.
Probably he was not equally well up in all the departments of the
subject of which he treats, and he naturally relied, to some extent, on
the works of those who had preceded him. But did he take his literary
criticism from others? Was Quintilian one of those reprehensible persons
who do not scruple to borrow, and to give forth as their own, the
estimate formed and expressed
xxix
by some one else of authors whose works they may never themselves have
read?
In endeavouring to find an answer to this question, it will be
convenient to consider Quintilian’s criticism of the Greek writers apart
from that which he applies to his own countrymen, with whose works he
might a priori be expected to be more familiar. The notes to
that part of the Tenth Book in which he deals with Greek literature (1 §§46-84) will show too
many instances of parallelism for us to believe that, in addressing
himself to this portion of his subject, Quintilian scrupulously avoided
incurring any obligations to others42. No doubt in his long career as a
teacher he had come into contact with traditional opinion as to the
merits and characteristics not only of the Greek but also of the Latin
writers; and in the two years which he tells us he devoted to the
composition of the Institutio43 he may still further have increased his
debt to extraneous sources. It was in fact impossible that Quintilian
should have been unaware of the nature of the criticism current in his
own day, and of what had previously been said and written by others. But
he is not to be thought of as one who, before indicating his opinion of
a particular writer, carefully refers, not to that writer’s works, but
to the opinion of others concerning them. The cases in which he
reproduces, in very similar language, the verdict of others are not
always to be explained on the hypothesis of conscious borrowing44. The
coincidences which can be traced certainly do detract from the
originality of his work.
xxx
But we do not need to believe that, in writing his individual
criticisms, Quintilian always had recourse to the works of others: he no
doubt had them at hand, and his career as a teacher had probably
impressed on his memory many dicta which he could hardly fail to
reproduce, in one form or another, when he came to gather together the
results of his teaching.
Literary criticism at Rome before Quintilian’s time is associated
mainly with the names of Varro, Cicero, and Horace45. Varro was the author of
numerous works bearing on the history and criticism of literature: such
were his de Poetis, de Poematis, περὶ χαρακτήρων, de Actionibus
Scaenicis, Quaestiones Plautinae. Our knowledge of their
scope and character is however derived only by inference from a few
scattered fragments, and in regard to these it is impossible to say
definitely to which of his treatises they severally belong. Quintilian’s
references to his literary activity as well as his great learning
(vir Romanorum eruditissimus x.
1, 95), and the
quotation of his estimate of Plautus (ib. §99), are sufficient evidence
that he was not unacquainted with Varro’s writings. Cicero he knew
probably better than he knew any other author: the extent of his
indebtedness to such works as the Brutus may be inferred from the
parallelisms which occur in his treatment of the Attic orators (x.
1, 76-80). He dissents
expressly from Horace’s estimate of Lucilius (ib. §94): and the
frequency of his references to other literary judgments of Horace (cp.
§§24, 56, 61, 63) shows that he must have been in the habit of
illustrating his teaching by quotations from the works of that cultured
critic of literature and life.
But the author with whom Quintilian’s literary criticism has most in
common is undoubtedly Dionysius of Halicarnassus. It is true that in the
Tenth Book he nowhere expressly mentions him; but references to him by
name as an authority on rhetorical matters are common enough in other
parts of the Institutio46. Quintilian no doubt knew his works
well, especially that which originally consisted of three books περὶ μιμήσεως47. The second
book of this treatise has long been known to scholars
xxxi
in the shape of a fragmentary epitome, which presents so many striking
resemblances to the literary judgments contained in the first chapter of
Quintilian’s Tenth Book, that early commentators, such as, for instance,
H. Stephanus, concluded that Quintilian had borrowed freely from
the earlier writer: multa hinc etiam mutuatum constat; quibus modo
nomine suppresso pro suis utitur, modo addito verbo putant sua
non esse declarat. The parallelisms in question were fully drawn out
by Claussen in the work mentioned above, though Usener justly remarks
that he wrongly includes a good deal that was the common property not
only of Dionysius and Quintilian, but of the whole learned world of the
day: they will all be found duly recorded in the notes to this edition,
1 §§46-84.
The general resemblances between Quintilian and Dionysius are
apparent in their order of treatment. In his introduction to the
Iudicium de Thucydide, the latter sets forth the plan of his
second book in terms which present many points of analogy with the
scheme of the Tenth Book of the Institutio: ἐν τοῖς προεκδοθεῖσι Περὶ τῆς μιμήσεως ὑπομνηατισμοῖς
ἐπεληλυθὼς οὓς ὑπελάμβανον ἐπιφανεστάτους εἶναι ποιητάς τε καὶ
συγγραφεῖς ... καὶ δεδηληκὼς ἐν ὀλίγοις τίνας ἕκαστος αὐτῶν εἰσφέρεται
πραγματικάς τε καὶ λεκτικὰς ἀρετὰς καὶ πῇ μάλιστα χείρων ἑαυτοῦ γίνεται
... ἵνα τοῖς προαιρουμένοις γράφειν τε καὶ λέγειν εὖ καλοὶ καὶ
δεδοκιμασμένοι κανόνες ὦσιν ἐφ᾽ ὧν ποιήσονται τὰς κατὰ μέρος γυμνασίας,
μὴ πάντα μιμούμενοι τὰ παρ᾽ ἐκείνοις κείμενα τοῖς ἀνδράσιν, ἀλλὰ τὰς μὲν
ἀρετὰς αὐτῶν λαμβάνοντες, τὰς δ᾽ ἀποτυχίας φυλαττόμενοι‧ ἁψάμενός τε τῶν
συγγραφέων ἐδήλωσα καὶ περὶ Θουκουδίδου τὰ δοκοῦντά μοι συντόμῳ τε καὶ
κεφαλαιώδει γραφῇ περιλαβών, ... ὡς καὶ περὶ τῶν ἄλλων ἐποίησα‧ οὐ γὰρ
ἦν ἀκριβῆ καὶ διεξοδικὴν δήλωσιν ὑπὲρ ἑκάστου τῶν ἀνδρῶν ποιεῖσθαι
προελόμενον εἰς ἐλάχιστον ὄγκον συναγαγεῖν τὴν πραγματείαν. In
like manner Quintilian, addressing himself throughout to young men
aspiring to success as public speakers, enumerates the various authors
who seem to be fit subjects for reading and imitation. While admitting
that some benefit may be derived from almost every writer (1 §57), he confines himself to
the most distinguished in the various departments of literature (§44 paucos enim, qui sunt
eminentissimi, excerpere in animo est); and even with regard to
these he warns his readers, as Dionysius does, that they are not to
imitate all their characteristics, but only what is good (1 §24:
2 §§14-15).
The order of treatment is almost identical in the two writers. First
come the poets, with the writers of epic poetry at their head: these are
not only named in the same order (Homer, Hesiod, Antimachus, Panyasis),
but they are commended in very similar terms. But if Quintilian had been
translating directly from Dionysius, it is very probable that he would
have mentioned him by name, instead of concealing his obligations
xxxii
by the use of such a phrase as putant (in speaking of
Panyasis—see note on
§54). If he goes on to add
some criticisms which are not in Dionysius, viz. on Apollonius Rhodius,
Aratus, Theocritus, and to mention also Pisander, Nicander, and
Euphorion, it is with the express intimation that they do not rank in
the canon fixed by the grammatici,—the very reason for
which these writers had been omitted by Dionysius. The Greek rhetorician
says nothing of the elegiac and iambic poets mentioned by
Quintilian,—the former in general terms (princeps
habetur Callimachus, secundas confessione
plurimorum Philetas occupavit
§58), the latter with
express reference to the judgment of Aristarchus on the great
Archilochus (§59)48. In treating
of the lyric poets, Quintilian mentions the number nine (§61), which Dionysius does not; but as
regards the substance of his criticisms, he is again almost in exact
agreement with his predecessor. Both refer to Pindar, Stesichorus,
Alcman, and Simonides, with the trifling difference that in Dionysius
Simonides comes second instead of fourth on the list. In
§65 Quintilian proceeds to
deal with the Old Comedy, which finds no place in the treatise of
Dionysius, as we now have it. And there is very little that corresponds
with Dionysius in the sections on Aeschylus, Sophocles, and Euripides.
But it is noticeable that in both Euripides is made to form the
transition to Menander and the New Comedy.
In regard to the poets, then, it seems probable that, while
Quintilian was no doubt familiar with the work of Dionysius, he is
rather incorporating in his criticism the traditions of the literary
schools than borrowing directly from a single predecessor. Claussen was
of opinion that the latter is the true state of the case, and he even
goes so far (p. 348) as to suppose that the original work of
Dionysius (of which the treatise long known as the Ἀρχαίων κρίσις or the De Veterum
Censura is only a fragmentary epitome) must have contained notices
of the elegiac and iambic poets corresponding with those in Quintilian,
as well as of the old comic dramatists and of additional representatives
of the New Comedy. But a comparison of the various passages on which a
judgment may be based seems to make it certain that, while taking
advantage of his knowledge of previous literary criticism (scraps of
which he may have accumulated for teaching purposes during his long
career), he is not slavishly following any single authority49: cp.
§52 datur palma
(Hesiodo,)
xxxiii
§53 grammaticorum
consensus,
§54 ordinem a grammaticis
datum,
§58 princeps habetur
and confessione plurimorum,
§59 ex tribus receptis
Aristarchi iudicio scriptoribus iamborum,
§64 quidam (probably
including Dionysius),
§67 inter plurimos
quaeritur,
§72 consensu ...
omnium. And the tone and substance of his estimate of Homer, of
Euripides, and of Menander50, seem to show that he was prepared to rely, when
necessary, on his own independent judgment (cp. meo quidem
iudicio
§69), especially in dealing
with the poets who would be of greatest service for his professed
purpose.
In both Dionysius and Quintilian the poets are followed by the
historians. The order in Dionysius is Herodotus, Thucydides, Xenophon,
Philistus, and Theopompus; in Quintilian, Thucydides, Herodotus,
Theopompus, Philistus,—with short notices of Ephorus, Clitarchus
and Timagenes. The insertion of the three additional names, and the
precedence given to Theopompus, are not the only points in which
Quintilian differs here from Dionysius, who is known in this case to
have limited himself to the five names in question (Epist. ad Pomp.
767 R: Usener, p. 50, 10): Xenophon is by Quintilian expressly
postponed for treatment among the philosophers. In this he probably
followed an older tradition, which survived also elsewhere. Cicero
speaks of Xenophon as a philosopher (de Orat. ii. §58): in Diogenes
Laertius (ii. 48) it is said of him ἀλλὰ καὶ ἱστορίαν φιλοσόφων
πρῶτος ἔγραψε—a remark which Usener (p. 113) thinks was
probably derived from some library list in which Xenophon was ranked
among the writers of philosophy; and Dio Chrysostom (Or. xviii.) omits
him from his list of the historians, and includes him in that of the
Socratics.
These discrepancies may be relied on to disprove Claussen’s
allegation that Dionysius’s treatise is Quintilian’s primus et
praecipuus fons. It is quite as probable that, in dealing with the
historians, he had before him the passage in the second book of Cicero’s
Orator, to which reference has already been made (§55 sq.). There Cicero mentions
Herodotus, Thucydides, Philistus, Theopompus, and Ephorus, with the
addition of Xenophon, Callisthenes and Timaeus. He may also have had at
hand the great orator’s lost treatise Hortensius, two fragments
of which contain short characterisations of Herodotus, Thucydides,
Philistus, Theopompus, and Ephorus51: in writing it Cicero probably followed
some list similar
xxxiv
to those which were accessible both to Dionysius and Quintilian52. Again there
is sufficient resemblance here between Quintilian and Dio Chrysostom (as
also in regard to Euripides and Menander: Dio Chr. 6, p. 477 sq.)
to justify the supposition that they followed the same tradition. Dio
expressly elevates Theopompus to the second rank (10, p. 479),
τῶν δὲ ἄκρων Θουκυδίδης ἐμοὶ δοκεῖ καὶ τῶν δευτέρων
Θεόπομπος‧ καὶ γὰρ ῥητορικόν τι περὶ τὴν ἀπαγγελίαν τῶν λόγων
ἔχει.. With this compare Quintilian’s words: Theopompus his
proximus ut in historia praedictis minor, ita oratori magis similis
(§74). Ephorus, on the other
hand, is expressly eliminated by Dio.
It is perhaps in dealing with the orators that Quintilian gives the
surest proofs that he is not following any individual guide. The
parallel passages cited in the notes to
§§76-80 are by no means
confined to the writings of Dionysius, though here again words and
phrases occur (see esp. the note on honesti studiosus, in
compositione adeo diligens, &c.,
§79) which seem to suggest
that Quintilian must have kept a common-place book into which he
‘conveyed’ points which struck him as just or appropriate in the
literary criticism of others53. Unlike Dionysius, however, he refers to the
canon of the ten orators (§76) which the recent work of Brzoska,
following A. Reifferscheid, has shown to have originated not with
the critics of Alexandria, but with those of Pergamum54. It is noticeable
that the five orators whom Quintilian selects for notice out of this
canon are identical with those enumerated, in reverse order, by Cicero,
de Orat. iii. 28.
In their treatment of the philosophers, the chief point in common
between Dionysius and Quintilian is that both put Plato and Xenophon
before Aristotle. And, though they agree generally in the terms in which
they speak of Aristotle, there is no other noteworthy coincidence. The
section on Theophrastus and the Stoics has nothing corresponding to it
in Dionysius: here, as elsewhere in the account of philosophy, Cicero
was laid under contribution.
We may infer, then, on the whole, that in regard to his judgments of
the Greek writers Quintilian followed the established order of the
literary schools, and incorporated with the expression of his own
opinion much that was traditional in their thought and phraseology. He
cannot be supposed to have followed any single authority: he must rather
be considered to have gleaned in the whole field of the literature of
criticism from
xxxv
Theophrastus (x.
1, 27) down to his own
day. He accepted from others, with probably few modifications, the
approved lists of poets, historians, orators, and philosophers, and
adopted the conventional practice of writing careful and well-considered
criticisms upon them—“somewhat cut and dried criticisms,” as Prof.
Nettleship says of Dionysius, “which seldom lack sanity, care, and
insight, but which are rather dangerously suited for learning by heart
and handing on to future generations of pupils.” These lists of
‘classical’ writers may probably be traced back, in the main, to the
literary activity of the critics of Alexandria. They would no doubt be
well known to the Greek rhetoricians who were at work on the education
of the Roman youth as early as the beginning of the first century B.C., and may have served as the basis of
their prelections to their pupils. Criticism (κρίσις ποιημάτων, κριτικὴ)
was an essential part of the office of the ‘grammaticus55.’
In speaking of his duties, which fall under the two main heads of
recte loquendi scientia and poetarum enarratio, Quintilian
adds (i. 4, 3): et mixtum his omnibus iudicium est; quo
quidem ita severe sunt usi veteres grammatici ut non versus modo
censoria quadam virgula notare et libros, qui falso viderentur
inscripti, tamquam subditos submovere familia permiserint sibi, sed
auctores alios in ordinem redegerint, alios omnino exemerint numero.
Beginning with a critical examination of individual texts, the
‘grammatici’ gathered up the results of their work, on the literary
side, in short characterisations of the various writers whom they made
the subject of their study, and finally drew up lists of the best
authors in each department of literature, with a careful indication of
their good points as well as of the features in which they were not to
be used as models. This process received a more or less final form at
the hands of Aristophanes of Byzantium and his follower Aristarchus (see
on x.
1, 54), the latter of
whom probably introduced such modifications in the list of his
predecessor as approved themselves to his own judgment (cp. x.
1, 59 tres receptos
Aristarchi iudicio scriptores iamborum). The influence of
this method in Roman literature may be seen, early in the first century,
in the so-called ‘canon’ of Volcatius Sedigitus, preserved by Gellius
(15, 24)56: he makes a list of ten Latin comedians, on the analogy
of the canon of the ten Attic orators. The list of the Alexandrine
critics was probably in the hands of Cicero, as Usener has shown (pp.
114-126), when he wrote his ‘Hortensius,’—a treatise which seems
to have originally contained an introductory sketch of the great
contributors to the various departments
xxxvi
of literature, by way of preparation for the main purpose of the
dialogue,—the praise of philosophy57.
Then there is Dio Chrysostom, a writer who flourished not long after Quintilian
himself, and whose reproduction of similar judgments has already been noted.
Such divergences as occur may probably be accounted for, at least in part, by
the different points of view from which the various critics wrote. In the
preliminary sketch in the Hortensius the object seems to have been not
the education of youth but the recreation of maturity: Dio draws a careful
distinction between the branches which serve for the student of rhetoric, and
those which may be expected to benefit and delight men who have finished their
studies: Quintilian’s aim, again and again reiterated, is to lay down a course
of reading suited to form the taste of a young man aspiring to success as a
speaker.
The probability that there existed such traditional lists as those
referred to (which would also be of service in the arrangement of the
great public libraries), is strikingly illustrated in Usener’s
Epilogus (p. 128 sq.) by the publication of one which may here be
transcribed as of great interest to readers of Quintilian. It will be
noticed that though the philosophers are omitted, it contains many
points of analogy with that followed by Quintilian, particularly the
addition of the later elegiac poets, Philetas and Callimachus. Names
only are given, without any criticism attached58.
Greek numerals were printed with overlines ¯. They are shown here
in ´ form to reduce text-display problems.
Ποιηταὶ πέντε‧ Ὅμηρος Ἡσίοδος
Πείσανδρος Πανύασις Ἀντίμαχος.
ἰαμβοποιοὶ τρεῖς‧ Σημονίδης Ἀρχίλοχος Ἱππῶναξ.
τραγῳδοποιοὶ ε´‧ Ἀισχύλος Σοφοκλῆς Εὐριπίδης Ἴων
Ἀχαιός.
κωμῳδοποιοὶ
ἀρχαίας ζ´‧ Ἐπίχαρμος Κρατῖνος Εὔπολις Ἀριστοφάνης Φερεκράτης Κράτης
Πλάτων.
μέσης κωμῳδίας β´‧ Ἀντιφάνες Ἄλεξις Θούριος.
νέας κωμῳδίας ε´‧ Μένανδρος Φιλιππίδης
Δίφιλος Φιλήμων Ἀπολλόδωρος.
ἐλεγείων ποιηταὶ δ´‧ Καλλῖνος Μιμνέρμος Φιλητᾶς
Καλλίμαχος.
λυρικοι
θ´‧ Ἀλκμάν Ἀλκαῖος Σαπφώ Στησίχορος Πίνδαρος Βακχυλίδης Ἴβυκος Ἀνακρέων
Σιμωνίδης....
xxxvii
ῥητορες θ´‧ Δημοσθένης Λυσίας Ὑπερείδης Ἰσοκράτης Ἀισχίνης
Λυκοῦργος Ἰσαῖος Ἀντιφῶν Ἀνδοκίδης.
ἱστορικοὶ ι´‧ Θουκυδίδης Ἡρόδοτος Ξενοφῶν Φίλιστος Θεόπομπος
Ἔφορος Ἀναξιμένης Καλλισθένης Ἑλλάνικος Πολύβιος.
In regard to the historians, Usener notes that this list seems to
indicate the principle on which they were selected and arranged. They
are enumerated in pairs, Herodotus and Thucydides coming first, with
their imitators Xenophon and Philistus immediately following them. Then
come Theopompus and Ephorus, as representing the second rank; and next
the historians of Alexander’s victories, Anaximenes and Callisthenes
(cp. Cic. de Orat. ii. §58), in place of whom Clitarchus is mentioned by
Quintilian. Peculiar features about the list given above are that
Thucydides comes first of all (just as Demosthenes does among the
orators), and that, perhaps to make up the number ten, a fifth pair of
historians is added,—Hellanicus from those of older date, and
Polybius to represent more recent writers.
Usener states the conclusion at which he arrives in the following
words, which may be accepted with the proviso that they are not to be
taken as meaning that Quintilian was altogether ignorant of what
Dionysius wrote: Iudicia de poetis scriptoribusque Graecis non a
Dionysio Quintilianus mutuatus est. Igitur ne Dionysius quidem sua
profert, sed diversum uterque exemplum iudiciorum ut plerumque
consonantium expressit. Fontis utrique communis antiquitatem Hortensius
Tullianus cum Dione comparatus demonstravit. Posteriore tempore cum
eruditionis copia in angustae memoriae paupertatem sensim contraheretur,
iudiciis neglectis sola electorum auctorum nomina relicta sunt et
laterculi formam induerunt. Quintilian did not transcribe his
criticisms of Greek literature from Dionysius. He had no need to do so:
the materials from which Dionysius had drawn were available also to him.
This is sufficient to account for the resemblances in their critical
judgments. But on the other hand it is improbable that Quintilian, in
the course of his reading and teaching, had not studied the writings of
Dionysius; and some at least of the coincidences to which prominence is
given in the notes in this edition must have been the result of his
acquaintance with the work of his predecessor.
In his review of Latin literature, Quintilian is no doubt giving us
the fruit of his own study and independent judgment, though here again
the notes will indicate that he was familiar with what other writers,
such as Cicero and Horace, had said before in the way of literary
criticism. The examination of his estimate of Seneca has already proved
that he did not hesitate to formulate his own opinions, and to press
them, when
xxxviii
necessary, upon his pupils. A reference to the Analysis
(pp. 3-5) will show that in this part of his work Quintilian
follows the method which had been traditionally applied to the criticism
of the Greek writers. The same order is preserved (§85); the various departments of
literature are each compared with the corresponding departments in Greek
(§§93,
99,
101,
105,
123); and individual
writers are pitted against each other, and are sometimes characterised
in similar terms. In all this Quintilian is consistent with the scheme
according to which he had evidently determined to arrange his work: he
is consistent also with the general tradition of literary criticism
among his countrymen. “As Latin literature since Naevius had adopted
Greek models and Greek metres, every Latin writer of any pretensions
took some Greek author as his ideal of excellence in the particular
style which he was adopting. Criticism accordingly drifted into the
vicious course of comparison; of pitting every Latin writer against a
Greek writer, as though borrowing from a man would constitute you his
rival. Thus Ennius was a Homer, Afranius a Menander, Plautus an
Epicharmus, before the days of Horace: in Horace’s time there were three
Homers, Varius, Valgius, and Vergil. Cicero and Demosthenes were
compared by the Greek critics in the Augustan age, and by the time of
Quintilian Sallust has become the Latin Thucydides, Livy the Latin
Herodotus59.” It is this idea of making ‘canons’ of Latin writers,
to correspond as nearly as possible with those which he had accepted
from former critics for the classical writers of Greece, that gives an
air of artificiality to Quintilian’s criticism of Latin literature, and
interferes somewhat with the general effect which his sane and sober
appreciations would otherwise produce. The individual estimates are in
the main all that could be wished for, notably the enthusiastic eulogy
of Cicero (§§105-112),
which it is interesting to compare with a similar passage in the
treatise ‘On the Sublime.’ “The same difference,” says the writer, “may
be discerned in the grandeur of Cicero as compared with that of his
Grecian rival. The sublimity of Demosthenes is generally sudden and
abrupt: that of Cicero is equally diffused. Demosthenes is vehement,
rapid, vigorous, terrible; he burns and sweeps away all before him; and
hence we may liken him to a whirlwind or a thunderbolt: Cicero is like a
widespread conflagration, which rolls over and feeds on all around it,
whose fire is extensive and burns long, breaking out successively in
different places, and finding its fuel now here, now there60.” Excellent
also are the shorter characterisations of such writers as Sallust
(immortalem Sallusti velocitatem
1 §102), of Livy
(Livi lactea ubertas
1 §32: mirae
iucunditatis clarissimique
xxxix
candoris
§101), of Ovid (nimium
amator ingenii sui
§88), and of Horace (et
insurgit aliquando et plenus est iucunditatis et gratiae et varius
figuris et verbis felicissime audax
§96). But the general
impression we derive is that Quintilian is producing many of his
criticisms to order, as it were: so much is he tied down to the plan he
has adopted. It is to this same method of mechanical
comparison—born of the artificial traditions of the literary
schools—that we owe Plutarch’s ‘Parallel Lives’; and it has not
been without imitators in more recent times61.
IV.
Style and Language.
Quintilian’s own style is pretty much what might be expected from the
tone of his judgments on others. Cicero was his model, Seneca
represented to him everything that was to be avoided: but the interval
of a hundred years which separated him from the former was a sufficient
barrier to anything more than an approximation to his style, while on
the other hand he does not succeed in emancipating himself entirely from
the literary tendencies of his own time, which found so complete
expression in the writings of Seneca. All the writers of what is known
as the Silver Age possess certain marked characteristics, which
differentiate them from the best models of the republican period; and of
these Quintilian has his share. But he did not fall in with the
fashionable depreciation of those models. He knew that it was impossible
to bring back the Latinity of the Golden Age in all its characteristic
features; but he could at least lift up his voice against the
affectation and artificiality of his contemporaries, who looked upon
that Latinity as tame, insipid, and commonplace. The point of view from
which, as we have already seen, he regarded Seneca may be stated with a
wider application: corruptum et omnibus vitiis fractum dicendi genus
revocare ad severiora iudicia contendo, x.
1, 125.
The depravation of taste which had gone hand in hand with the moral
and social degeneration of the Roman people, in the era of transition
from republic to empire, has already been touched upon in the discussion
xl
of Quintilian’s criticism of Seneca. The literary public had lost all
appetite for the natural straightforwardness of the Ciceronian style: it
craved for something akin to the highly seasoned dishes by which the
epicures of the day sought to stimulate a jaded palate62. It was not enough
now to clothe the thought in pure, clear, and elegant language, even
when adorned by a wealth of expression that bordered on exuberance, and
made musical by the exquisite modulation of the period. No one could win
a hearing who did not countenance the fashionable craze for affectation,
abruptness, and extravagance. Directness, ease, and intelligibility were
no recommendations63. In order to strike and stimulate, everything must be
full of point. Feebleness of thought was considered to be redeemed by
epigram and formal antithesis. The amplitude and artistic symmetry of
the Ciceronian period gave place to a broken and abrupt style, the main
object of which was to arrest attention and to challenge admiration.
Showy passages were looked for, expressed in new and striking
phraseology, such as could be reproduced and even handed on to others64. The
charm of style and the test of its excellence consisted in its being
artificial, inflated, meretricious, involved, obscure—in a word,
depraved65.
Quintilian’s distaste for the prevailing fashion inclined him to
return to the models of the best republican period. Exclusive devotion
to one particular type was forbidden him, if by nothing else, by his own
declared principles,—non qui maxime imitandus et solus
imitandus est (2 §24); and accordingly, in
spite of his great admiration for Cicero, we find several well-marked
features of difference between him and his master, not only in the use
of words, but also in the structure and composition of sentences66. Indeed, it
could not have been otherwise. Quintilian’s mission was to restore to
Latin composition the direct and natural character of the earlier style;
but he could not extirpate that tendency to poetical expression which
had taken root at Rome as far back as the
xli
days of Sallust, and was fostered and encouraged in his own time by the
wider study of Greek. He was conscious also of the need of making some
concessions to the popular demand for ornament. The power of the
‘sententious’ style proved itself even on its critic and antagonist.
That he was aware of the compromise he was making is clear from such a
passage as the following, in which he indicates how Cicero may be
adapted to contemporary requirements: ad cuius (Ciceronis) voluptates
nihil equidem quod addi possit invenio, nisi ut sensus nos quidem
dicamus plures: nempe enim fieri potest salva tractatione causae et
dicendi auctoritate, si non crebra haec lumina et continua fuerint et
invicem offecerint. Sed me hactenus cedentem nemo insequatur
ultra, &c. (xii. 10, 46-7). There was a point beyond which he
refused to go: clearness and simplicity must never be sacrificed to
effect. These qualities may be claimed for Quintilian’s style; it is
also sufficiently varied for his subject. When it is obscure, we must
remember the defective state in which his text has come down to us67.
It is quite possible to exemplify from the Tenth Book alone the main
features in which Quintilian’s language and style differ from those of
Cicero. And first, in regard to his vocabulary, a list may be appended
of words which, though not peculiar to Quintilian, are yet not to be
found in the republican period68.
Amaritudo, figuratively (Plin. S., Sen., Val. Max.), x.
1, 117.
Auditorium (Tac. Dial., Plin. S., Suet.), x.
1, 79: cp. v. 12, 20
licet hanc (eloquentiam) auditoria probent.
Classis, of a class in a school (Suet., Col., Petr.), x.
5, 21.
Confinis, figuratively (Ovid, Sen.), x.
5, 12.
xlii
Consummatus (Sen., Mart., Plin. S.), x.
5, 14: cp. i. 9, 3; ii. 19, 1, and
often. The Ciceronian equivalent is perfectus.
Decretorius (Sen., Plin., Suet.), x.
5, 20: cp. vi.
4, 6.
Diversitas (Tac., Plin., Suet.), x.
1, 106.
Evalesco (Verg., Hor., Plin., Tac.), x.
2, 10: cp. ii. 8, 5;
viii. 6, 33.
Expavesco (Hor., Liv., Sen., Plin., Suet.), x.
3, 30: cp. ix. 4, 35;
vi. 2, 31.
Extemporalis (Petr., Tac., Plin. S.), x.
6, 1,
5 and
6;
7, 13,
16,
18: cp. iv. 1, 54
extemporalis oratio, for which Cicero would have written
subita et fortuita oratio.
Exundo (Sen., Plin., Tac.), x.
1, 109 Cicero vivo
gurgite exundat.
Favorabilis (Vell., Sen., Plin., Tac., Suet.), x.
5, 21: cp. iv. 1, 21
and often.
Formator (Col., Sen., Plin. S.), x.
2, 20 alienorum
ingeniorum formator (sc. praeceptor).
Immutesco (Statius), x.
3, 16.
Inadfectatus (Plin. S.), x.
1, 82.
Inconcessus (Verg., Ov.), x.
2, 26.
Incredulus (Hor.), x.
3, 11: cp. xii.
8, 11.
Indecens (Petr., Sen., Mart.), x.
2, 19. The Ciceronian
equivalent is indecorus.
Inlaboratus (Sen.), x.
1, 111, and often.
Insenesco (Hor., Ov., Tac.), x.
3, 11.
Inspiro (Verg., Ov., Sen.), x.
3, 24: cp. xii. 10,
62.
Praesumo (Verg., Sen., Plin., Tac.), x.
5, 4: cp. xi.
1, 27.
Profectus (Ov., Sen., Plin. S., Suet), x.
3, 2 and
15: cp. i. 2, 26, and
often. Cicero uses progressus, processus.
Professor (Col., Tac., Suet.), x.
5, 18: cp. ii. 11, 1,
and often.
Prosa (Vell., Col., Sen., Plin.), x.
7, 19,—adjective: cp. xi.
2, 39. As a noun, ix. 4, 52, and often.
Secessus (Verg., Ov., Plin., Tac.), x.
3, 23 and
28;
5, 16. Cicero uses
recessus.
Substringo (Sen., Tac., Suet.), x.
5, 4.
Versificator (Just., Col.), x.
1, 89.
There is a touch of ‘nationalism’ about Quintilian’s use of the word
Romanus for Latinus. Litterae latinae,
scriptores latini, poetae latini, are the usual forms with
Cicero and the writers of the best period: Quintilian has Romanes
auctores (x.
1, 85), sermo
Romanus (ib.
§100), litterae
Romanae (ib.
§123), and often
elsewhere.
The following words appear in Quintilian (Book X) for the first
time, though of course it does not follow that they are his own
coinage:—
xliii
Adnotatio, x.
2, 7 brevis
adnotatio.
Circulatorius, x.
1, 8 circulatoria
volubilitas: cp. ii. 4, 15. The noun circulator seems to
have been used first by Asinius Pollio: afterwards it is found in
Seneca, Petronius, Plin. S., Apuleius, &c.
Destructio, x.
5, 12 destructio et
confirmatio sententiarum. Suetonius (Galba 12) uses this word in its
proper sense of ‘pulling down’ walls.
Offensator (ἅπαξ
λεγόμ.), x.
3, 20.
Significantia, x.
1, 121.
Several words occur which, either in point of form or meaning, indicate
the influence of Greek analogies:—
Recipere, x.
7, 31, and often
elsewhere, in the sense of probare. So the Greek ἀποδέχεσθαι, ἐνδέχεσθαι. Cp. Plin. H. N.
7. 8, 29.
Supinus, x.
2, 17 used, like ὕπτιος in Dion. Hal., for
‘languid,’ ‘spiritless.’ Cp. esp. (of Isocr.) ὑπτία (sc. λέξις) ... καὶ κεχυμένη πλουσίως, p. 538, 6, R: also
p. 1006, 14, R.
Densus (πυκνός),
for pressus: x.
1, 76.
Pedestris (sc. oratio), πεζὸς λόγος: x.
1, 81.
To these may be added the use of subripere (for clam
facere), on the analogy of κλέπτειν τι, iv. 1, 78: transire (for
effugere), on the analogy of παρέρχεσθαι, ix. 2, 49 (cp. Stat. Theb. ii. 335
nil transit amantes): finis for ὅρος: maxime, with numerals, for μάλιστα, &c.
To the same source must be attributed the frequent use in Quintilian
of propter quod, per quod, quae, &c. on the
analogy of δι᾽ ὅ, δι᾽ ἅ (see on x.
1, 10): circa
(used like περί), see on x.
1, 52: multum
(with compar.) like πολὺ
μεῖζον (x.
1, 94): sunt ...
differentes,
2 §16.
The influence of poetical usage may be seen in the frequent employment
of simple verbs in the sense of compounds, of abstract nouns in a
concrete sense (e.g. facilitatem
3 §7), and also in
certain changes in the meaning of words, each of which will be noticed
in its proper place: e.g. componere for sedare;
vacare used impersonally; venus for venustas;
beatus for uber, fecundus; secretum;
olim of future time; utrimque of opposite sides, &c.
Such changes in meaning as will be noted in connection with words like
valetudo, ambitio, advocatus, auctor,
cultus, quicumque, ubicumque, demum, and all
the phenomena connected with the substantivation of the adjective (e.g.
studiosus), are common to Quintilian with other writers of the
Silver Age.
Taking now the Parts of Speech in their order, we may illustrate the
peculiarities of Quintilian’s vocabulary by reference to the Tenth
Book.
xliv
I. Nouns.
Advocatus for causidicus, patronus: x.
1, 111 (where see
note): cp. iii. 8, 51; xi. 1, 59: Plin. S. 7, 22: Suet. Claud. 15. For
examples of the use of this word in its earlier sense cp. v. 6, 6; xi.
3, 132; xii. 3, 2.
Ambitio carries with it in Quintilian, as generally in the
Silver Age, a sinister meaning, so that Quintilian can call it a
vitium: i. 2, 22 licet ipsa vitium sit ambitio frequenter
tamen causa virtutum est. So perversa ambitio x.
7, 21: cp. Tac. Ann.
vi. 46: Iuv. 8, 135. For the Ciceronian use of the word (popularis
gratiae captatio ad adipiscendos honores), see pro Sulla §11: pro
Planc. §45: de Orat. i. §1.
Auctor, almost identical with scriptor: see on x.
1, 24. Cp. Ep. ad
Tryph. §1 legendis auctoribus qui sunt innumerabiles.
Cultus = ornatus: x.
1, 124;
2, 17. Cp. iii. 8, 58
in verbis cultum adfectaverunt: xi. 1, 58 nitor et cultus.
Cicero uses ornatus and nitor as applied to language:
Orat. §80 ornatus verborum, §13 4 orationis. Cp. Tac.
Dial. 20, 23.
Opinio is used for ‘reputation’ (existimatio), whether
good or bad. So x.
5, 18 (where see note):
7, 17: cp. xii. 1, 12 contemptu opinionis: ii. 12, 5 adfert et
ista res opinionem: ix. 2, 74 veritus opinionem iactantiae:
iv. 1, 33 opinione adrogantiae laborare: Tac. Dial. 10 ne
opinio quidem et fama ... aeque poetas quam oratores sequitur: Sen.
Ep. 79, 16. In Cicero it is found only with a genitive (ad Att. 7, 2
opinio integritatis: cp. Liv. xlv. 38, 6: Caes. B.G. vii. 59, 5:
Tac. Dial. 15), or with an adjective (Verr. ii. 3, 24 falsam ...
malam opinionem).
Opus frequently means ‘branch,’ ‘department’ in Quintilian: x.
1, 9 (where see note).
It is often identical with ‘genus’: e.g. x.
1, 123 where they are
used together, quo in genere—in hoc opere. Cp. iii. 7, 28
quamquam tres status omnes cadere in hoc opus (laudativum genus)
possint.
Valetudo, always in the sense of ‘bad health’ in Quintilian
and contemporary writers. If ‘good health’ is meant, an adjective is
used: e.g. x.
3, 26 bona
valetudo: vi. 3, 77 commodior valetudo. With Cicero it may
mean either: de Fin. v. §84 bonum valetudo, miser morbus: de Am.
§8 quod in collegio nostro non adfuisses, valetudinem respondeo
causam: ad Fam. iv. 1, 1: in Tusc. iv. §80 he has mala
valetudo. With Quintilian’s usage cp. Tac. Hist. iii. 2; Ann. vi.
50: Suet. Claud. 26: Plin. S. 2, 20.
Venus for venustas, x.
1, 79 (where see note);
ib.
§100. This use of the word
is poetical: Hor. A. P. 320; Car. iv. 13, 17. For venustas,
lepor occurs in Cicero with the same meaning, see de Orat. i.
§243: Or. §96.
Other points in connection with the use of substantives are referred
to
xlv
in the notes: e.g. the periphrastic construction with vis or
ratio and the gerund (see on vim dicendi x.
1, 1): the concrete use
of certain nouns in the plural (see on historias
§75: cp. lectiones
§45): the concrete use of
abstract nouns (e.g. facilitatem
3 §7: profectus
5 §14: cp. silvarum
amoenitas for silvae amoenae
3 §24). The frequent
occurrence of verbal nouns in -tor must also be noted: in Quint.
they have come to be used almost like adjectives or participles
(hortator x.
3, 23:
offensator ib.
§20), and may, like
adjectives, be compared by the aid of an adverb (nimium amator
1 §88, where see
note)69.
II. Adjectives.
Beatus (abundans, fecundus): x.
1, 61 beatissima
rerum verborumque copia, where see note: cp. v. 14, 31 beatissimi
amnes. Cicero does not use beatus of things: cp. de Rep. ii.
19, 34 abundantissimus amnis.
Densus (like pressus in Cicero):
§§68,
73 (with notes), densus
et brevis et semper instans sibi Thucydides: cp. Cic. de Orat. ii.
§59 Thucydides ita verbis aptus et pressus. So x.
1, 76,
106.
Exactus: x.
2, 14 exactissimo
iudicio:
7 §30 exacti
commentarii. Exactus bears the same relation to
exigere as perfectus does to perficere, with which
exigere is, in Quintilian, synonymous: e.g. i. 5, 2;
9, 2. So Hor. Ep. ii. 1, 72: Suet. Tib. 18: Plin. Ep. 8, 23; also
M. Seneca, and Val. Max. For exactus Cicero used
diligenter elaboratus (Brut. §312) or accuratus (ad Att.
xiii. 45, 3): or perfectus (de Orat. i. §§34, 35).
Expositus = tritus, communis: x.
5, 11 voluptatem
expositis dare: Iuv. 7, 54 vatem—qui nihil expositum soleat
deducere, hoc qui communi feriat carmen triviale moneta: Sen. E. 55.
Cicero has (de Orat. i. 31, 137) omnium communia et contrita
praecepta.
Incompositus: x.
1, 66 rudis in
plerisque et incompositus (Aeschylus): cp. iv. 5, 10; ix. 4, 32:
Verg. Georg. i. 350 motus incompositos: Hor. Sat. i. 10, 1: Tac.
Dial. 26: Sen. Ep. 40, 4: Liv. xxiii. 27; v. 28.
Otiosus = inutilis, inanis. See on x.
1, 76 tam nihil
otiosum: cp.
2 §17. So Tac. Dial.
40: Plin. S. 10, 62. In Cicero we have vacuus, otio
abundans, Brut. §3: N.D. iii. §39.
xlvi
Praecipuus, used by itself, see on x.
1, 94.
Summus, in sense of extremus: x.
1, 21, where see note.
The usage is poetical: cp. Plaut. Pers. 33; Asin. 534: Verg. Aen. ii.
324 venit summa dies: Hor. Ep. i. 1, 1: Ovid ex Pont. iv. 9, 59,
Am. iii. 9, 27: Iuv. i. 5. Schmalz (Ueber den Sprachgebrauch des
Asinius Pollio—München, 1890, p. 36) contends that this
use is not Ciceronian, for while Pollio writes summo ludorum die
(ad Fam. x. 32, 3) and Caelius summis Circensibus ludis (ad
Fam. viii. 12, 3—Manutius: extremis diebus Circensium
ludorum meorum), Cicero himself says (ad Fam. vii. 1, 3)
extremus elephantorum dies fuit.
Supinus = ignavus (as ὕπτιος, p. xliii. above): x.
2, 17 otiosi et
supini: cp. ix. 4, 137 tarda et supina compositio: Iuv. i.
66: Mart. vi. 42 Non attendis et aure supina Iamdudum negligenter
audis. This word may have been used first by Quintilian in this
sense: in Cicero it is used of the body, e.g. de Div. i. 53, 120.
Noticeable also, and characteristic of his time, is Quintilian’s use
of plerique and plurimi, the former having often the force
of nonnulli, plures, multi (x.
1 §§26,
31,
34,
37,
66,
106:
2 §13:
3 §16), the latter
losing its force as a superlative, and standing generally for
permulti (x.
1 §§12,
22,
27,
40,
49,
58,
60,
65,
81,
95,
107,
109,
117,
128:
2 §§6,
14,
24:
6 §1:
7 §17).
Nothing is more common in Quintilian than the use of adjectives (and
participles) in the place of nouns.70 In some cases this arises from the
actual omission of a noun, which can readily be supplied to define the
meaning of the adjective: for example x.
5, 20
decretoriis (sc. armis) exerceatur:
1 §100 togatis
(sc. fabulis) excellit Afranius:
1 §88 lascivus
quidem in herois (sc. versibus) quoque Ovidius. But in
most cases there is no perceptible ellipse; the general idea intended is
contained in the adjective itself. In the Masculine and Feminine only
those adjectives can be used as nouns which express personal qualities,
as of character, position, reputation, &c.: the Neuter denotes
generally the properties of things, mostly abstractions. Following the
arrangement of Dr. Hirt’s paper, we may cite examples from the Tenth
Book as follows:—
The Neuter Adjective.
(1) The Neuter singular used by itself:—
Nom.
3 §22 secretum in
dictando perit.
xlvii
Acc.
3 §30 faciat sibi
cogitatio secretum.
Gen.
3 §27 optimum
secreti genus:
§30 amator secreti.
Partitive genitives:
6 §1 aliquid
vacui: dependent on adj.
1 §79 honesti
studiosus.
Dat.: occurs in other books: e.g. i. pr. 4 proximum vero: vi.
3, 21 contrarium serio.
Abl.
7 §16 cum stilus
secreto gaudeat.
Frequent instances occur in prepositional phrases, with accusative
and ablative: these are mostly local, and the great extension of the
usage in post-Augustan times points to the influence of Greek analogy
(ἐξ
ἴσου, ἐκ τοῦ φανεροῦ κ.τ.λ.). Examples are: in altum
7 §28 (= in
profundum): e contrario
1 §19: in
deposito
3 §33: in
expedito
7 §24:
(vertere) in Latinum
5 §2 (containing the
idea of locality: cp. ex Graeco): ex integro
1 §20 (where see note):
in posterum
3 §14: in
publicum
7 §1: in
universum
1 §42: in peius
2 §16: ex
proximo
1 §13: a summo
3 §2: ad
ultimum
7 §7; ib.
16: ex ultimo ib.
10.
Sometimes the adjective, in addition to being used substantivally,
governs like a noun, the genitive depending on it being always
partitive: e.g. multum
1 §§80,
94,
115: plus
1 §§77,
86,
97,
99,
106: plurimum
1 §§60,
65,
81,
117,
128;
3 §1;
5 §§3,
10;
6 §1;
7 §17: minus
2 §12: quantum
5 §8. And with a
pronoun:
7 §24 promptum hoc
et in expedito positum.
(2) The Neuter Plural.
Instances need not be cited where adjectives are used substantivally
in cases which can be recognised as neuter: e.g.
3 §6 scriptorum
proxima. Quintilian gave a wide extension to the usage even where
the case could not be recognised. It can be detected most easily, of
course, when the adjective is used alongside of nouns, e.g.
5 §8 sua brevitati
gratia, sua copiae, alia translatis virtus, alia
propriis; or when another adjective or pronoun is used in the nom.
or acc., e.g.
1 §35:
3 §32 novorum
interpositione priora confundant:
5 §11. Other instances
(of 2nd and 3rd decl.) are
7 §30 subitis ex
tempore occurrant:
5 §1 ex latinis:
7 §6 ex
diversis:
1 §66 in
plerisque:
5 §11 varietatem
similibus dare. So with comparatives and superlatives:
1 §63 maioribus
aptior:
1 §58 cum optimis
satiati sumus, varietas tamen nobis ex vilioribus grata sit:
5 §6 certe proximis
locus.
The Masculine Adjective.
(1) The Masculine Plural.
In the following places masculine adjectives are found together, in
the plural, or else along with nouns:
1 §§71,
124,
130:
2 §17:
3 §16:
5 §1.
xlviii
Single instances are (Genitive) veterum
1 §§97,
118: magnorum
1 §25: (Dative)
imperitis
7 §15:
antiquis
2 §17:
studiosis
1 §45 (where see note:
Cicero would have had dicendi, or eloquentiae studiosis):
bonis
2 §3: (Accusative)
veteres
1 §42: posteros
1 §§112,
120:
2 §6: obvios
3 §29:
intentos
3 §33: (Ablative)
ex nostris
1 §114: ab
antiquis
1 §126: de
novis
1 §40. With the
comparative
5 §19 apud
maiores:
5 §7 priores:
superlative
1 §58 confessione
plurimorum. In
1 §123 we have one of
the few instances of the addition of another adjective to an adjective
doing duty for a noun—paucissimos adhuc eloquentes litterae
Romanae tulerunt.
(2) The Masculine Singular.
When the adjective can denote a class collectively, it may be used as
a noun: this is quite frequent in Quintilian, as in most writers,
especially when the adjective stands near a substantive, e.g.
perorare in adulterum, aleatorem, petulantem ii.
4, 22.
The following are cases of the isolated use of the masculine
singular: (Genitive) x.
2, 26 prudentis
est: (Accusative)
2 §3 similem raro
natura praestat:
3 §19 quasi
conscium infirmitatis nostrae timentes.
The Participle used as a Noun.
(1) The Neuter Singular.
Participles follow the analogy of the adjective. In addition to those
which have actually become nouns (e.g. responsum,
praeceptum, promissum, &c.), Quintilian uses several
participles as nouns in a manner that is again an extension of classical
usage. So even with a pronoun, or another adjective: e.g.
2 §2 ad propositum
praescriptum:
§11 ad alienum
propositum:
5 §12 decretum
quoddam atque praeceptum:
7 §24 promptum hoc
et in expedito positum.
(2) The Neuter Plural.
Instances of the usual kind are too numerous to mention: the
participle in -us, -a, -um is found frequently in
abl., gen., and dat. Not so common is the plural of the 3rd decl.:
1 §86 eminentibus
vincimur:
3 §5 nec protinus
offerentibus se gaudeamus, adhibeatur indicium inventis,
dispositio probatis.
(3) The Perfect Participle.
In regard to the masculine plural Quintilian here follows the
Ciceronian usage, according to which the participle is employed when a
definite class of individuals is indicated, and a qui clause when
the description is more unrestricted. Instances of the participle are
1 §131 robustis et
xlix
satis firmatis legendus:
3 §2 7 occupatos in
noctem necessitas agit:
5 §17
exercitatos; rather more general is a conrogatis
laudantur
1 §18. The Masculine
Singular is, in classical Latin, generally found along with a
substantive, it being incorrect to use any such expression as, for
example, manes occisi placare. Quintilian makes a very free use
of this participle: e.g. i. 2, 24 reddebat victo certaminis
polestatem: v. 12, 2 spiculum in corpore occisi inventum
est, &c.
(4) The Future Participle.
The use of this participle received a great extension in
post-Augustan times. The following are instances of its employment as a
substantive: i. 4, 17 non doceo, sed admoneo docturos: 21
liberum opinaturis relinquo: and in the singular iv. 1, 52 hoc
adicio ut dicturus intueatur quid, apud quem dicendum sit.
(5) The Present Participle.
Frequent as is the substantival use of this participle in all Latin
authors, in none is it more frequent than in Quintilian—generally
in the Gen. and Dat. Sing. and Plur., not so common in the Nom. and Acc.
Pl., and seldom in the Abl. and Nom. Sing. In some instances it is found
alongside of a noun: e.g.
2 §2:
7 §3. The most common
example of the Gen. Sing., standing alone, is (as might be expected from
the subject-matter of the Institutio) discentis,
dicentis, &c., e.g.
1 §6: for the Dative see
1 §§17,
24,
30: Accusative
1 §20: Ablative
1 §15 (intellegere
sine demonstrante): eminentibus
1 §86: cp. illis ...
recipientibus
5 §12. In the plural,
the Genitive and Dative are equally common: for the Nominative may be
quoted
2 §15
imitantes: for the Accusative
1 §16:
2 §26:
3 §25.
III. Pronouns.
Ipse follows the usual rules. For an interesting point in
connection with its use, see on
2 §15. It is often
used as = per se, e.g.
1 §117:
3 §21: often with
pronouns, e.g. vel hoc ipso (δι᾽ αὐτὸ τοῦτο)
1 §75, cp.
5 §8. For et ipse
see note on
1 §31.
Hic seems frequently to be used with reference to the
circumstances of the writer’s own times: e.g.
1 §43 recens haec
lascivia: and probably also
7 §31 hanc brevem
adnotationem. (This is certainly the case with ille: e.g.
illis dictandi deliciis
3 §18: ille
laudantium clamor
1 §17.) It has been
suggested that in some cases the manuscripts may be wrong: e.g.
1 §6 ex his (for
ex iis?): but cp.
1 §§25,
33,
40, &c. Such instances
of a preference for hic over is come under Priscian’s rule
(xvi. 58), Hic
l
non solum de praesente verum etiam de absente possumus
dicere, ad intellectum referentes demonstrativum.
The conjunction of nullus and non
(= quisque, omnis) is common in Quintilian and
Suetonius:
7 §25 nullo non
tempore et loco: cp. iii. 6, 7: ix. 4, 83: Suet. Aug. 32; Tib. 66;
Nero 16, &c.: Mart. 8, 20.
Quicunque has in Quintilian completely acquired the force of
an indefinite pronoun: see on
1 §12; 105.
Quilibet unus (1 §1) does not occur in Cicero:
cp. i. 12, 7: v. 10, 117.
Ut qui is frequently found in place of the Ciceronian
quippe qui, utpote qui: see on
1 §55.
IV. Verbs.
An instance of the use of simple for compound verbs (frequent in
Quintilian and the Silver Age generally, and a mark of the ‘poetization’
of Latin prose) occurs
1 §99 licet
Caecilium veteres laudibus ferant: see note ad loc., and cp.
Plin. Ep. viii. 18, 3: Suet. Oth. 12, Vesp. 6. In Cicero we have
efferre laudibus, de Am. §24: de Off. ii. §36: de Orat. iii. §52.
So elsewhere in Quintilian finire for definire,
solari for consolari, spargere for
dispergere, &c.
Examples of a change in the meaning of verbs common to Cicero and
Quintilian are the following:—
Componere occurs now in the sense of sedare,
placare: e.g. ix. 4, 12 ut, si quid fuisset turbidiorum
cogitationum, componerent: iii. 4, 15 concitando componendisve
adfectibus (Cicero, de Orat. i. §202 motum dicendo vel
excitare vel sedare): cp. x.
1, 119 Vibius
Crispus compositus et iucundus, whereas Cicero has (Or. §176)
Isocrates est in ipsis numeris sedatior. So Pollio, ad
Fam. x. 33, 3 has the phrase bellum componere: cp. Hor. Ep. ii.
1, 8 componere litem: Verg. Aen. iv. 341 componere
curas—both at the end of a hexameter: Tac. Hist. iv. 50: Suet.
Caes. 4.
Digerere = concoquere: see
1 §19. For
concoquere in Cicero, see de Fin. ii. §64: de N. D. ii.
§§24, 124, 136.
Praedicere = antea, supra dicere: see on
1 §74.
Recipere = probare (ἀποδέχομαι):
7 §31, and often.
Vacat: used impersonally
1 §§58,
90: cp. i. 12, 12. This
usage is not found in Cicero.
V. Adverbs.
Abunde is often found along with adjectives and adverbs, to
increase their force:
1 §25 abunde
similes (where see note):
§104 elatum abunde
spiritum. It has something of the emphasis of Cicero’s satis
superque.
Adhuc occurs very frequently with a comparative: see on
1 §71 (plus
adhuc) and
§99. It is often used also
(as in Livy and others) of
li
past time, when it = eo etiam tempore, or etiam tum: e.g.
scholae adhuc operatum
3 §13: cp. i. 8, 2:
2 §27.
Alioqui has different uses in Quintilian, as in Tacitus. (1)
It occurs pretty much as τὰ
μὲν ἄλλα in Greek, with very little of an antithesis: e.g.
1 §64 Simonides,
tenuis alioqui, sermone proprio et iucunditate commendari potest:
3 §32 expertus
iuvenem, studiosum alioqui, praelongos habuisse sermones, &c.
(There is a definite antithesis in what seems to be the corresponding
usage in Tacitus, when alioqui is opposed to an adverb of time:
e.g, Ann. iii. 8 cum incallidus alioqui et facilis iuventa senilibus
tum artibus uteretur: xiii. 20 ingreditur Paris, solitus
alioquin id temporis luxus principis intendere, sed tunc
compositus ad maestitiam.) (2) It is equivalent to praeterea,
‘besides’:
3 §13 in
eloquentia Galliarum ... princeps, alioqui inter paucos disertus.
Cp. Tac. Ann. iv. 11 ordo alioqui sceleris ... patefactus est.
This sense is an easy transition from ‘for the rest.’ The instance in
1 §128 (cuius et
multae alioqui et magnae virtutes fuerunt) seems to fall also under
this head, unless it means ‘apart from’ the doubtful compliments they
paid him (Seneca) by imitating him: cp. Tac. Ann. iv. 37 validus
alioqui spernendis honoribus. (3) Alioqui stands for
‘otherwise,’ ‘in the opposite case,’ either with a si clause, as
3 §16 immutescamus
alioqui si nihil dicendum videatur:
§30 quid alioqui fiet
... si particulas, &c.: or without,
6 §6 alioqui vel
extemporalem temeritatem malo quam male cohaerentem cogitationem.
Cp. Tac. Ann. ii. 38: xi. 6.
Certe stands for quidem when the point of the sentence
is reinforced by an illustration:
6 §4 Cicero certe
... tradidit: cp. xii. 1, 43: vi. 2, 3.
Demum, which in classical Latin is an adverb of time
(‘lastly’), stands in Quintilian, and other writers of the Silver Age,
for tantum, dumtaxat, the idea of time having disappeared:
1 §44 pressa demum
et tenuia, where see note: cp.
3 §13:
6 §5. With pronouns it
is frequently used, for emphasis, like adeo: e.g. Cic. de Orat.
ii. §131 sed hi loci ei demum oratori prodesse possunt, qui est
versatus in rebus vel usu.
Interim often stands for interdum, as
1 §9, where see note. At
3 §33 we have
interim ... interim for modo ... modo, as also i. 7, 11:
interim ... interdum vi. 2, 12: interim ... non numquam ...
saepe iv. 5, 20: semper ... interim ii. 1, 1.
Longe and multum are both used with comparatives,
instead of multo: e.g. longe clarius
1 §67 (where see note):
multum tersior (πολύ)
1 §94 (note).
Mox is used in enumerations in place of deinde:
6 §3
primum—tum—mox: cp. i. 2, 29 primum—mox:
ib. 9, 2 primum—mox—tum.
Nec = ne quidem:
3 §7 alioqui nec
scriberentur. Cp. ix. 2, 67 quod in foro non expedit, illic nec
liceat iv. 2, 93: v. 10, 86.
lii
Non occurs with the 1st pers. plur. (3 §16, cp.
3 §5) and 3rd pers.
sing.
2 §27 where see note,
(also after dum xii. 10, 48 and modo iii. 11, 24) where
Cicero would have had ne: cp. i. 1, 19 non ergo perdamus:
ib. §5 non adsuescat ergo. Cp. utinam non
§100: and see note on
2 §27.
Non nisi. These particles (non, nisi) are used
together with the force of an adverb,
1 §24 (where see note):
3 §29. Cp. Ov. Tr.
iii. 12, 36.
Olim is never used by Cicero of future time, as
1 §94 and
104 (where see note). Cp.
Plin. Panegyr. 15.
Plane, though common enough in classical Latin, as in
Quintilian, with verbs and adjectives, is not found so often in
conjunction with other adverbs. There may be a touch of colloquialism
about such a phrase as ut plane manifesto appareat
1 §53: cp. Pollio, in
Cic. ad Fam. x. 32, 1 plane bene: ad Att. xiii. 6, 2: plane
belle ib. xii. 37, 1.
Protinus has its usual meaning (statim) in
3 §5 (where it is best
taken with gaudeamus, not with offerentibus): cp.
7 §21. Its employment
to denote logical consequence is noted at
1 §3: cp. ib.
§42.
Saltem is often used for quidem and neque saltem
for ne quidem:
2 §15 nec vero
saltem iis, &c., where see note: cp. i. 1, 24 neque enim mihi
illud saltem placet.
Sicut (ut) ... ita. This formula is especially common in
Quintilian, either with or without a negative: see on
1 §1, and cp.
§§3,
14,
72: ix. 2, 88, &c.
Ubicumque, like quicumque, has become an indefinite:
e.g.
7 §28 quidquid
loquemur ubicumque. The more classical use is found at
1 §§5 and
10.
Utique: see note on
1 §20.
Utrimque is used not of place, but of the ‘opposite sides’ of
a question:
5 §20 causas
utrimque tractet:
1 §131: cp. v. 10, 81:
Hor. Ep. i. 18, 9: Tac. Hist. i. 14.
Velut occurs more commonly than either quasi or
tamquam in comparisons: see on
1 §5 velut opes
quaedam, and cp.
§§18,
61:
3 §3:
5 §17:
7 §1. So also
7 §6 ducetur ante
omnia rerum ipsa serie velut duce.
VI. Prepositions.
Ab for ‘on leaving,’ as in the poets and Livy:
5 §17 ne ab illa, in
qua consenuerunt, umbra discrimina velut quendam solem reformident:
cp. xi. 3, 22: i. 6, 25: Ov. Met. iv. 329: Plin. N. H. xiv.
7, 9. So ἀπὸ in Homer,
Il. viii. 53 Οἱ
δ᾽ ἄρα δεῖπνον ἕλοντο καρηκομόωντες Ἀχαιοὶ Ῥίμφα κατὰ κλισίας, ἀπὸ δ᾽
αὐτοῦ θωρήσσοντο.
Circa does duty in Quintilian for in, de,
ad, erga, &c.: cp. the use of περί, ἀμφί with the acc. in Greek. So
1 §52 utiles circa
praecepta sententiae: see note ad loc.
liii
Citra very often stands for sine or praeter:
e.g. citra lectionis exemplum
1 §2, where see note:
cp. i. 4, 4 neque citra musicen grammatice potest esse perfecta.
In Cicero citra is used only of place.
The following prepositional expressions should also be
noted:—
Ante omnia = primum
1 §3:
2 §4:
7 §6. In
1 §3 we have ante
omnia, proximum, novissimum: cp. iv. 2, 52 ante
omnia, deinde: iii. 9, 6 ante omnia, deinde,
tum, postremo.
Cum eo quod is used as a transition formula for the Ciceronian
accedit quod. A certain case of this usage occurs xii. 10,
47: the instance at x.
7, 13 has been
challenged, but see the note.
Ex integro. Quintilian prefers the use of ex in such
phrases to de: e.g. x.
1 §20 (where see note):
ex industria ib.: and so ex abundanti, ex professo,
ex pari, &c., elsewhere.
Inter paucos, ‘as few have ever been’:
3 §13 inter paucos
disertus.
Per quae (quod) of agency or instrument:
1 §87 in iis per
quae nomen est adsecutus.
Propter quae (quod) for quam ob rem, especially
in transitions: see on
1 §10.
Praeter id quod for praeterquam quod: see on
1 §28.
Sine dubio. The use of this phrase at
1 §51 may possibly be
an instance of the peculiarity noted by Spalding on i. 6, 12, where he
points out that Quintilian frequently makes it stand for quidem,
in clauses where the idea is by sine dubio made of less account
than some other statement immediately following, and introduced by
tamen or sed (as i. 6, 12 and 14). Examples are v. 7, 28
sine dubio ... tamen: v. 10, 53 and viii. 3, 67 sine dubio ...
sed. Applying this to x.
1, 51 Verum hic
omnes sine dubio et in omni genere eloquentiae procul a se reliquit,
epicos tamen praecipue, we might bring out the construction by
rendering, ‘But while of course (or ‘to be sure’) Homer has
out-distanced all rivals, in every kind of eloquence, it is the epic
poets whom he leaves furthest behind.’ Cp. on
3 §15.
VII. Conjunctions.
Under this head may come Adde quod, a phrase which occurs
seven times in Quintilian, five times in the Tenth Book:
1 §§3,
16:
2 §§10,
11,
12: xii. 1, 4 and 11, 29.
Schmalz (Ueber den Sprachgebrauch des Asinius Pollio) remarks
that it must be ranked rather with Pollio ad Fam. x. 31, 4 (adde huc
quod), where quod is to be taken as a conjunction, than with
Cic. ad Att. vi. 1, 7, ad Fam. xiii. 41, 1 (addo etiam illud
quod), and ad Fam. xvi. 16, 1 (adde hoc quod), where
quod is a relative referring to the foregoing demonstrative. The
phrase is originally
liv
poetical: it is found in Attius, frequently in Lucretius (i. 847: iii.
827: iv. 1113), in the Satires and Epistles of Horace, and
over and over again in Ovid: Vergil seems to avoid it. Pollio probably
introduced it into prose, and from him it passed to others: Schmalz
refers to Plin. Ep. viii. 14, 3: iii. 14, 6: Sen. 40, 4: Symmach. 2, 7:
4, 71: Fronto, p. 92 N.
Cum interim = ‘though all the time.’ See note on
1 §18: cp. § III.
Dum ... non stands for dummodo ... non
3 §7: cp. xii. 10, 48.
The usage is poetical. Dummodo does not occur in Quintilian.
Enim occurs, conformably to classical usage, in the third
place after a word preceded by a preposition: e.g. ad profectum
enim
3 §15: and so
frequently after sum,—2 §10 necesse est enim:
1 §14:
7 §§15,
24:
2 §19. But nihil
enim est
1 §78, where Krüger
suggests nihil enim inest.
Etsi. As it is generally stated that etsi does not
occur in Quintilian it may be well to include it here. Instances are i.
pr. 19: i. 5, 28: v. 13, 3: ix. i, 19.
Ideoque is constantly used for itaque. See note on
1 §21.
Licet = etsi, as sometimes in Cicero:
1 §99: ii. 2, 8 and
passim.
Quamlibet and quamquam. Quintilian uses these words (in
clauses which contain no verb) along with adjectives, participles, and
adverbs:
3 §19 nam in stilo
quidem quamlibet properato: cp. viii. 6, 4 oratione quamlibet
clara: xii. 8, 7 quamlibet verbose: xi. 1, 34 quamquam
plena sanguinis. A similar use of quamvis is less
uncommon in other writers: cp.
1 §74 quamvis
bonorum: ib. §94 quamvis uno libra (where see note). See
Madvig on Cic. de Fin. v. §68.
Quia is sometimes used where quod (eo quod)
might have been expected:
1 §15 hoc sunt
exempla potentiora ... quia: cp.
5 §14 Declamationes
vero ... sunt utilissimae quia (Halm) inventionem et
dispositionem pariter exercent. So i. 6, 39 nam et auctoritatem
antiquitatis habent (sc. verba a vetustate repetita) et,
quia intermissa sunt, gratiam novitati similem parant. Cp. non
quia non (with the subjunctive) x.
7, 19 and
31: so ii. 2, 2: iv. 1, 5,
65: viii. 3, 42: ix. 1, 23; 4, 20.
Quoque often occurs alongside of an adjective, to increase its
force, where older writers would have had vel or etiam:
1 §20 ex industria
quoque:
2 §14 in magnis
quoque auctoribus: cp.
1 §121 ceterum
interceptus quoque magnum sibi vindicat locum: ii. II, I exemplo
magni quoque nominis professorum.
Quotiens = cum:
4 §3:
7 §29. Cp. iv. 1, 76:
viii. 3, 55.
For the rest, Quintilian’s style cannot be called artistic. It is indeed
generally clear and simple: instances of obscurity are very often
traceable to the ‘insanabilis error’ in the old text, of which Leonardo
wrote
lv
to Poggio, and which the progress of criticism has done so much to
remedy. It is also free from all bombast and excessive embellishment.
But there is little of the graceful and ample movement of the Ciceronian
period: the sentence often halts, as it were, there are frequent
instances of harsh expression, and the periods are awkwardly
constructed. Quintilian was not an artist in style. Probably the
technicalities of his subject kept him from thinking too much of such
matters as rhythm, cadence, and harmony. His main object was to say
clearly and directly what he wanted to say, without laying too great
stress on the form in which it was cast. The leading thought is
generally stated at once, and everything subordinate to it is left to
take care of itself. Hence it is that causal clauses are allowed to come
dragging in at the end of a sentence (x.
2 §§13 and
23), and adjectival or
attributive clauses stand by themselves in a position of remarkable
isolation (vel ob hoc memoria dignum
1 §80: rebus tamen
acuti magis quam, &c.
1 §84: cp. §§85, 95,
103). Relative sentences also are introduced in a detached sort of
fashion (1 §80:
2 §28). The thought is
sometimes hard to follow (as notably in the opening sections of the
Tenth Book: cp.
2 §§13 and
§§20,
21;
7 §7), because the
composition is not framed as a harmonious whole: the transition
particles are loosely used (see on nam
1 §12: cp. §50,
7 §31: quidem
1 §88), and are
sometimes wanting altogether, especially in the case of figures suddenly
and abruptly introduced (see on
1 §4: cp.
7 §1). Instances of a
more or less artificial striving after variety of expression are often
met with: e.g.
1 §§36,
41,
83,
102. In the order of words
there is sometimes the same departure from customary usage (1 §109,
2 §17), especially in
the case of proper names (1 §86 Afro Domitio for
Domitio Afro: cp. Atacinus Varro
§87: Bassus Aufidius
§103)71. Constructions κατὰ σύνεσιν frequently
occur:
1 §65:
§105:
7 §25. Under this
head may be included the omission of the subject:
1 §7 congregat:
§66 permiserunt:
7 §4 malit ...
possit: and of words to be supplied from the context,
1 §56
congerentes:
1 §7 solitos:
1 §107 quibus nihil
ille:
1 §123 qui
ubique:
2 §24:
3 §25. In the same
way esse is frequently omitted for the sake of brevity:
1 §17,
§66,
§90:
4 §1:
5 §6:
7 §7,
§23. Lastly there are
frequent instances of inadvertent and negligent repetition:
1 §§8,
9,
23,
94,
131:
2 §§11-12:
5 §§6-7:
7 §23: cp. on
2 §23.
Among minor peculiarities of idiom are (1) An almost excessive
fondness for the use of the perfect subjunctive:
1 §14 dixerim:
§26
lvi
maluerim:
§37 fuerit, where see
note: so even ut non dixerim (ne dicam)
1 §77 and ut sic
dixerim
2 §15. (2) The
use of the future indicative in dependent clauses: see on sciet
1 §4, and cp.
2 §§26,
28:
3 §28:
7 §28: also as a mild
imperative,
1 §58
revertemur:
3 §18
sequemur;
2 §1
renuntiabit:
§23 aptabimus.
(3) The frequent use of the infinitive in constructions which are
characteristic of the Silver Age: (a) with verbs, as
meruit credi
1 §72: qui esse
docti adfectant
§97: optandum ...
fieri
§127: si consequi
utrumque non dabitur
7 §22: opponere
verear
1 §101:
intermittere veremur
7 §26: cp.
expertus iuvenem ... habuisse
3 §32: for
dubitare see on
1 §73:
(b) with adjectives, legi dignus
1 §96: contentum id
consequi
2 §7. (4) The
substantival use of the gerund, ceteraque genera probandi ac
refutandi
1 §49: lex
orandi
1 §76:
inveniendi
§69: sive acumine
disserendi sive eloquendi facultate
1 §81: cp.
loquendi
§83: eloquendo
§106: nascendi
3 §4: saliendi
3 §6: ib.
iaculando: adiciendo
3 §32:
emendandi
4 §2: cogitandi
7 §25.
(5) Quamquam with subjunctive
1 §33:
2 §21:
7 §17:
forsitan with indic.
2 §10: &c.
Among the figures of syntax may be mentioned (1) Anaphora, or
the repetition of the same word at the beginning of several clauses:
e.g. nulla varietas, nullus adfectus, nulla
persona, nulla cuiusquam sit oratio
1 §55: cp.
1 §§99,
115,
130:
2 §2:
3 §3 (illic
radices, illic fundamenta sunt, illic opes,
&c.):
§9,
§29:
5 §§2,
8:
6 §1;
(2) Asyndeton: e.g. facere quam optime, quam
facillime possit
1 §4:
2 §16:
6 §6:
7 §§7,
26;
(3) Chiasmus:
5 §14
(alitur—renovatur) and
§15 (ne
carmine—reficiuntur):
7 §15.
The frequent occurrence of figures taken from the gladiatorial arena or
the field of battle may be made the subject of a concluding paragraph72. It is
in keeping with the martial character of the Romans that there is no
more fertile source of metaphor in their literature than the art of war,
which was indeed their favourite pursuit; just as the Greeks drew their
images from nothing more readily than from the sea and those maritime
occupations in which they were so much at home. It is generally to what
is most familiar both to himself and to those whom he is addressing that
a speaker or writer has recourse in order to enforce his meaning. Both
Cicero and Quintilian had lived through troublous times, and it is
little wonder that even in the quiet repose of their rhetorical
treatises we should frequently meet with phrases and illustrations in
which we seem to hear the noise of battle. And under the Flavian
emperors the less serious combats in the Coliseum had come to be looked
upon as great national
lvii
entertainments. Hence it was natural to picture the orator, whose main
object is to win persuasion, as one striving for the mastery with
weapons appropriate to the warfare he is waging. No greater compliment
can be found to pay to Julius Caesar than to say that ‘he spoke as he
fought’: tanta in eo vis est, id acumen, ea concitatio, ut illum
eodem animo dixisse quo bellavit appareat, x.
1, 114. The orator
must always be on the alert,—ever ‘ready for battle,’ in
procinctu
1 §2 (where see note):
if he cannot take prompt action, he might as well remain in
camp,—nullum erit, si tam tardum fuerit, auxilium
4 §4. His style must be
appropriate to the matter in hand: id quoque vitandum ne in oratione
poetas nobis et historicos ... imitandos putemus. Sua cuique proposito
lex, suus cuique decor est
2 §§21-2. Victory must
ever be the end in view,—victory in what is a real combat, not a
sham fight:
1 §§29-30 nos vero
armatos stare in acie et summis de rebus decernere et ad victoriam
niti:
2 §27 quam omnia,
etiam quae delectationi videantur data, ad victoriam spectent:
1 §79 Isocrates ...
palaestrae quam pugnae magis accommodatus:
1 §31 totum opus
(historia) non ad actum rei pugnamque praesentem, sed ad memoriam
posteritatis et ingenii famam componitur. The orator must have all
the wiry vigour of an experienced campaigner, and his weapons ought not
to be made for show:
1 §33 dum ...
meminerimus non athletarum toris sed militum lacertis opus esse, nec
versicolorem illam, qua Demetrius Phalereus dicebatur uti, vestem bene
ad forensem pulverem facere:
1 §30 Neque ego arma
squalere situ ac rubigine velim, sed fulgorem in iis esse qui terreat,
qualis est ferri, quo mens simul visusque praestringitur, non qualis
auri argentique, imbellis et potius habenti periculosus: cp.
1 §60 cum validae
tum breves vibrantesque sententiae, plurimum sanguinis atque
nervorum:
1 §77 carnis tamen
plus habet (Aeschines) minus lacertorum:
2 §12 quo fit ut
minus sanguinis ac virium declamationes habeant quam orationes:
1 §115 verum
sanguinem perdidisse. As soon as possible he must add practice to
theory:
1 §4, cp.
5 §§19-20
(iuvenis) iudiciis intersit quam plurimis et sit certaminis
cui destinatur frequens spectator ... et, quod in gladiatoribus fieri
videmus, decretoriis exerceatur:
3 §3 vires faciamus
ante omnia, quae sufficiant labori certaminum et usu non
exhauriantur. His whole activity is that of the battle-field:
whether he is for the prosecution or the defence, he must either
overcome his adversary or succumb to him: cp.
1 §106 pugnat ille
(Demosthenes) acumine semper, hic (Cicero) frequenter et pondere:
§120 ut esset multo
magis pugnans. And he must not linger too long over preparatory
exercises, otherwise his armour will rust and his joints lose their
suppleness:
5 §16 nam si nobis
sola materia fuerit ex litibus, necesse est deteratur fulgor et durescat
articulus et ipse ille mucro ingenii cotidiana pugna retundatur.
lviii
V.
Manuscripts.
In this final section of the Introduction, links have been omitted
because they would have been more distracting than useful.
Considerable interest attaches to the study of the manuscripts of
Quintilian, the oldest of which may be grouped in three main divisions:
(1) the complete manuscripts, (2) the incomplete, and
(3) the mixed.
The most important representative of the first class is the Codex
Ambrosianus, a manuscript of the 10th or 11th century, now at Milan.
As we have it now, it is unfortunately in a mutilated condition, nearly
a fourth part of the folios having been lost (from ix. 4, 135
argumenta acria et cit. to xii. 11, 22 antiquitas ut
possit). Halm secured a new and trustworthy collation of this MS.,
distinguishing carefully between the original text and the readings of
the second hand.
Although now in the defective condition above indicated, the
Ambrosianus must have been originally complete. In this it
differs from the representatives of the second family of MSS., the most
valuable member of which—the Bernensis—is of even
greater importance for the constitution of the text than the
Ambrosianus, at least in those parts which it contains. It is the
oldest of all the known manuscripts of Quintilian, belonging to the 10th
century. The peculiarity which it shares with the other members of its
family is that it contains certain great lacunae, which must have
existed also in the manuscript from which it was copied, as they are
indicated in the Bernensis by blank spaces. The size of the first
lacuna varies with the fortunes of the particular codex: in the
Bernensis it extends from the beginning to 2 §5 (licet,
et nihilo minus). The others are identical in all cases: v. 14,
12—viii. 3, 64: viii. 6, 17—viii. 6, 67: ix. 3, 2—x.
1, 107 (nulla contentio): xi. 1, 71—xi. 2, 33: and
xii. 10, 43 to the end.
To the same family as the Bernensis belongs the
Bambergensis A, which was directly copied from the
Bernensis not long after the latter had been written: it also is
of the 10th century. But inasmuch as in the Bambergensis the
great lacunae were, at a very early date, filled in by another
hand (Bambergensis G73), this manuscript may now rank in the
third group, where it became the parent, as I hope to show below, of the
lix
Harleianus (2664), and through the Harleianus of the
Florentinus, Turicensis, and an innumerable company of
others. Besides reproducing Bambergensis G, these MSS.
follow for the most part the readings introduced by a later hand (called
by Halm b) into the original Bambergensis A.
A recent examination of the Bambergensis has suggested a
doubt whether the readings known as b, which are often of a very
faulty character, can have been derived from the same codex
as G.
Halm’s critical edition of Quintilian is founded, in the main, on the
manuscripts above mentioned, with a few examples of the 15th century for
the parts where he had only the Ambrosianus and the
Bambergensis G, or the latter exclusively, to rely on. Since
the date of the publication of his text (1868) great progress has been
made with the critical study of Quintilian. In 1875 MM. Chatelain
and le Coultre published a collation of the Nostradamensis
(see below), the main results of which have been incorporated in
Meister’s edition (1886-87). And in a critical edition of the First Book
of the Institutio (1890) M. Ch. Fierville has given a most
complete account of all the continental manuscripts, drawing for the
purpose on a previous work in which he had already shown proof of his
interest in the subject (De Quintilianeis Codicibus, 1874).
There can be little doubt that Halm’s critical instinct guided him
aright in attaching supreme importance to the Bernensis (with
Bambergensis A), the Ambrosianus, and
Bambergensis G. But much has been derived from some
manuscripts of which he took no account, and there is one in particular,
which has hitherto been strangely overlooked, and to which prominence is
accordingly given in this edition. Before proceeding to deal with it,
I shall annex here a brief notice of the various MSS. which figure
in the Critical Notes, grouped in one or other of the three divisions
given above. An editor of the Tenth Book of the Institutio is
especially bound to travel outside the rather narrow range of Halm’s
critical edition, as so much of the existing text (down to 1 §107)
has been based mainly on Bambergensis G alone. In addition
to collating, for the purposes of this edition, such MSS. as the
Ioannensis at Cambridge, the Bodleianus and
Balliolensis at Oxford, and the very important Harleian codex,
referred to above, I have also carefully compared eight 15th
century manuscripts in the hope (which the Critical Appendix will show
to have been not entirely disappointed) of gleaning something new. This
part of the present work may be regarded as supplementing, for this
country, what M. Ch. Fierville has already so laboriously
accomplished for the manuscripts of the Continent.
Of the first family, the outstanding example is the
Ambrosianus. The resemblances between it and
Bambergensis G are sufficient to show that
lx
the manuscript from which the latter was copied probably belonged to the
same class. But this manuscript, which must have been complete (like the
Ambrosianus originally), has altogether disappeared: one of the
great objects for extending the study of the MSS. of Quintilian beyond
the limits observed by Halm is the hope of being able to distinguish
between such examples as may seem (like the Dorvilianus at
Oxford) to preserve some of the traditions of the family, and those
whose origin may be clearly traced back to Bambergensis A
and G. For all the complete MSS. of Quintilian in existence must be
derived either from this family or from the mixed group of which the
Bambergensis, in its present form, seems to be the undoubted
original.
In the second group we must include, not much inferior to the
Bernensis, the Parisinus Nostradamensis (N) Bibl. Nat.
fonds latin 18527. It is an independent transcript in all probability of
the incomplete MS. from which the Bernensis was copied, and as
such has a distinct value of its own. It is ascribed to the 10th
century. For the readings of this codex I have been able to compare a
collation made by M. Fierville in 1872, with that published by
MM. Chatelain and le Coultre in 1875.
Then there is the Codex Ioannensis (in the library of
St. John’s College, Cambridge), a recent examination of which has
shown me that the account given of it by Spalding (vol. ii. pr.
p. 4) must be amended in some particulars. In its present condition
it begins with constaret (i. 2, 3), but a portion of the
first page has been cut away for the sake of the ornamental letter:
originally the MS. must have begun at the beginning of the second
chapter, like the Nostradamensis, the Vossiani 1
and 2, the Codex Puteanus, and Parisinus 7721 (see
Fierville, p. 165). Again, the reading at xi. 2, 33 is clearly
multiplici, not ut duplici, and in this it agrees with the
Montpellier MS. (Pithoeanus), which is known to be a copy (11th
century) of the Bernensis (see M. Bonnet in Revue de Phil.
1887). A remarkable feature about this MS. is the number of
inversions which the writer sets himself to make in the text. These I
have not included in the Critical Notes, but some of them may be
subjoined here, as they may help to establish the derivation of this
manuscript. The codex from which it was copied must have been illegible
in parts: this is probably the explanation of such omissions (the space
being left blank) as tum in ipsis in x. 2, 14, and
virtutis ib. §15. It is written in a very small and neat hand,
with no contemporary indication of the great lacunae, and may be
ascribed to the 13th century. It agrees generally with the
Bernensis, though there are striking resemblances also to the
Pratensis (see p. lxiii and note). Among the inversions
referred to are the following:—x. 3, 1 sic etiam
utilitatis, for sic utilitatis etiam: ib. §30 oratione
continua, for continua oratione: 5 §8 alia propriis
alia translatis virtus, for alia
lxi
translatis virtus alia propriis: 7 §21 stultis eruditi,
for stulti eruditis: ib. §28 solum summum, for summum
solum. Some of these peculiarities (e.g. the inversion at 5 §8)
it shares with the Leyden MSS.—the Vossiani i. and iii., a
collation of which is given in Burmann’s edition: these codices
M. Fierville assigns to that division of his first group in which
the Nostradamensis heads the list (see below, p. lxiv).
I may note also the readings viderit bona et invenit (
2 §20), which Ioan. shares with Voss. iii.: potius
libertas ista ( 3 §24) Ioan. and Voss. i.;
ubertate—for libertate—( 5 §15) Ioan.
Voss. i. and iii.
To the same family belongs the Codex Salmantinus, a 12th or
13th century manuscript in the library of the University of Salamanca.
M. Fierville, who kindly placed at my disposal his collation of the
Tenth Book, thinks it must have been indirectly derived from the
Bernensis. He notes some hundred variants in which it differs
from the Nostradamensis (most of them being the errors of a
copyist), and some thirty-seven places in which, while differing from
the Nostradamensis, it agrees with the Bernensis and the
Bambergensis. This MS. also gives ubertate in 5 §15 :
it agrees in showing the important reading alte refossa in
3 §2 : and resembles the Ioannensis in certain minor
omissions, e.g. certa before necessitate in 5 §15 :
idem before laborandum in 7 §4 : et before
consuetudo in 7 §8 : cp. subiunctura sunt for
subiuncturus est 7 §9 . For other coincidences see the
Critical Appendix.
In the same group must be included two MSS. of first-class importance
for the text of Quintilian, for a collation of which (as of the Codex
Salmantinus) I am indebted to the kindness of
M. Fierville. They are the Codex Pralensis (No. 14146 fonds
latin de la Bibliothèque nationale), of the 12th century, and the
Codex Puteanus (No. 7719) of the 13th. The former is the work of
Étienne de Rouen, a monk of the Abbey of Bec, and it consists of
extracts from the Institutio amounting to nearly a third of the
whole. There are eighty sections, of which §76 (de figuris
verborum) includes x. 1 §§108-131; §77 (de imitatione)
consists of x. 2, 1-28; §78 (quomodo dictandum sit) of x.
3, 1-32; and §79 (de laude scriptorum tam Graecorum quam
Latinorum) of x. 1, 46-107. The importance of this codex arises
from the fact that it is an undoubted transcript of the
Beccensis, now lost. The Beccensis is supposed by
M. Fierville (Introd. p. lxxvii. sq.) to have belonged to the
9th or 10th century, in which case it would take, if extant, at least
equal rank with the Bernensis. That it was an independent copy of
some older MS. seems to be proved, not only by the variants in the
Pratensis, but also by the fact that both the Pratensis
and the Puteanus (which is also a transcript of the
Beccensis) show a lacuna after the word mutatis in
lxii
x. 3, 32. This lacuna must have existed in the Beccensis,
though there is no trace of it elsewhere. Guided by the sense, Étienne
de Rouen added the words correctum fuisse tabellis in his copy
(the Pratensis): the text runs codicibus esse
sublatum.
The general character of the readings of the Pratensis may be
gathered from a comparison of passages in the Critical Appendix to this
volume. Among other variants, the following may be mentioned,—and
it will be seen that certain peculiar features in some of the MSS. used
by Halm (notably S) probably arose either from the Pratensis
or from its prototype, the Beccensis. At x. 1. 50 Prat, gives
(like S) rogantis Achillen Priami precibus, while most codd.
have Priami before rogantis: ib. §53 eloquentie (so
Put. S 7231, 7696) for eloquendi: ib. superatum (so Put.)
for superari: §55 aequalem credidit parem (as Put. S Harl.
2662, 11671): §67 idque ego (as Put. S) for idque ego
sane: §68 qui fuerunt and also vero, omitted (as in
Put. S): so also tenebras §72, valuerunt §84 (as
7231, 7696), and veterum §97: at §95 Prat, gives et
eruditissimos for et doctissimos, and hence the omission
of erudit. in S. On the whole, the study of the text of the
Pratensis seems to give additional confidence in the readings
of G: for example §98 imperare (as Put.): §101
cesserit (Put. 7231, 7696): ib. nec indignetur. Étienne de
Rouen carefully omitted all the Greek words which he found in his
original, and this strengthens the contention that φράσιν in 1 §87 (see Crit. Notes, and cp.
§42) was originally written in Greek. At 2 §20 quem superius
institui for quem institueram in libra secundo is an
indication of the fact that Étienne de Rouen was making a compendium of
the Institutio, and not transcribing the whole treatise. This
probably detracts from the significance of those readings which seem to
be peculiar to the Pratensis, among which may be noted 1 §48
putat for creditum est (where Put. has
certissimum): §59 ad exemplum maxime permanebit (ad
exitum Put. and S): §78 propinquior for propior:
§80 mediocri for medio: §81 assurgit for
surgit: §109 in utroque for in quoque. Peculiar
readings which Prat. shares with the Puteanus (and which were
therefore probably in the Beccensis) are §46 in magnis for
in magnis rebus: §49 innuit for nuntiat: §50
excessit for excedit: §54 ne virtus for ne
utrius (neutrius): §57 ignoro ergo (S) for ignoro
igitur: §63 plurimumque oratio: §68 in affectibus
communibus mirus: §79 discernendi for dicendi: §107
nominis latini for latini sermonis. At 1 §72 Prat.
has qui ut a pravis sui temporis Menandro (Put. ut
pravis), and this became in S Harl. 2662 and 11671 qui quamvis
sui temp. Men. There are frequent inversions, e.g. dicendi
genere §52 (Put.): Attici sermonis (Put.) §65: plus
Attio (Put.) §97: cuicumque eorum Ciceronem (as Put. 7231,
7696) §105: sit nobis §112:
lxiii
est autem (as Ioan.) §115: forum illustrator (as Ioan.)
§122: creditus sum §125: dignis lectione 2 §1:
possumus sperare §9: nemo vero eum §10: aliquo tamen in
loco aliquid §24: scientia movendi §27: ipso opere
3 §8: se res facilius §9: desperatio etiam §14:
vox exaudiri §25: praecipue in hoc §26: possunt
semper §2874.
From the list of readings given above, it will be seen that the
Codex Puteanus is in general agreement with the Pratensis,
each being an independent copy of the same original. The variants given
by this MS. will be found in the Critical Appendix for the part of the
Tenth Book collated by M. Fierville, 1 §§46-107. At times it
is even more in agreement than the Pratensis with the later
family, of which Halm took S as the typical example: e.g. 1 §61
spiritu: ib. merito omitted: §72 possunt decernere
(for possis decerpere—possis decernere Prat.).
In the arrangement introduced by Étienne de Rouen in the
Pratensis, the last two sections (§§79 and 80) consist
respectively of x. 1 §§46-107, and xii. 10 §§10-15. These portions
of the Institutio must have formed part of the mutilated original
from which the Beccensis was copied, and they have been
reproduced separately along with 1 §§108-131 in two Paris MSS.
(7231 and 7696), a collation of which has been put at my disposal by
M. Fierville. The first is a mixed codex of the 12th century,
containing nine separate works, of which the extracts from Quintilian
form one. The second, also of the 12th century, belonged to the Abbey of
Fleury-sur-Loire, and comprises five treatises besides the Quintilian.
In both the title runs Quintilianus, libro Xº Inst. Orator. Qui
auctores Graecorum maxime legendi. M. Fierville states (Introd.
p. lxxxv.) that of forty-five variants which he compared (x.
1 §§46-68) in the Pratensis, Puteanus, 7231, and
7696, twenty-eight occur in the two former only, eight in the two
latter, and nine in all four. He adds that the Vossiani i. and
iii. resemble the two former more nearly than the two latter. Both 7231
and 7696 agree in giving the usual collocation at §50 illis Priami
rogantis Achillen: at §59 the former has ad exim, the latter
ad exi: at §61 both give eum nemini credit, omitting
merito (as Put. and S): at §68 namque is et sermone
(as Prat.: namque sermone Put.): ib. in dicendo ac
respondendo (Prat. Put. in dicendo et in resp.): §72
(apparently) ut pravis sui temporis iudiciis: §82 finxisse
sermonem (as Prat. Put. and most codd.): §83 ac varietate:
§88 laudandus partibus (laudandis part. Prat. Put. Harl.
2662, 11671): §91 visum (visum est Prat. Put.): §98
senes
lxiv
non parum tragicum (Prat. Put. Harl. 2662, 11671): §107 Latini
nominis: §121 leve (Prat. N). In §98 Thyestes is
omitted in both (also in Prat. Put.): is this a sign that the name was
written in Greek in the original? In 7231 I have noted two inversions
which do not seem to appear in 7696: dedit exemplum et ortum
1 §46: proximus aemulari §62.
M. Fierville classifies the various members of the whole family of
MSS. which has just been reviewed in five sub-divisions. The first
includes the Bernensis, Bambergensis A,
Ambrosianus ii., Pithoeanus (these two are direct
copies of the Bernensis), Salmantinus, three Paris codices
(7720, 7722 and Didot), and probably the Ioannensis. In
the second he ranks the Nostradamensis, Vossiani i. and
iii., and a Paris MS. (7721): in the third the Beccensis,
Pratensis, and Puteanus: in the fourth a codex
Vaticanus, referred to by Spalding: and in the fifth the fragments
just dealt with (7231, 7696). Of these he rightly considers the
Bernensis, Bambergensis, Nostradamensis,
Pratensis, and Puteanus to be of greatest importance for
the constitution of the text.
At the head of the third group of the manuscripts of Quintilian must now
be placed the Codex Harleianus (2664), in the library of the
British Museum75. This manuscript was first described by Mr. L. C.
Purser in Hermathena (No. xii., 1886); and to his notice of it I
am now able to add a statement of its history and a pretty certain
indication of the relation it bears to other known codices. As to date,
it cannot be placed later than the beginning of the 11th century. There
are in the margin marks which show clearly that at an early date it was
used to supply the great lacunae in some MS. of the first or
incomplete class; one of these should have appeared in the margin of the
annexed facsimile, a being used at the beginning and b (as
here x. 1, 107) at the end of the parts to be extracted. The manuscript
contains 188 folios and 24 quaternions, and is written in one column. At
the beginning the writing is larger than subsequently, just as the first
part of the Bambergensis is larger than G, which the
Harleianus (H) closely resembles. On fols. 90-91 the hand is more
recent, and the writing is in darker ink: fols. 61-68 seem to have been
supplied later. There is a blank of eight lines at the end of 161v.,
where Book xi. ch. 1 concludes; ch. 2 begins at the top of the next
page. There is also a blank line (as in Bn and Bg) at iii. 8, 30, though
nothing is wanting in the text.
The result of my investigations has been to identify this important
manuscript with the Codex Dusseldorpianus, which we know
disappeared from the library at Düsseldorf before Gesner’s time. In the
preface to
lxv
his edition of 1738, §20, he describes it, on the evidence of one who
had seen it, as ‘Poggianis temporibus certe priorem, necdum, quod
sciatur, recentiori aetate a quoquam collatum’: its remarkable freedom
from variants and emendations suggests that it must have lain long
unnoticed. When Gesner wanted to refer to it, he found it was gone:
‘tandem compertum est mala fraude nescio quorum hominum et hunc et alios
rarissimos codices esse subductos.’ It had, in fact, been sold by the
Düsseldorf librarian, possibly acting under orders. The diary of
Humphrey Wanley, Harley’s librarian, shows that he bought it (along with
several other manuscripts) on the 6th August, 1724, from Sig. John James
Zamboni, Resident Chargé d’Affaires in England for the Elector of
Hesse Darmstadt. Zamboni’s correspondence is in the Bodleian at Oxford;
and I have ascertained, by examining it, that he received the Harleian
manuscript of Quintilian from M. Büchels, who was librarian of the
Court library at Düsseldorf in the beginning of last century, and with
whom Zamboni drove a regular trade in manuscripts.
‘The correspondence’ (to quote from what has already been written
elsewhere) ‘is of a very interesting character, and throws light on the
provenance of several of the Harleian MSS. The transactions of the pair
begin in 1721, when Büchels receives 1200 florins (not without much
dunning) for a consignment of printed books. Zamboni, who was something
of a humourist, is constantly endeavouring to beat down the librarian’s
prices: “j’aime les beaux livres,” he says on one occasion, when
pretending that he will not entertain a certain offer, “j’aime les beaux
livres, mais je ne hais pas l’argent.” The trade in MSS. began in 1724,
when Büchels sent a list from which Zamboni selected eleven codices,
assuring his correspondent that if he would only be reasonable they
would soon come to terms. Early in the year he offers 500 florins for
the lot, protesting that he had no intention of selling again: “sachez,
Monsieur, que je ne vous achète pas les livres pour les revendre.” Three
weeks after it came to hand, he made over the whole consignment to
Harley’s librarian. It included our Quintilian and the great
Vitruvius—the entries in Zamboni’s letters corresponding exactly
with those in Wanley’s diary. In the end of the same month Zamboni is
writing to Büchels for more, protesting that his great ambition is to
make a “très jolie collection” of MSS. (Bodl. MSS. Add.
D, 66).’
What the history of the Harleianus may have been before it
came to Düsseldorf, I have been unable to ascertain. The only clue
is a scrawl on the first page: Iste liber est maioris ecclesiae.
This Mr. Purser has ascribed, with great probability, to Strasburg. The
Codex Florentinus has an inscription showing that it was given by
Bishop Werinharius (the
lxvi
first of that name, 1000-1029?) to the Cathedral of St. Mary at
Strasburg; and Wypheling, who made a catalogue of the library there
(circ. 1508), says of this bishop: ‘multa dedit ecclesiae suae
praesertim multos praestantissimos libros antiquissimis characteribus
scriptos; quorum adhuc aliqui in bibliotheca maioris ecclesiae repositi
videntur.’ This shows that there was a greater and a less church at
Strasburg, to the latter of which the MS. may formerly have belonged.
And if, as is now generally believed, neither the Florentinus nor
the Turicensis can be considered identical with the manuscript
which roused the enthusiasm of the literary world when Poggio discovered
it in 1416, it is not impossible that we may have recovered that
manuscript in the Harleianus, if we can conceive of its having
migrated from Strasburg to St. Gall.
The following paragraph appeared in the book as a single-sheet
Addendum labeled “Place opposite p. lxvi.” Its original location
was therefore at the point “...the insertion at a wrong place in
the // text...” in the second paragraph after the Addendum.
Writing in the ‘Neue Heidelberger Jahrbücher’ (1891, p. 238
sqq.), Mr. A. C. Clark, of Queen’s College, Oxford, supplies some
very interesting information in regard to Zamboni’s purchases. It seems
that Zamboni was able to tell Lord Oxford’s librarian that the MSS.
which he was selling to him had originally belonged to Graevius; and by
comparing the Zamboni correspondence in the Bodleian Library with the
posthumous catalogue of Graevius’s library, Mr. Clark has now discovered
that Büchels was offering to Zamboni the entire MSS. collection of that
great scholar, which in this way ultimately found a home in the library
of the British Museum. Graevius died in 1703, and the Elector Johann
Wilhelm bought both his books and his manuscripts. The former he
presented to the library of the University of Heidelberg: the latter he
retained in his own library at Düsseldorf. In regard to the Harleian
codex of Quintilian, Mr. Clark’s theory is that it belonged formerly not
to Strasburg, but to the cathedral at Cologne, which is more than once
referred to as ‘maior ecclesia.’ Gesner must have been in error when he
said that this codex had not been recently collated (cp. Introd.
p. lxv); for Gulielmus had seen it at Cologne, and in his
‘Verisimilia,’ iii. xiv, quotes some variants and ‘proprii errores’ from
the preface to Book vi, all of which appear in the Harleianus as
we have it now. And as Graevius is known to have borrowed from the
library of Cologne Cathedral, in 1688, an important codex of Cicero ad
Fam. (Harl. 2682), Mr. Clark infers that he got the Quintilian at the
same time. He evidently omitted to return them; and after his death they
passed, with many other MSS., first to Düsseldorf, and then to
London.
It was only after the Bambergensis arrived in the British
Museum (where it was sent by the authorities of the Bamberg Library, in
courteous compliance with a request from me) that it was possible to
form a definite opinion as to the place occupied by the
Harleianus in regard to it. At first it appeared, even to the
experts, that the latter MS. was distinctly of older date than the
former: it is written in a neater hand, and on palaeographical grounds
alone there might have been room for doubt. But a fuller examination
convinced me that the Harleianus was copied directly from the
Bambergensis, possibly at the very time when the latter was being
completed by the addition of the parts known as
Bambergensis G, and of some at least of the readings now
generally designated b. These latter, indeed, the
Harleianus slavishly follows, in preference to the first hand in
the original Bambergensis: probably the copyist of the
Harleianus was aware of the importance attached to the codex
(uncial?) from which the b readings were taken. In view, however,
of the defective state in which the Bambergensis has come down to
us, as regards the opening part, and considering also the mutilation of
the Ambrosianus, we may still claim for the MS. in the British
Museum the distinction of being the oldest complete manuscript of
Quintilian in existence.
The proof that the Harleianus stands at the head of the great
family of the mixed manuscripts of Quintilian (represented till
now mainly by the Florentinus, Turicensis,
Almeloveenianus, and Guelferbytanus) is derived from a
consideration of its relationship to both parts of the
Bambergensis on the one hand, and to those later MSS. on the
other. I begin with a point which involves a testimony to the
critical acumen of that great scholar C. Halm. In the
Sitzungsberichte der königl. bayer. Akademie der Wissenschaften zu
München, 1866, i. pp. 505-6, Halm established the dependence of
the Turicensis and the Florentinus on the
Bambergensis by pointing out, among other proofs, the insertion
at a wrong place in the
lxvii
text of both these codices of certain words which, having been
inadvertently omitted by the copyist of the Bambergensis from
their proper context, were written in by him in a blank space at the
foot of the page in which the passage in question occurs. The passage is
ix. 2, 52: circa crimen Apollonii Drepani[tani: gaudeo etiam si quid
ab eo abstulisti et abs te] nihil rectius factum esse dico. When the
copyist of the Bambergensis noticed his mistake, he completed
Drepanitani in the text, and wrote in the words gaudeo etiam
... abs te at the foot of the page, with a pretty clear indication
of the place where they were to be taken in. In the Bambergensis
the page ends with the words (§54) an huius ille legis quam, and
the next page continues C̣ḷọẹlius a se inventam gloriatur.
Noticing that in both the Florentinus and the Turicensis
the marginal addition (gaudeo etiam ... abs te) is inserted not
after legis quam but after Clodius, Halm drew the
inference that these codices were copied from the Bambergensis
not directly, but through some intervening manuscript. The
Harleianus is this manuscript. In it the words referred to do
come in between legis quam and (Cloe)lius: indeed,
so slavishly does the writer follow the second hand in the
Bambergensis, in which the letters C l o e are
subpunctuated, that the Harleianus actually shows et abs te
lius a se inventa76, exactly as the writer of b wished the
Bambergensis to stand. It must be feared that the copyist of the
Harleianus did not know enough Latin to save him from making very
considerable mistakes. If I am right in believing that this manuscript
must take rank above the Turicensis and the Florentinus
(and all other MSS. of this family), it is he who must be credited with
a great deal of the confusion that has crept into Quintilian’s text. It
may be well to mention one or two obvious examples. In ix. 3, 1 the text
stands utinamque non peiora vincant. Verum schemata, &c. In
the Bambergensis, utrum nam is supplied by b above
the line, and in the margin que peiora vincant verum, the words
affected by the change being
lxviii
subpunctuated in the text. The copyist of the Harleianus takes
the utrum nam and leaves the rest, showing utrum nam
schemata: this appears as utrim nam schemata in the
Turicensis, and as utinam schemata in the
Florentinus and Almeloveenianus. Take again ix. 3, 68-9 in
the Bambergensis (G) quem suppli[catione dignum indicaris.
Aliter quoque voces aut] eadem aut diversa, &c. The words
enclosed in brackets are the last line of a particular column (142 v.);
they were inadvertently omitted by the copyist of the Harleianus,
and as a consequence we have supplici in Turic. and
Flor., supplitia in Guelf., &c. Again at x. 7,
20 a certain sleepiness on the part of the scribe of the
Harleianus, which caused him to write Neque vero tantas eum
breve saltem qui foro tempus quod nusquam fere deerit ad ea quae,
&c., has given rise to the greatest confusion in Turic.,
Flor., Alm., Bodleianus, Burn. 243, &c.
In this H follows exactly the second hand in Bg., except for the
remarkable insertion of the words qui foro between breve
saltem and tempus: at this point the copyist of H must have
allowed his eyes to stray to the beginning of the previous line in Bg,
where the words qui foro hold a conspicuous position.
Flor. and Tur. repeat the mistake, except that the latter
gives eum brevem for eum breve. Again at the end of Book
ix, Bambergensis G gives ut numerum spondet flexisse non
arcessisse non arcessiti et coacti esse videantur: this reading is
identical with that of the Harleianus, except that the latter for
arcessiti gives arcessisti, a deviation promptly
reproduced by the Florentinus, while the Turicensis shows
accersisti. Perhaps the most conclusive instance of all is the
following: at iv. 2, 128 the Bambergensis gives (for ἐπιδιήγησις) ΕΠΙΔΙΗΤΗϹΕΙ: this appears in H as
ΕΠΙΔΙΗϹΕΙ the seventh
and eighth letters having been inadvertently omitted by the copyist.
F makes this ΕΠΙΘΕϹΙΕ and T shows ΕΠΙΘϹΙϹ (επιλιησει—Spalding).
The four forms of the Greek word appear in the printed text as:
As the Bambergensis (Bg), in its present state, only commences
at i. 1. 6. (nec de patribus tantum), the readings of the
Harleianus (H) are for the Prooemium and part of chapter 1 of
first-class importance. In the pr. §1 we have pertinerent H,
pertinent T: §2 diversas H, divisas T: §5 fieri
oratorem non posse HF, fieri non posse oratorem T
(as A): §6 amore H, studio F: iτ ingenii H,
iter ingenii T, ingenii F: §13 officio quoque H,
quoque officio F: §19 summa H (also Bg), summam T:
§25 demonstraturi HF, demonstrari T: §27 adiumenta
H (a correction by same hand on adiuvante): so Bg F:
adiuvante T. In chap. 1 §3 sed plus HT: sed et
plus F: hoc quippe viderit H Bg F: hoc
quippe (om. viderit) T.
These instances are taken from the introductory part of the First
Book, where Bg almost entirely fails us, only a few words being here and
there decipherable. Wherever I have compared, in other places, the
readings of
lxix
Bg (and G), H, T, and F, I have found H, if not always in
exact agreement with the Bamberg MS. (often owing to the copyist’s
ignorance of Latin) invariably nearer the parent source than either T
or F. Here are a few instances from the First Book: I §8 nihil
est peius Bg H T, nihil enim est peius F: ib. §11
defuerit Bg H T, defuerint F: ib. §12 perbibet Bg H
F, perhibet T: ib. §16 formandam Bg H, formandum F
T: 2 §18 in media rei p. vivendum Bg (b) H, in med.
rei praevivendum T, reip. videndum F: ib. §24
depellendam Bg H, repellendam T: ib. §31 concipiat quis
mente Bg H, quis mente concipiat F: 4 §27
tereuntur Bg H T, intereuntur F: 6 §9 dicet
Bg, dicit H F, dicitur T: ib. §14 dici ceris Bg
(dici ceris),A diceres H, dici F T: ib. §30 aliaque
quae consuetudini serviunt Bg H,—in margin of H aliquando
consuetudini servit (b): F and T adopt the latter, and give the
alternative reading in the margin: 10 §28 haec ei et cura H F,
haec et cura ei T: 11 §4 pinguitudine Bg H,
pinguedine F T. Among scattered instances elsewhere are the
following: ii. 5, 13 dicentur Bg H, docentur T: 5 §26
hanc Bg H, om. T: 15 §8 testatum est Bg H,
testatum T. In ix. 363 G has parem (for
marem A): H gives patrem and F T follow suit:
cp. ix. 4, 8 hoc est G H, id est F: ib. §16 quoque
G H, om. T: ib. §32 nesciat G H, dubitet F:
dignatur G H, digne dicatur F: viii. pr. §3 dicendi
G H, discendi T: ix. 4, 119 ignorabo G, ignoraba H,
ignorabam T: ib. §129 et hac fluit G H, et hac et hac
fluit T: xii. 11, 8 scierit G, scieret H,
sciret T: ib. 2 §18 autem Bg H, om. T: x. 1, §4
numuro quae G H, num muro quae T, numeroque F: ib.
§50 et philogus G, et philochus H T, et epiloghus
F: ib. §73 porem G H, priorem F T: ib. §75 vel hoc
est G H, hoc est vel T: x. 2, 7 posteriis (for
historiis) H, posteris F (posterius ed. Camp.): x.
2, 10 discernamus Bg, discernantur b,
disnantur H T, desinantur F. Noteworthy cases of the
close adherence of T to H are the following: Empedoclena i. 4, 4:
vespueruginem i. 7, 12: tereuntur i. 4, 27: flex
his x. 1, 2: gravissimus x. 1, 97: ipsae
illae quae extorque eum credas x. 1, 110, where both also
give trans usum for transversum, and non repe for
non rapi: morare refinxit finxit recipit x. 3, 6: nam
quod cum isocratis x. 4, 4. In other instances the writer
of T has evidently tried to improve on the reading of H: e.g. in the
title of Book x, H gives an abbreviation which T mistakes for
quo enim dandum: also extemporal facilitas
which appears in T as extempora vel facilitas: x. 1, 79
ven iudicis H (in mistake for se non iud.), which is made
by T into venit iudicis. Many similar instances could be cited in
regard to both T and F; the reading tantum, for instance, in x.
1, 92, which occurs in both, has evidently arisen from H, which
here shows something that looks more like tantum than
tacitum (the reading of G). Again, in every
lxx
place where Halm uses the formula ‘F T soli ex notis,’ H will
be found to correspond77.
A.
(dici ceris) text image showing inserted letters:
With such evidence as has been given above, it is impossible to doubt
that the Harleianus must now take rank above both the manuscripts
which, before the appearance of Halm’s edition, held so prominent a
place in the criticism of Quintilian, the Codex Florentinus and
the Codex Turicenis. The former is an eleventh century MS., now
in the Laurentian library at Florence. On the first page is this
inscription: Werinharius episcopus dedit Sanctae Mariae: on the
last Liber Petri de Medicis, Cos. fil.: and below Liber
sanctae Mariae ecclesiae Argñ. (= Argentoratensis) in
dormitorio. There were two bishops of Strasburg bearing the name of
Werner: the first 1001-1029, and the second 1065-1079. M. Fierville
(Introd. p. xciv) tells us that the first Werner (of Altemburg or
Hapsburg) laid the foundations of the cathedral at Strasburg in 1015,
and presented to the Chapter a number of valuable books; and we also
know that in 1006 he had attended the Council at Frankfort to promote
the erection of a cathedral church at Bamberg. Here then we have the
elements of a solution of the problem. Bishop Werner was a patron of
letters; and learning that by the addition of what is now known as
Bambergensis G a complete text of Quintilian had been
secured, he had it copied. The Codex Harleianus was in all
probability the first copy, and from it the Codex Florentinus was
reproduced. The latter was still at Strasburg in 1372, a fact which
(though hitherto it seems to have been unnoticed) is enough to dispose
of its claim to be considered the manuscript of Poggio, which he
describes as ‘plenum situ’ and ‘pulvere squalentem’ lying ‘in teterrimo
quodam et obscuro carcere, fundo scilicet unius turris, quo ne capitales
quidem rei damnati retruderentur.’ If so important a MS. had passed from
Strasburg to St. Gall within forty years of Poggio’s visit, it is
hard to believe that it would have been allowed to lie neglected and
unknown. After 1372 we know nothing certain of its history till it
reappears in the library of the Medicis at Florence in the latter part
of the fifteenth century. It is generally supposed that some time
between 1372 and 1417 it must have been transported from Strasburg to
the monastery of St. Gall, and that it passed from there to
Florence after Poggio’s departure. A similar theory may quite as
legitimately be maintained in reference to the Harleianus, which,
as I have
lxxi
already indicated, may be the very manuscript which Poggio discovered at
St. Gall in 141678.
The Codex Turicensis was long considered to be of older date
than the Florentinus, but recent investigations seem to have
proved the contrary. Halm attributes it to the second part of the
eleventh century, and E. Wölfflin takes a similar view. In the
beginning of the eighteenth century it passed into the library at
Zürich. Spalding believed it to be the manuscript discovered by Poggio,
and M. Fierville is of the same opinion: Halm rejects this theory.
The great point in favour of the claim of the Turicensis is that
it is known to have come from St. Gall, while we can only
conjecture the history of the Harleianus. But the
Turicensis cannot have been the MS. which Poggio carried with him
into Italy, according to a statement made by Bandini, Regius, and
others. It is true that this statement is hard to reconcile with what
Poggio himself says in his letter to Guarini, whom he informs that he
has made hasty transcripts of his various ‘finds’ (presumably including
the Quintilian) for his friends Leonardo of Arezzo and Nicolai of
Florence. But Poggio may have had his own reasons for a certain degree
of mystery about his good fortune. In the preface to his edition,
Burmann speaks of the manuscript of St. Gall, on the authority of
the librarian Kesler, as having been ‘honesto furto sublatum’: if it was
the Harleianus there is perhaps little need to wonder that
nothing has been known till now of its later fortunes79.
The affiliation of other MSS. of this class (which includes also the
Almeloveenianus) to the codices which have just been described,
may be determined by the application of certain tests. Prominent among
such MSS. is the Codex Bodleianus, which has received more
attention from editors of Quintilian than its merits seem to me to
warrant. It repeats word for word the remarkable error attributable to
the Harleianus at x. 7, 20 (see above, p. lxviii): in
other places it embodies attempted emendations, e.g. x. 1, 90
nec ipsum senectus maturavit: 2 §7 de metris for
lxxii
dimiteris (see above, p. lxvii, note). It belonged to Archbishop
Laud, and must have been written in the fifteenth century.
Of the same age and family are two manuscripts often cited by Halm,
the Lassbergensis and the Monacensis. The former was
formerly at Landsberg in Bavaria: it is now at Freiburg. The reading
atque interrogationibus atque interrogantibus, which Halm gives
from it alone at x. 1, 35, I have found also in G
and H; this seems quite enough to identify its parentage. The
Monacensis was collated by Halm for his critical edition in the
parts where he had to rely on A G or on G alone: with no conspicuous
results,—‘nihil fere aliud effectum est quam ut docere possemus,
ubi aliquot locorum, qui in libris melioribus leviter corrupti sunt,
emendatio primum tentata sit’ (praef. viii, ix).
Alongside of these I would place a rather interesting MS. in the
British Museum, which has been collated specially for the purpose of
this edition, with no result worth speaking of, except to establish its
class. It repeats the mistake of H at x. 7, 20: and the fact that the
copyist began his work in a hand that was meant to imitate writing of
the eleventh century seems, along with the internal evidence, to prove
that it is one of the copies of Poggio’s MS. In x. 2, 7 it has
posterius for historiis (a mistake in H—see
p. lxix): and in the same place it shows (like the Bodleian codex)
de metris for dimiteris. This is also the reading of the
second hand in the Turicensis. Such differences as exist between
it and H F T may be ascribed to attempted emendation: e.g.
vertere latus x. 3, 21. Poggio’s letter to Guarini is copied at
the end of the volume.
The other MSS. of the fifteenth century, so far as they are known to
him, M. Fierville divides carefully into two classes (his third and
fourth). The principal features of difference which distinguish them
among themselves, and from those already mentioned, are that they
incorporate, in varying degrees, the results of the progress of
scholarship, and that they are seldom copied from any single manuscript.
A detailed examination would no doubt establish what is really the
point of greatest moment in regard to them: how far are they derived,
through Poggio’s manuscript, from the Bambergensis, and how far
from such complete manuscripts as the Ambrosianus and the
original of Bambergensis G? Some of them (as well as other
fifteenth century MSS., with a description of which I desire to
supplement M. Fierville’s Introduction, pp. cii sq.), are of
at least as great importance as those referred to above as having been
collated in part by Halm.
The Argentoratensis (S), also used by Halm, may be mentioned
first: it was collated by Obrecht for his edition of 169880. This
manuscript was
lxxiii
destroyed in the bombardment of Strasburg, August 24, 1870. Then there
are the MS. of Wolfenbuttel (Codex Guelferbytanus), collated for
the first time by Spalding: the Codex Gothanus, used by Gesner
for his edition of 1738: the Codex Vallensis (Parisinus 7723),
which purports to bear the signature of Laurentius Valla
(9 December, 1444), whose corrections and marginal notes it
contains81. The list of these and several others, all carefully
described by M. Fierville, may now be extended by a short reference
to various MSS. in this country, hitherto uncollated. The results of my
examination of them (as well as of the Bodleianus, and
Burneianus 243, referred to above) appear in the Critical
Appendix: if few of them are of first-class importance, it may at least
be claimed that right readings, with which Spalding, Halm, and Meister
have successively credited the early printed editions,—e.g. the
Cologne edition of 1527,—have now been attributed to earlier
sources. And when M. Fierville had so carefully examined the MSS.
of France, Germany, Switzerland, Italy, and Spain, it seemed of some
importance that his laborious work should be supplemented by a
description of the MSS. belonging to the libraries of this country.
In the British Museum there are eight manuscripts in all of
Quintilian’s Institutio: of the most important of these, the
Harleianus (H), I have already given an account, and one of
two MSS. in Burney’s collection (Burn. 243) has also been mentioned. Of
the remaining MSS. two may be taken together, as they are in complete
agreement with each other, and show conclusive proofs (as will appear in
the notes) of relationship to such codices as the Argentoratensis
and the Guelferbytanus. The first of these two MSS. (Codex
Harleianus 2662) has an inscription bearing that it was written by
Gaspar Cyrrus ‘nationis Lutatiae,’ and was finished on the 25th of
January, 1434,—only eighteen years after Poggio made his great
discovery. So great an advance is evident in the text, as compared with
the readings of H F T, that it seems probable that this MS. owes
little to that family. The same may be said of the Codex
Harleianus 11,671, a beautiful little quarto, dated 1467: it has the
Epitome of Fr. Patrizi attached (see Classical Review, 1891,
p. 34). The following cases of remarkable errors will suffice to
connect both these MSS. with the Guelferbytanus: x. 3, 12
a patrono suo for a patruo suo: 1 §97 verum
for veterum: 1 §55 equalem credidit parem (as also
Prat., Guelf., S, and Voss. i.
lxxiv
and iii.): 1 §72 quamvis sui temporis Menandro for ut
pravis sui temporis iudiciis Menandro: 7 §6 adducet
ducetur. Another very interesting MS. in the British Museum is
Harleianus 4995, dated July 5, 1470: it contains the notes of
Laurentius Valla, which were frequently reproduced at the time, and
might be classed along with the Vallensis were it not that a
marginal note at x. 6, 2 (where a false lacuna appears in most
codices, as Bn. and Bg.), ‘hic deficit antiquus codex,’ makes it
probable that the copyist had more than one MS. at his side82. This MS.
agrees with the Vallensis and Gothanus in reading
cognitioni for cogitationi x. 1, 1:
ubertate for ubertas 1 §109: et vis summa
§117: eruendas for erudiendas 2 §6: nobis
efficiendum ib. §14: decretoriis 5 §20. The other two
Harleian MSS. (4950 and 4829) present no features of special interest:
I have, however, included them in the critical notes for the sake
of completeness. The former was written by ‘Franciscus de Mediolano’: it
is often in agreement with the Lassbergensis. The latter finishes
with the words ἡ
βίβλος τοῦ σωζομένου and the motto ἀγαθῇ τύχῃ. The readings of the Burneianus
244 are also occasionally recorded in the notes. All three are in
general agreement with L, and also with the Codex
Carcassonensis, a fifteenth century MS. of which M. Fierville
published a collation in 1874.
A greater degree of interest attaches to two Oxford manuscripts, one
of which (the Codex Balliolensis) is unclassed by Fierville,
while the other (the D’Orville MS.) has never been examined at
all. The former was used by Gibson for his edition of 1693. It begins at
bis vitiosa sunt i. 5, 14, but there are various lacunae, which
do not correspond with those of the incomplete family. The MS. is in
fact in a mutilated condition.
lxxv
In the Tenth Book we miss its help after the end of the first chapter
till we reach iii. §26, where it begins again with the words quam
quod somno supererit: it stops abruptly at nostrorumque
Hort(ensium) x. 6, 4. It is in general agreement with
Harleianus 2662. I may note that in i. 5, 36 it has
interrogatione, a reading which Halm says appears for the first
time in the edition of Sichardus, 1529: ib. §69 it has e rep with
A and 7727, with the latter of which it is in close correspondence (e.g.
forte at i. 5, 15, all other codices forsan or
forsitan).
There remains the D’Orville MS. in the Bodleian at Oxford
(Codex Dorvilianus),—a manuscript which has been entirely
overlooked, except for a single reference in Ingram’s abridged edition
of the Institutio (1809). Yet it seems well deserving of
attention. In some places it shows a remarkable resemblance to the
Ambrosianus (e.g. Getae 1 pr. §6: et quantum
ib. §8): at 1 pr. §4 it has summam inde eloquentiae
(Spalding’s reading, found in no other MS.): destinabamus al.
festinabimus ib. §6 (the alternative being a reading peculiar
to A). Its most important contribution to the Tenth Book is
7 §20, where it gives the reading which Herzog conjectured and
which I have received into the text: neque vero tanta esse unquam
debet fiducia facilitatis: in 2 §14 (see Critical Notes) it has
quos eligamus ad imitandum, a reading peculiar to itself. For the
rest it is in general agreement with the Balliol codex. It is Italian
work, of the early part of the fifteenth century,—earlier, Mr.
Madan thinks, than the Codex Bodleianus. A marginal note at
ix. 3, 2 shows that the copyist must have had more than one MS. before
him. In some cases it would appear as if he carefully balanced rival
readings: at 1 pr. §12. all codices have quaestio ex his incidat
except A, which gives ex his incidat quaestio: the reading
in the Dorvilianus is quaestio incidat ex his: again at i.
2, 6 ante palatum eorum quam os instituimus, many codices give
mores for os: Dorv. shows quam vel mores vel
os.
List of editions, tractates, and books of reference.
Besides the complete editions of Spalding, Zumpt,
Bonnell, Halm (1868-9) Meister (1886-87), use has been made of the following
editions of Book x.:—
M. Stephanus Riccius. |
Venice, 1570. |
C. H. Frotscher. |
Leipzig, 1826. |
M. C. G. Herzog. |
2nd ed. Leipzig, 1833. |
G. A. Herbst. |
Halle, 1834. |
John E. B. Mayor
(incomplete). |
Cambridge, 1872. |
Bonnell-Meister. |
Berlin, 1882. |
G. T. A. Krüger. |
2nd ed. Leipzig, 1872. |
„ „(Gustav Krüger) |
3rd ed. „1888. |
Fr. Zambaldi. |
Firenze, 1883. |
S. Dosson. |
Paris, 1884. |
D. Bassi. |
Torino, 1884. |
lxxvi
J. A. Hild. |
Paris, 1885. |
F. Meister (text only). |
Leipzig and Prague, 1887. |
Frieze (Books x. and xii.) |
New York, 1889. |
Among the Translations, reference has been made to Lindner’s (Philologische Klassiker, Wien,
1881), Alberti’s (Leipzig, 1858), and
Herzog’s (Leipzig, 1829); also to Guthrie’s (London, 1805), and Watson’s (in Bohn’s
series).
The following have been used as books of reference:—
Wilkins: Cicero, De
Oratore, Books i. and ii. (2nd ed.) |
Oxford, 1888 and 1890. |
Sandys: Cicero,
Orator. |
Cambridge, 1889. |
Kellogg: Cicero,
Brutus. |
Boston, 1889. |
Wolff: Tacitus, Dialogus de
Oratoribus. |
Gotha, 1890. |
Andresen: „ „ |
Leipzig, 1879. |
Reiske: Dionysius
Halicarnassensis. |
Vols. v-vi.
Leipzig, 1775-7. |
Usener: Dionysius
Halicarnassensis Librorum de Imitatione Reliquiae, Epistulaeque
Criticae Duae. |
Bonn, 1889. |
Ammon:
De Dionysii Halicarnassensis Librorum Rhetoricorum Fontibus:
Dissertatio Inauguralis. |
Munich, 1889. |
Volkmann:
Die Rhetorik der Griechen und Römer. |
2nd ed. Leipzig, 1885. |
Causeret:
Étude sur la langue de la Rhétorique et de la Critique Littéraire
dans Cicéron. |
Paris, 1886. |
and Fierville:
Quintilian, Book i. |
Paris, 1890. |
The references to Nägelsbach’s Lateinische Stylistik are to the
eighth edition (Nägelsbach-Müller).
The periodical literature bearing specially on the Tenth Book of
Quintilian has grown to very considerable dimensions within recent
years. The following articles and tractates have been
consulted:—
Claussen: |
Quaestiones Quintilianeae. |
Leipzig, 1883. |
Nettleship: |
Journal of Philology, Vol. xviii, No. 36, p. 225
sqq. |
Becher |
Bursian’s Jahresbericht, 1887, xv. 2, pp. 1-61.
|
„ |
Quaestiones grammaticae ad librum X. Quintiliani de Instit.
Or.
(Jahresbericht über die königliche Klosterschule zu
Ilfeld). |
Nordhausen, 1879. |
„ |
Philologus XLV.
|
„ |
Philologische Rundschau, iii. 14: 427 sqq. and 457 sqq.
|
„ |
Programm des königlicken Gymnasiums zu Aurich.
|
Ostern, 1891. |
Kiderlin |
Blätter für das bayer. Gymn.-Wesen, 1887, p. 454;
1188, pp. 83-91.
|
„ |
Jahrbücher f. Philologie u. Pädagogik, vol. 135,
pp. 829-832.
|
„ |
Zeitschrift f. d. Gymn.-Wesen, vol. 32, pp. 62-73.
|
„ |
Fleckeisen’s Jahrb. f. Philologie, 1888, p. 829 sqq.
|
„ |
Jahresb. des philol. Vereins zu, Berlin, xiv. (1888),
p. 62 sqq.
|
„ |
Hermes, vol. xxiii. p. 163 sqq.
|
„ |
Rheinisches Museum, xlvi. (1891) pp. 9-24.
|
Hirt |
Jahresb. des philol. Vereins zu Berlin, viii. (1882),
p. 67 sqq.
|
„ |
„ „ „ ix. (1883),
p. 312 sqq.
|
„ |
„ „ „ xiv. (1888),
p. 51 sqq.
|
„ |
Ueber die Substantivierung des Adjectivums bei
Quintilian. |
Berlin, 1890. |
Meister |
Philologus, xviii. (1863), p. 487 sqq.: xxxiv. (1876),
p. 740 sqq.: xxxv. (1877), p. 534 sqq., and p. 685 sqq.:
xxxviii. (1879), p. 160 sqq.: xlii. (1884) p. 141 sqq.
|
lxxvii
Schöll: |
Rheinisches Museum, xxxiv. (1879), p. 84 sqq.: xxxv.
(1880), p. 639. |
|
Wölfflin |
Rheinisches Museum, xlii. (1887), p. 144 and p. 310
sqq.
|
„ |
Hermes, xxv. (1890), pp. 326, 7.
|
Andresen |
Rheinisches Museum, xxx. (1875), p. 506 sqq.
|
Eussner |
Blätter für das bayer. Gymn.-Wesen, 1881, p. 391 sqq.
|
Fleckeisen’s |
Jahrb. f. Philologie, 1885, p. 615 sqq. Literar.
Centralblatt, 1885, n. 22, p. 754.
|
Gertz |
‘Opuscula philologica ad Madvigium a discipulis missa’ (1876),
p. 92 sqq.
|
H. J. Müller: |
Zeitschrift für das Gymn.-Wesen, xxxi. 12, p. 733
sqq.
|
Iwan Müller: |
Bursian’s Jahresbericht, iv. (1876), 2, p. 262 sqq.; vii.
(1879), 2, p. 157 sqq.
|
Wrobel |
Zeitschrift für die österreich. Gymnasien, xxvii. (1876),
p. 353 sqq.
|
Törnebladh: |
De usu Particularum apud Quintilianum
Quaestiones. |
Holmiae, 1861. |
Reuter: |
De Quintiliani libro qui fuit de causis corruptae
eloquentiae. |
Vratislaviae, 1887. |
Günther: |
De coniunctionum causalium apud Quintilianum usu. |
Halis Saxonum, 1881. |
Morawski: |
Quaestiones Quintilianeae. |
Posnaniae, 1874. |
Marty: |
De Quintilianeo usu et copia verborum cum Ciceronianis
potissimum comparatis. |
Glaronae, 1885. |
Peters, Dr. Heinrich: |
Beiträge zur Heilung der Ueberlieferung in Quintilians
Institutio Oratoria. |
Cassel, 1889. |
Table of places where the text of this edition differs from those of
Halm (1869) and Meister (1887).
|
Halm. |
Meister. |
This Edition. |
Chap. I.
|
§ 1 |
cogitationi |
cognitioni |
cognitioni. |
§ 2 |
quae quoque sint modo |
quo quaeque sint modo |
quae quoque sint modo. |
„ |
nisi tamquam |
nisi tamquam |
nisi tamen. |
§ 3 |
ante omnia est |
ante omnia necesse est |
ante omnia est. |
„ |
imitatio est |
imitatio est |
imitati. |
§ 4 |
procedente opere iam minima |
procedente iam opere etiam minima |
procedente iam opere minima. |
§ 5 |
Num ergo |
Non ergo |
Non ergo. |
§ 7 |
[et] ... scio solitos |
et ... solitos scio |
et ... solitos scio. |
„ |
aliud quod |
aliud quo |
aliud quo. |
§ 8 |
consequimur |
consequemur |
consequemur. |
§ 11 |
τροπικῶς [quare
tamen] |
τροπικῶς quasi
tamen |
as Meister. |
§ 16 |
imagine [ambitu] |
[imagine] ambitu |
imagine et ambitu. |
§ 17 |
commodata |
accommodata |
accommodata. |
§ 18 |
placent ... laudantur ... placent |
placeant ... laudentur ... placent |
as Halm. |
§ 19 |
contrarium |
e contrario |
e contrario. |
„ |
ut actionis impetus |
as Halm |
actionis impetu. |
„ |
retractemus |
retractemus |
tractemus. |
§ 23 |
quin etiam si |
[quin] etiam si |
as Halm. |
lxxviii
§ 28 |
genus * * ostentationi |
poeticam ostentationi |
as Meister. |
§ 31 |
etenim ... solutum est |
est enim ... solutum |
as Meister. |
§ 33 |
ideoque |
adde quod |
adde quod. |
§ 35 |
acriter et |
acriter Stoici et |
as Meister. |
§ 37 |
qui sint legendi, quaeque |
qui sint legendi, et quae |
qui sint legendi, quae. |
§ 38 |
quibuscum vivebat |
as Halm |
[quibuscum vivebat]. |
„ |
Graecos omnis [et philosophos] |
Graecos omnes persequamur [et philosophos] |
as Meister. |
§ 42 |
ad phrasin |
ad faciendam etiam phrasin |
ad faciendam φράσιν. |
„ |
de singulis |
de singulis loquar |
de singulis loquar. |
§ 44 |
tenuia et quae |
tenuia et quae |
tenuia atque quae. |
„ |
summatim, a qua |
summatim, quid et a qua |
as Meister. |
„ |
paucos enim (sunt autem em.) |
paucos (sunt enim em.) |
paucos enim, qui sunt em. |
§ 45 |
his simillimi |
his similes |
his simillimi. |
§ 46 |
omnium amnium fontiumque |
amnium fontiumque |
omnium fluminum fontiumque. |
§ 48 |
non in utriusque |
non utriusque |
non utriusque. |
„ |
creditur |
creditum est |
creditum est. |
§ 53 |
aliud parem |
aliud secundum |
aliud secundum. |
§ 54 |
Aristophanes neminem |
Arist. poetarum iudices neminem |
as Meister. |
§ 59 |
dum adsequamur |
dum adsequamur |
dum adsequimur. |
§ 61 |
spiritus magnificentia |
spiritus magnificentia |
spiritu magnificentia. |
§ 63 |
magnificus et dicendi vi |
magnificus et diligens |
magnificus et diligens. |
§ 68 |
quem ipsum quoque reprehendunt |
quod ipsum reprehendunt |
as Meister. |
§ 69 |
praecipuus est. Admiratus |
praecipuus. eum admiratus |
praecipuus. Hunc admiratus. |
§ 70 |
illa mala iudicia |
as Halm |
illa iudicia. |
§ 72 |
pravis |
pravis |
prave. |
§ 79 |
honesti studiosus, in compositione |
honesti studiosus in compositione |
as Halm. |
§ 80 |
is primus |
is primum |
is primum. |
§ 81 |
orationem quam |
orationem quam |
orationem et quam. |
„ |
sed tamquam Delphico videatur oraculo instinctus |
sed quodam [Delphici] videatur oraculo dei instinctus |
sed quodam Delphici videatur oraculo dei instinctus. |
§ 83 |
eloquendi vi ac suavitate |
eloquendi suavitate |
eloquendi suavitate. |
§ 85 |
haud dubie ei proximus |
as Halm |
haud dubie proximus. |
§ 87 |
phrasin |
phrasin |
φράσιν. |
§ 88 |
propiores |
propriores (?) |
propiores. |
§ 89 |
tamen [ut est dictum] |
tamen ut est dictum |
as Meister. |
§ 90 |
sed ut dicam |
et ut dicam |
et ut dicam. |
§ 91 |
promptius |
propius |
propius. |
§ 92 |
feres |
feras |
feres. |
§ 93 |
elegia |
elegia |
elegea. |
§ 94 |
nisi labor |
non labor |
non labor. |
„ |
multum eo est tersior |
as Halm |
multum est tersior. |
lxxix
§ 96 |
opus * * quibusdam interpositus |
opus sed aliis quibuidam interpositus |
as Meister. |
§ 97 |
grandissimi |
clarissimi |
clarissimi. |
§ 100 |
linguae |
linguae |
linguae suae. |
§ 101 |
commodavit |
commodavit |
commendavit. |
„ |
T. Livium |
T. Livium |
Titum Livium. |
§ 102 |
ideoque illam immortalem |
ideoque immortalem |
ideoque immortalem. |
„ |
clari vir ingenii |
clari vir ingenii |
clarus vi ingenii. |
§ 103 |
praestitit, genere ipso probabilis, in operibus quibusdam suis
ipse viribus minor |
praestitit, genere ipso probabilis, in partibus quibusdam suis
ipse viribus minor |
praestitit genere ipso, probablis in omnibus sed in quibusdam
suis ipse viribus minor. |
§ 104 |
et ornat |
et ornat |
et exornat. |
§ 106 |
omnia denique |
omnia denique |
[omnia] denique. |
„ |
illic—hic |
illi—huic |
illi—huic. |
§ 107 |
vicimus |
vincimus |
vincimus. |
„ |
in quibus nihil |
quibus nibil |
quibus nihil. |
§ 111 |
nihil umquam pulchrius |
nihil pulchrius |
nihil pulchrius. |
§ 115 |
si quid adiecturus fuit |
as Halm |
si quid adiecturus sibi non si quid detracturus fuit. |
§ 117 |
et fervor, sed |
et sermo purus, sed |
et fervor, sed. |
§ 123 |
scripserunt |
scripserunt |
scripserint. |
§ 126 |
ab eo |
ab eo |
ab illo. |
§ 127 |
ac saltem |
aut saltem |
ac saltem. |
§ 130 |
si ille quaedam contempsisset |
si aliqua contempsisset |
si obliqua contempsisset. |
„ |
si parum * * |
si parum sana |
si parum recta. |
§ 131 |
potest utcumque |
potest utrimque |
potest utrimque. |
Ch. II.
|
§ 6 |
tradiderint |
tradiderint |
tradiderunt. |
§ 8 |
nulla est ars |
nulla mansit ars |
nulla mansit ars. |
§ 13 |
[et] cum |
cum et |
cum et. |
„ |
accommodata est |
accommodata sit |
accommodata sit. |
§ 15 |
et a doctis inter ipsos etiam |
as Halm. |
et a doctis, inter ipsos etiam. |
„ |
ut ita dixerim |
ut ita dixerim |
ut sic dixerim. |
§ 17 |
Attici scilicet |
Atticis scilicet |
Attici sunt scilicet. |
„ |
obscuri |
obscuri sunt |
obscuri. |
§ 22 |
cuique proposita |
as Halm |
cuique proposito. |
§ 28 |
deerant |
deerunt |
deerunt. |
„ |
oportebat |
oporteat |
oporteat. |
Ch. III.
|
§ 2 |
alte effossa |
alte refossa |
alte refossa. |
„ |
et fundit |
et fundit |
effundit |
§ 10 |
[ut provideamus] et efferentis. |
ut provideamus et eff. |
ut provideamus, effer. |
§ 15 |
plura celerius |
plura celerius |
plura et celerius. |
§ 20 |
in legendo |
in intellegendo |
in intellegendo. |
§ 21 |
femur et latus |
as Halm. |
frontem et latus. |
lxxx
§ 22 |
secretum quod dictando |
as Halm |
secretum in dictando. |
§ 25 |
velut * rectos |
velut tectos |
velut tectos. |
§ 32 |
adiciendo |
adicienti |
adiciendo. |
Ch. IV.
|
§ 3 |
finem habeat |
finem habet |
finem habet. |
Ch. V.
|
§ 4 |
praesumunt eandem |
praes. eandem |
praes. eadem. |
§ 17 |
inanibus se simulacris ... adsuefacere |
inanibus simulacris ... adsuescere |
as Meister. |
§ 18 |
etiam M. Porcio |
etiam Porcio |
etiam M. Porcio. |
§ 21 |
autem is idoneus |
autem idoneus. |
autem idoneus. |
Ch. VI.
|
§ 2 |
inhaerent ... quae ... laxantur |
inhaeret.... quod ... laxatur |
as Meister. |
§ 5 |
regredi |
regredi |
redire. |
§ 7 |
retrorsus |
retrorsum |
retrorsus. |
„ |
si utcumque |
si utrimque |
si utrimque. |
Ch. VII.
|
§ 1 |
instar portus |
intrare portum |
intrare portum. |
§ 2 |
statimque, si non succurratur |
statimque, si non succurratur |
statimque si non succuratur. |
§ 5 |
quid quoque loco primum sit ac secundum et deinceps |
as Halm |
quid quoque loco primum sit quid secundum ac deinceps. |
§ 6 |
via dicet, ducetur |
via ducetur, dicet |
via dicet, ducetur. |
§ 9 |
observatione simul |
observatione una |
observatione una. |
§ 13 |
superfluere video: quodsi |
videmus superfluere: cum eo quod si |
superfluere video, cum eo quod si. |
§ 14 |
ut Cicero dictitabant |
ut Cicero ait, dictitabant |
ut Cicero dictitabant. |
§ 17 |
adeo praemium |
adeo pretium |
adeo pretium. |
§ 20 |
tanta sit ... fiducia facilitatus ut |
tantam esse ... fiduciam facilitatis velim ut |
tanta esse umquam debet fiducia facilitatis ut. |
„ |
non capitur |
non capitur |
non labitur. |
§ 24 |
quam omnino non |
quam non omnino |
quam non omnino. |
§ 26 |
est et illa |
est et illa |
est alia. |
§ 26 |
quam illa |
quam in illa |
quam illa. |
§ 29 |
nescio an utrumque |
nescio an si utrumque |
as Meister. |
„ |
id efficere |
id efficere |
sic dicere. |
„ |
in his |
in his |
et in his. |
§ 32 |
quod simus |
quod non simus |
quod non simus. |
185
CRITICAL NOTES.
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS.
Bn = codex Bernensis s. x.
Bg = codex Bambergensis s. x.
B = conspirantes lectiones Bernensis et Bambergensis.
G = codicis Bambergensis eae partes quae alia manu suppletae sunt.
Introd. p. lviii.
b = manus secunda codicis Bambergensis.
H = codex Harleianus (2664) s. x-xi. Introd. p. lxiv, sqq.
F = codex Florentinus.
T = codex Turicensis.
N = codex Parisinus Nostradamensis s. x-xi.
Ioan. = codex Ioannensis s. xiii.
For the above (with the exception of H and Ioan. and a fresh
collation of Bg and G) I have depended on Spalding, Halm, and
Meister. In the same way I quote references occasionally to M (codex
Monacensis s. xv), S (codex Argentoratensis s. xv), and L (codex
Lassbergensis s. xv), the Gothanus, Guelferbytanus, Vossiani,
&c.
A collation of the following has kindly been put at my disposal by
M. Ch. Fierville, Censeur des études au Lycée Charlemagne (Introd.
p. lxi,
sqq.):—
Codex Pratensis (Prat.) s. xii.
Codex Puteanus (Put.) s. xiii.
Codex Parisinus (7231) s. xii.
Codex Parisinus (7696) s. xii.
Codex Salmantinus (Sal.) s. xii-xiii.
The readings of the Codex Vallensis (Vall.) are given from Becher’s
Programm des königlichen Gymnasiums zu Aurich, Ostern, 1891.
Other 15th cent. MSS., which I have specially collated for this
edition, are the following (Introd. p. lxxiii, sqq.):—
Codex Harleianus 2662 (Harl. 2662). The inscription on this codex bears
that it was finished 25th Jan., 1434.
Codex Harleianus 11671 (Harl. 11671), bearing date 1467.
Codex Harleianus 4995 (Harl. 4995), dated 5th July, 1470.
Codex Harleianus 4950 (Harl. 4950).
Codex Harleianus 4829 (Harl. 4829).
Codex Burneianus 243 (Burn. 243).
Codex Burneianus 244 (Burn. 244).
Codex Balliolensis (Ball.). This MS. is mutilated, and contains nothing
after x. 6, 4: there is moreover a lacuna from ch. ii to iii §26.
Codex Dorvilianus (Dorv.), in the Bodleian at Oxford (codd. man. x. 1,
1, 13).
Codex Bodleianus (Bodl.).
The readings of the Codex Carcassonensis (C—15th cent.) are
given from M. Fierville’s collation (De Quintilianeis Codicibus,
Paris, 1874).
186
§1.
cognitioni, Harl. 4995: Burn. 243 (and so Gothanus, Spald.).
Cogitationi G and most codd., probably mistaking a contraction in
the ancient text.
§2.
sciet G. The reading scierit (Harl. 4995 and many codd.)
is probably due to H, which gives sciuit (so FT).
quae quoque sint modo dicenda. So GHFTL, and Halm. The
alternative reading is quo quaeque s. m. d., S and all
my 15th cent. MSS: Spalding and Meister, with the approval of Becher.
See note ad loc. In the parallel passages i. 8. 1 Halm adopts Spalding’s
reading (ut sciat) quo quidque flexu ... dicendum for quid quoque ABMS,
and i. 6. 16 (notatum) quo quidque modo caderet for quid quoque BMS, and
so Meister: Fierville returns to the reading of the MSS. In support of
quo quaeque other exx. might be cited: v. 10. 17 quo quaeque modo
res vitari vel appeti soleat, and vi. 4. 22 quo quaeque ordine probatio
sit proferenda. But the parallel instances in the Tenth Book quoted in
the notes (1 §8: 7 §§5 and 6) seem to guarantee the correctness
of the reading of the oldest MSS.: though it is better to take
quoque as the ablative of quisque than (as Halm) as the
relative with que.
tamen: GHFT Harl. 4950: tanquam Harl. 2662, 11671,
4995, 4829, L S Bodl. Ball. Burn. 243 Dorv. In Burn. 244 tanquam
is corrected to tamen. Paratam explains in
procinctu: so that tanquam is not so necessary as
velut in xii. 9. 21.
§3.
ante omnia est: so all codd., and Halm. Hirt (Jahresb. des
philol. Vereins zu Berlin viii. p. 69 sq. 1882: ix. p. 312 sq.
1883) conjectured ante omnia necessarium est, and this is
approved by Kiderlin (Blätter f. d. bayer. Gymn. 1887, p. 454): cp.
necessarium just above, and necessaria in §1. Schöll (Rh. Mus. 34, p. 84)
first challenged the MS. reading, and suggested that the original may
have been ante omnia stat atque, corrupted into ante omniast
[at] atque: for which use of sto, see Bonn. Lex. s.v.
ii. γ. As an alternative suggestion he put forward ante omnia
necesse est, and this was adopted by Meister. Becher (Phil. Rundsch.
iii. 14. 428) proposed ante omnia sciet, though more recently he
has signified his adherence to the tradition of the MSS. Maehly
suggested ante omnia opus esse. Perhaps the true reading may be
ante omnia prodest.
The question depends to some extent on the treatment of the following
passage. GH agree in giving proximam deinde inimitationem novissimam
scribendi quoque diligentia. This Halm converted into proximum
deinde imitatio est, novissimum ... diligentia,—where the
est is certainly superfluous (cp. i. 3. 1), while it may be
doubted (comparing ii. 13. 1 and iii. 6. 81—Kiderlin l.c.) whether
proxima deinde imitatio, novissima &c. would not be a
sufficient change: Kiderlin compares ‘proxima huic narratio,’ ii. 13. 1,
and ‘novissima qualitas superest,’ and objects to the citation of
‘proximum imitatio,’ in 1. 3,
in support of the neuter, on the ground that there ‘signum ingenii’ is
to be supplied.
Kiderlin’s proposed modification of Gemoll’s conjecture (l.c.
p. 454 note, cp. Rhein. Mus. 46 p. 10 note) proximum deinde
multa lectio is adopted by Krüger (3rd ed.), who thinks that the
sequence of thought makes the special mention of legere
(alongside of dicere and scribere) a necessity:
multa corresponds to diligentia in what follows: cp. multa
lectione §10. But
legere has already been touched on in §2, and moreover is included under
imitatio (sc. exemplorum ex lectione et auditione
repetitorum).
§4.
iam opere. So Harl. 4995 and Regius: all other codd. iam opere
iam. Becher reports iam opere also from the Vallensis.
qua ratione. For qua in oratione, the reading of all
MSS., Hirt conjectured
187
qua exercitatione. Schöll proposed to reject in oratione
as a gloss: but qua by itself (sc. via) is only used by Quint.
with verbs of motion: see on 7 §11.
In his latest paper (Rheinisches Museum, 46, pp. 10-13, 1891),
Kiderlin subjects the whole of §4 to a searching and destructive
analysis. He translates: ‘doch nicht darüber, wie der Redner
heranzubilden ist, sprechen wir in diesem Abschnitte (denn dies ist
genügend oder wenigstens so gut, als wir konnten, besprochen worden)
sondern darüber, durch welche Art von Uebung der Athlet, welcher alle
Bewegungen von seinem Lehrer bereits genau erlernt hat, für die Kämpfe
vorzubereiten ist.’ He doubts whether such passages as §33 and 7 §1 can be cited to justify the
abrupt transition from orator to athlete, on the ground of the formal
antithesis in which the two stand to each other,—‘orator’ coming
in at the end of one clause, and ‘athleta’ standing at the head of
another, in front of ‘quo genere exercitationis.’ And yet it is just the
‘orator’ who is to be understood in the ‘athleta.’ As to the sentence
introduced by ‘Igitur eum,’ if by ‘athleta qui omnes iam perdidicerit a
praeceptore numeros’ we are to understand one who has mastered the whole
theory of rhetoric, then it adds nothing to what has been said already,
and is therefore altogether superfluous.
Kiderlin proposes to read: sed ut (so L and S,—also
Harl. 2662, 4995) athleta, qui omnes iam perdidicerit a praeceptore
numeros, multo (nonnullo?) varioque (numuro quae G,—also H: num
muro quae T: numeroque F L; nimirum quo S) genere exercitationis ad
certamina praeparandus erit (sit, the codd.) ita (so
S,—also Harl. 2662, 4995 and Bodl.) eum, qui ... perceperit,
instruamus, qua in praeparatione (qua in oratione, the codd.)
quod didicerit facere quam optime, quam facillime possit. Ut may
easily, he contends, have fallen out before at: and the running
of three words into one (numeros multo vario—numero) is
paralleled by such a case as §23, where it
will be found that Kiderlin sees ut duo tresque in
utrisque. For ‘multo varioque’ he compares viii. 5. 28 multis ac
variis: x. 5. 3 multas ac varias: xi. 3. 163 varia et multiplex: xii. 1.
7 totae tam variis; and, for ‘varioque,’ vii. 3. 16 latiore varioque,
and xii. 10. 36 sublimes variique. ‘Vario genere’ actually occurs i. 10.
7, and multo may easily have been written in the singular, like
nonnullus vi. 3. 11 (hoc nonnullam observationem habet) and
elsewhere. The motive for changing que, quae, into
quo and erit (est?) into sit may have been
the analogy of the foregoing quomodo sit. As for ut (sicut) ita
(sic), it is so favourite a form with Quintilian that he uses it seven
times in the first nineteen paragraphs of this chapter. Qua in
oratione, the reading of all MSS., may have resulted from qua in
praeparatione more probably than from qua ratione, which
appears first in the ed. Col. 1527, and is not so appropriate to the
context as qua in praeparatione (cp. praeparandus above,
and parandae below). Quintilian is detailing in this Book on what
preparation (cp. praeparant §35, comparant §67, praeparetur 6 §6, praeparantur 7 §19) the orator may best and
most easily carry out in practice what he has learnt theoretically. For
the preposition (in praeparatione) cp. viii. pr. 22: ut in hac
diligentia deterior etiam fiat oratio.
The text of Quintilian, especially of this part of the Tenth Book, is
admittedly very defective, and invites emendation: there is a great deal
to be said for the theory that in many places several words must have
dropped out. Kiderlin’s attempts to remedy existing defects are always
marked by the greatest ingenuity: they are all well worth recording as
evidences of critical ability and insight, even though it may be that
not all of them will be received into the ultimate text. Here there
seems no reason why Quintilian, who was notoriously a loose writer,
should not have said in the concluding sentence of the paragraph what he
had already said, in the form of a metaphor, in the clause immediately
preceding. Indeed the word igitur seems to suggest that after
indulging in his favourite metaphor (sed athleta, &c.) he
wishes to resume, as it were, and is now going on to say what he means
in more ordinary language. It may not be artistic: but it is Quintilian.
If he had had some of his modern critics at
188
his side when preparing a second edition of the Institutio some
of his angularities might have been smoothed away.
§5.
Non ergo. Meister and ‘edd. vett.’: I find this reading in
Harl. 4995, and Burn. 243. So Vall. Halm. has Num ergo, and so
most codd. (including HFT Bodl. and Ball.).
§6.
ex his. Qy. ex iis? so §128: cp. Introd. p. xlix.
§7.
quo idem, Meister and ‘edd. vett.’: quod idem Halm,
supported by Becher and Hirt, perhaps rightly. Nearly all my MSS. agree
with GLS in quod: quo occurs in Harl. 4995 only.
§8.
quod quoque GH Halm, Meister: quid quoque (as 7 §5) occurs in L S, also in
Bodl., Ball. For quid Zumpt cites also Par. 1 and 2: i.e. 7723
and 7724 (Fierville). Aptissimum (strangely mangled in most
codd.—e.g. locis ita petissimum G) is given rightly in
Dorv.
§9.
omnibus enim fere verbis. This reading, ascribed by Meister to
Badius, and by Halm to ed. Colon. (1527), I have found in Harl.
4995 (A.D. 1470): ferebis vel G
H: fere rebus vel L S Harl. 2662, 4950, 4829. From the Vallensis
Becher reports fere verbis vel.
intueri, ed. Col. 1527. In Harl. 11671 I find interim
intueri: Harl. 2662 L S Ball., Dorv., Bodl., interim
tueri.
quae nitidiore in parte occurs first in ed. Col. 1527:
Vall.2 Harl. 4995 Goth. Voss. ii. shows quae cultiore in
p.: GH quaetidiorem in p.: LS Harl. 2662 Guelf. Bodl. quae
utiliore in p.
§10.
cum omnem, &c. cum omnem misermonem a. pr. accipiamus
GH: cum omnem enim, most codd. Osann, followed by Gemoll and
Krüger (3rd ed.), suggested omnem enim sermonem a. pr.
accipimus.
§11.
alia vero, Frotscher: aliave GH: aliaque Harl.
4995. This last Becher now prefers (alia que Vall.: alia
quae Regius), comparing ix. 3. 89 and ix. 4. 87.
τροπικῶς quasi
tamen, Spalding, Zumpt, Meister and Krüger (3rd ed.): tropicos
quare tam GH, quare tamen, later MSS. Halm obelized quare
tamen: Mayor only quare. Becher recommends tamen by
itself. Gensler (Anal. p. 25) reads tamen quasi, and is
followed by Hild, who takes quasi with feruntur in the
sense of referuntur (μεταφορά): Zumpt took it with eundem
intellectum. Gemoll approves of the exclusion of quare, which
he thinks must have arisen from a gloss figurate (either marginal
or interlinear) on τροπικῶς. Kiderlin adopts this and thinks the quare
tam of GHL a mutilation of the gloss figurate: gurate
and quare tā are not far apart.
§12.
figurarum G (per compendium): figuranus H. Kiderlin
suggests mutuatione figurarum, sc. ostendimus: after which
Quintilian continues ‘sed etiam ex proximo mutuari licet.’ Cp. Cic. de
Or. iii. 156 translationes quasi mutuationes sunt. Kiderlin adds (Rhein.
Mus. 46, p. 14 note) that in iii. 4. 14 all MSS. wrongly give
mutantes for mutuantes, and in i. 4. 7 A1 has
mutamur for mutuamur.
§15.
hoc sunt exempla potentiora. Hoc is a conj. of Regius
(also Vall.2), all the MSS. giving haec (hec).
Hoc appears in the Basle ed. of 1555 and in that of Leyden 1665.
It is challenged by Schöll (Rhein. Mus. 44, p. 85), who says
quia stands too far away from hoc to allow of such a
construction, and thinks the context has been misunderstood. According
to him haec exempla (those derived from lectio and
auditio) are set over against those which one gets in theoretical
books and lectures: they are more telling, because they act directly on
the mind, and are not served up as dry theory in the form of extracts
(‘quia quae doctor praecepit orator ostendit’). He therefore understands
‘ipsis (exemplis) quae traduntur artibus,’ but admits that ‘etiam’ is
thus otiose, and would therefore read quam ipsis quae traduntur
artibus.
Schöll is supported by Hirt (Jahresb. des philol. Vereins zu Berlin,
1882, p. 70), who thus gives the sense of the passage: ‘Der
Wortschatz wird durch Lektüre und vieles
189
Hören erworben. Aber nicht nur seinetwegen soll man lesen und hören; man
soll es auch noch aus einem anderen Grunde. In allem nämlich, was wir
lehren, sind diese Beispiele, d.h. diejenigen, welche uns die Lektüre
und der Vortrag bieten, wichtiger selbst als die Beispiele welche die
Handbücher und Vorlesungen darbieten, weil, was der Lehrer nur als
Forderung aufstellt, bei dem Redner That geworden ist und sich durch den
Erfolg bewährt hat.’
Iwan Müller (Bursian’s Jahresb. vii. 1879, 2, p. 168) objects
that if Quintilian had wished to convey this meaning he would have said,
not haec exempla, but hinc ducta (petita) or quae hinc
ducuntur (petuntur) exempla; and he rightly desiderates also quam
quae (in) ipsis traduntur artibus. Meister also opposes Schöll
(Philol. xlii. p. 149): the order quam ipsis quae traduntur
artibus is in fact impossible.
On the whole it seems much better to keep hoc, and to
understand: ‘in all instruction, example is better than precept: the
doctor relies only on precept, the orator on example.’
Gertz conjectures nam omnium quaecunque docemus hinc (cp. v.
10. 5: xii. 2. 31) sunt exempla, potentiora (i.e. quae
potentiora sunt) etiam ipsis quae traduntur artibus. But with
hinc, as Kiderlin observes, some other verb than sunt
would be expected: v. 10. 15 is an uncertain conjecture, the MSS. giving
nihil, and in xii. 2. 31 hinc belongs to bibat and
sumptam. Kiderlin himself at first proposed haec praestant
exempla, potentiora: this he now withdraws, however, (Rhein. Mus.
46, p. 15) in favour of haec suggerunt exempla, potentiora,
&c. By haec he understands legere and audire,
and gives the sequence of thought as follows:—‘Aber wenn auch auf
diese Weise eine Fülle von Ausdrücken erworben wird, so ist das doch
nicht der einzige Zweck des Lesens und Hörens. Denn von allem was
wir lehren (nicht nur von den Ausdrücken) liefert dieses (das Lesen und
Hören) Beispiele, welche noch wirksamer sind als die vorgetragenen
Theorieen selbst (wenn der Lernende so weit gefördert ist, dass er die
Beispiele ohne Beihilfe verstehen und sie bereits aus eigener Kraft
befolgen kann), weil der Redner das zeigt, was der Lehrer nur
vorgeschrieben hat.’ For suggerere Kiderlin compares i. 10. 7
artibus, quae ... vim occultam suggerunt, and v. 7. 8 ea res suggeret
materiam interrogationi: cp. also §13 quorum nobis ubertatem ac divitias
dabit lectio, and ii. 2. 8 licet satis exemplorum ad imitandum ex
lectione suppeditet.
§16.
imagine et ambitu rerum: so Harl. 2662 L S Ball. Burn. 243 and
Bodl.: followed by Spalding, Frotscher, Herbst, and Bonnell. GH give
imagine ambitu rerum. Halm (after Bursian) bracketed
ambitu: but it is more probable that imagine is a gloss on
ambitu than vice versa (so Hirt and Kiderlin), and Meister
accordingly (followed by Krüger 3rd ed.) reads [imagine]
ambitu rerum. It seems just as likely, however, that et
has fallen out. Hertz suggested imagine ambituve rerum: Maehly
thinks that ambitu was originally tantum.
nec fortune modo. Gertz proposed nec forma modo: pro
Mil. §1 movet nos forma ipsa et species veri iudicii.
§17.
accommodata ut: ed. Col. 1527, and so Meister and Krüger (3rd
ed.): commodata ut Halm (after Bursian): commoda ut
Spald., Frotsch., Herbst, and Bonnell. GHS give commoda aut:
L and all my MSS commoda ut (except Burn. 243 which shows
comendat ut).
et, ut semel dicam. Kiderlin would delete et, rendering
‘Stimme, Aktion, Vortrag ist, um es kurz zu sagen, alles in gleicher
Weise belehrend.’
§18.
placent—laudantur—placent: so Halm and most edd.,
following S, with which all my MSS. agree. The emphasis gained by the
opposition of placent and non placent makes this reading
probable. But GH give laudetur: and so Meister and Krüger (3rd
ed.) prefer to follow Regius in reading
placeant—laudentur—placent.
§19.
e contrario. This reading, which Meister adopts from ‘edd.
vett.,’ occurs in
190
Harl. 2662, 4995, 4829, 11671, Burn. 243, 244, Bodl. and Dorv. Becher
reports it also from the Vallensis. Halm wrote contrarium.
actionis impetu, Spald. and Krüger (3rd ed.): actionis
impetus GH and all MSS. (except Vall., in which the s in
impetus has been deleted): ut actionis impetus Halm and
Meister.
tractemus GHL: tractamus all my MSS.:
retractemus Spald., Halm, Meister. Becher (Phil. Rundsch. iii.
14. 429) supports tractemus, arguing that the phrase is a sort of
hendiadys = repetendo tractemus (cp. Frotscher, and Bonn. Proleg. to
Lex. p. xxxviii), or that the re of repetamus is to be
supplied in thought with tractemus: cp. Cic. de Div. 1 §1
‘praesensionem et scientiam rerum futurarum.’ Tractamus in 5 §8 also supports this
reading.
iteratione, Harl. 4995 and Vall.2: most MSS.
altercatione (as G) or alteratione (as Harl.
2662).
§22.
illud vero. The MSS. vary between illa (GH) and
illud (Harl. 4995 Vall.2). Kiderlin suggests illa
... utilissima.
§23.
Quin etiam si ... tamen: so all MSS.
Meister and Krüger (3rd ed.) accept Eussner’s proposal to exclude
quin. Becher on the other hand objects (Bursian’s Jahresb. 1887.
xv. 2, p. 9). From some points of view the deletion would be an
improvement: it would bring out better the chiastic arrangement,
utilissimum ... utrimque habitas legere actiones and easdem
causas ... utile erit scire. But (1) such careless repetition
(quin etiam—quin etiam) is not unusual in Quint.: and
(2) si when followed by tamen often = etiamsi:
Cic. pro Leg. Man. §50: pro Deiot. §25: Sall. Bell. Iug. 85, 48 &c.,
so that it is not necessary to connect etiam with it like
etiamsi ... tamen xi. 3. 48. The sentence (as recommending the
reading of the ‘minus pares actiones’) forms an exception to the rule
otherwise consistently followed, ‘non nisi optimus quisque legendus,’
&c.
Again Spalding, Bonnell, and Hild put the comma before, not after
aliquae, which they take with requirentur (‘yet in some
cases’). But this does not square with ‘quoties continget utrimque
habitas legere actiones,’—words which are distinctly against any
idea of selecting from the ‘minus pares.’
causas ut quisque egerit utile erit scire, Halm and Meister
following ed. Ald., and ed. Colon. 1527: causas utile erit scire
Vall.: all other codd. causas utrisque erit scire. Meister thinks
non inutile would be more in accordance with Quintilian’s usage.
Gemoll suggests causas ut plures egerint intererit scire, Kaibel
ut quisque egerit e re erit scire. Perhaps (with Becher)
causas ut quisque egerit intererit scire.
Kiderlin’s treatment of the passage merits a separate notice. He
accepts the first quin etiam, as the reading of the MSS., and
also as quite appropriate to the context (‘in cases even where the
combatants are not equally matched—as were Demosthenes and
Aeschines’). But he doubts whether Quintilian could have written two
sentences running, each beginning with quin etiam, and relies
greatly on the undoubted fact that in the second all the MSS. have
quis etiam,—quin being an emendation by Regius. The
MS. reading is quis etiam easdem causas utrisque erit scire: this
Kiderlin would at once convert into ‘quis etiam illud utile neget
(or, negat esse utile) easdem causas ut quisque egerit,
scire’?—comparing xii. 10. 48 ceterum hoc quod vulgo sententias
vocamus ... quis utile neget? But ut quisque does not quite
satisfy him. In the sequel reference is made to cases in which two and
even three orators have handled the same theme: Kiderlin therefore
proposes ut duo tresque for the MS. utrisque. The passage
would then run: ‘quis etiam illud utile neget (negat esse utile?)
easdem causas ut duo tresque (tresve?)
egerint, scire?’ The position of easdem causas is due to
a desire for emphasis: and for the isolated position of scire cp.
v. 7. 2 quo minus et amicus pro amico et inimicus contra inimicum possit
verum, si integra sit ei fides, dicere.
191
§28.
poeticam ostentationi comparatam. This is Schöll’s conj. for the
MSS. genus ostent. comparatum, which is however defended by
Becher in Bursian’s Jahresb. (1887), p. 40: he contends that the
feminine participles below (adligata, depulsa) refer to
poesis, present in the mind of the writer, and that the text of
the MSS. is simply a case of constr. κατὰ σύνεσιν: cp. ix. 2. 79: ib. 3 §3, and such
passages as Cic. Or. §68 ego autem etiamsi quorundam grandis et ornata
vox est poetarum, tamen in ea (sc. poesi), &c. This would support
also the traditional reading nescio an ulla §65 below, where see note. Becher
explains the MS. reading as = genus (sc. poeticum or hoc genus) ostent.
comp. (esse)—Halm prints genus * * * ostent., and
supposes that poeseos has fallen out.—For genus cp.
§68: de Or. ii. §55, where
genus hoc = history.
Schöll’s argument (Rhein. Mus. 34, p. 86) is that Quintilian
cannot have passed from genus to adligata: Halm’s genus
poeseos is not probable, in the light of Quintilian’s avoidance of
the word poesis (cp. xii. 11. 26, where it occurs once, and there
only in A in rasura—GM giving poetas, which was
probably at first the reading also of A: there Halm and Meister now read
poetica). The text may have been altered by interpolation from
viii. 3. 11: namque illud genus (sc. demonstrativum) ostentationi
compositum solam petit audientium voluptatem,—from which passage
genus may have been written in where the Greek ποιητικήν had fallen out, giving rise
to comparatum. Meister, who adopts poeticam, thinks it
probable that the Greek word started the corruption. Other suggestions
are praeter id quod, genus ost. comp., sol. petit
vol. (Hild),—a transposition which does no good, especially as
it leaves no subject to ‘iuvari’: figurarum sed esse hoc eloquentiae
genus ost. comp. et ... iuvari (Binde); fig., ingenuam
ost. comparatam artem (Gemoll); Kiderlin (Hermes 23, p. 164)
thinks we ought to assume a lacuna, and would read poeticam (or
poesin?) ut illud demonstrativum genus, ostentationi
comparatam: cp. ii. 10. 11: v. 10. 43: iii. 7. 28: viii. 3. 11.
§30.
neque ego: Spald., Frotscher, Herbst, Halm, Meister. Neque
ergo all MSS. Bonnell and Frieze retain the reading of the MSS., the
latter explaining ergo ‘viz. because I have given this caution to
the orator about too close imitation of the poetic manner.’
§31.
quodam uberi: Spald. for quodam moveri of GH and all MSS.
except Harl. 4995, Vail.2 and Burn. 243, which give quodam
molli. Kiderlin suggests quodammodo uberi, thinking that
uberi became ueri, while the letters mo (in
moveri) point to modo: cp. ix. 1. 7 where A has
quomo for quomodo, and xi. 3. 97 where b has homo
for hoc modo. In the margin of Bodl. and Dorv. (both which have
moveri) I find quodammodo vero.
est enim, H, which (like G) has est also
after solutum. Halm adopts Osann’s conjecture etenim:
Kiderlin suggests ea enim or ista enim, which may be
right. Becher defends the double est (GH), comparing ix.
3. 7 quod minus mirum est, quia in natura verborum est, and i. 3. 14
(reading servile est et ... iniuria est).
poetis, H, following b: poesi Spald. ‘recte ut
videtur,’ Halm.
§33.
adde quod, Regius followed by Meister and Krüger (3rd ed.).
audeo quia GH; audio quia L S Bodl. Ball. Harl. 2662,
&c. Halm adopted Geel’s conj. ideoque: and the Bonn. Meister
ed. reads adeo. Becher proposes quid? quod: Kiderlin id
eo magis (fortius) dicere audeo. The last conj. revives what I find
is the reading of some old edd. (e.g. ed. Col. 1527 and Riccius 1570)
quod dicere fortius audeo quia, except that from id eo the
eye might pass more easily to audeo.
opus, accepted from Spalding (who conjectured it
independently) by Halm and Meister, already appears in ed. Col. 1527 and
in that of Riccius 1570.
§34.
rerum exemplorumque. Kiderlin suspects a lacuna after
rerum and suggests ex cognitione rerum enim venit copia
exemplorum. His argument is that
192
while ‘ex cognitione rerum’ might serve as a sort of explanation of ‘ex
historiis,’ ‘exemplorumque’ must also be accounted for, and that after
‘locum’ we expect to hear what advantage is derived from historical
literature, not from what that advantage arises. The omission by a
copyist of enim venit copia explains how exemplorum comes
to be joined with rerum: cp. xii. 4. 1 in primis vero abundare
debet orator exemplorum copia cum veterum tum etiam novorum, and esp.
ii. 4. 20 et multa inde cognitio rerum venit exemplisque, quae sunt in
omni genere potentissima, iam tum instruit, cum res poscet, usurum. For
ne omnia (Badius and Vall.2) the codd. give nec
omnia, which Becher prefers.
§35.
vitio factum est oratorum. G gives est orum with al.
oratorum written in above by the hand which Halm calls b. H (with
FTLS Bodl.) gives est alia oratorum,—one of many strong
indications that it was copied from G: for alia some MSS. give
alias. Halm (ii. p. 369) thinks that orum in G may
have stood for rhetorum.
quae sunt istis. GHLS and Vall. all give sint. But
iniusta, inhonesta, inutilia are as definite as their contraries.
Stoici supplied by Meister, whom Krüger follows. Kiderlin
would place it after maxime, just as Socratici stands
after optime. Perhaps Stoici and Socratici are both
glosses. Quint. may simply be saying that philosophical reading improves
the matter of oratory (de iustis, &c.) and also the form (by
altercationes and interrogationes). Stoici looks
appropriate to de rebus divinis (see note): and argumentantur
acriter is quite in place as referring to the Stoic logic, renowned
for its acuteness (Zeller, Epic. & Stoics, p. 118): but on the
other hand interrogationibus would be as apt in regard to them as
to the Socratics. Cp. de Or. i. §43 Stoici vero nostri disputationum
suarum atque interrogationum laqueis te inretitum tenerent.
On the alternative explanation of the passage mentioned in the note,
altercationibus and interrogationibus are taken as datives
(as often in Quint. after praeparo), referring to two
well-understood parts of the duty of a counsel in an action-at-law. As
regards the altercatio indeed, previous writers on rhetoric had
not stated any special rules for its conduct, probably (as Quint., in
his treatment of the subject, suggests vi. 4. 1) because it was
sufficiently covered by precepts of a more general kind. In a
court-of-law, the altercatio was a discussion carried on between
opposing advocates in the way of short answers or retorts: it followed
(when resorted to) the examination of the witnesses, which was in Roman
usage preceded by the main speeches for the prosecution and
defence, embracing all the facts of the case (Cic. in Verr. i. 1 §55).
Cp. Cic. Brut. §159 iam in altercando (Crassus) invenit parem
neminem.—See Poiret, L’éloquence judiciaire à Rome
pp. 212-216.
§37.
qui sint legendi. Halm, Meister: GHL and all MSS. qui sint.
Legendi appears in ed. Col. 1527, and I have found it also inserted
by a later hand above the line in the Bodleian codex. It may have fallen
out because of legendo above, and Spalding is probably right in
regarding it as indispensable. There seems however no reason for
eliminating the asyndeton by reading et quae (with Meister) or
quaeque (Halm). Kiderlin (Hermes, 23, 1888 p, 160) suggests that
the original may have run qui sint qui prosint: cp. 2 §14 tum in ipsis quos
elegerimus quid sit ad quod nos efficiendum comparemus: xii. 2. 4 quid
sit quod memoriam faciat. This suits the context, cum tantum
utilitatis in legendo iudicemus, and §40 paucos enim ... utilitatis
aliquid. Cp. ii. 5. 20 nec prodesse tantum sed etiam amari potest
(Cicero).
§38.
[quibuscum vivebat] is bracketed by Krüger (3rd ed.), as it had
already been by Frotscher and Herbst. This reading first appears in the
Aldine edition: the only MS. in which I have been able to find any trace
of it is Burn. 243, where quibuscum convivebat is inserted as a
correction. Some have refused to recognise it as a gloss, in spite of
the uncertainty of the MSS., and have sought to interpret it ‘with whom
he lived in close, familiar intercourse’ (opp. to quos viderim §§98, 118): cp. Cic. de
193
Off. i. §143 quibuscum vivimus, ib. §46. But in Brut. §231 Cicero
distinctly says in hoc sermone nostro statui neminem eorum qui viverent
nominare, whence Jeep was led to conj. qui quidem viverent:
Hortensius, for example, was ‘aetatis suae,’ but had died four years
before the date of the Brutus. So Geel conjectured qui tum
vivebant (a reading which however I find in the ed. Col. 1527
and Riccius 1570): Törnebladh qui quidem tum vivebant, Wrobel
qui tunc vigebant (cp. §122), Zambaldi ut quisque tum
vivebat, and Kiderlin qui quidem nondum e vita excesserant;
see Rhein. Mus. 46, p. 23. Andresen proposed to read qui quidem
sescenti erant.
G (and practically H) gives quidqui convivebit. FT part
company with H, the former reading quod quid convivabit, the
latter quidque contuuebit (man. sec. quod quisque
contuebat). Many MSS. (e.g. Bodl. Ball. Harl. 2662, 4995 LS) have
quid quisque convivebat (convivabit L). The
Carcassonensis gives quid quod convivabit.
persequamur [et philosophos]. Persequamur is a conj. of
Regius adopted by Meister: all MSS. give et Graecos omnes et
philosophos (philosophis HFT). In Harl. 4995 (which is dated
A.D. 1470) I have however found
et philosophos exequar: and so (Becher) a later hand in Vall. The
reading of the ed. Col. 1527 is Graecos omnes et philosophos et
poetas persequi velim.
Schmidt, followed by Halm, rejected et philosophos as a gloss,
as both here and in the next sentence Quint. is evidently speaking of
orators only. Certainly, if it stood, we should expect the poets and
historians to come in also. Accordingly Claussen (Quaest. Quint.
p. 335) suspected a lacuna consisting both of the finite verb and
the poets and historians: Krüger (3rd ed.) adopts his conjecture and
reads si et illos et qui postea fuerunt et Graecos omnes persequamur
et poetas et historicos et philosophos? He cps. 1 §25 nam si, quantum de quaque re
dici potest, persequamur, finis operis non reperietur: v. 10. 91: viii.
5. 25. So Andresen (Rhein. Mus. 30, p. 520), except that he omits
‘persequamur,’ and proposes to read above de Romanis tantum et
oratoribus for et in sense of ‘and that’: cp. §§51, 94. Gertz suggests et Graecos omnes
persequi velis nec oratores tantum, sed etiam poetas et historicos et
philosophos. Kiderlin (Berl. Jahr. xiv. 1888, p. 62 sq.)
prefers persequamur because of iudicemus and
adiungamus above. If the verb could be dispensed with, he would
propose ‘et praeter hos oratores etiam omnes poetas et historicos et
philosophos,’—arguing that et praeter hos and philosophos may have
run together in the eye of the copyist and so caused the lacuna. For
et philosophos Jeep suggested explico novos.
§39.
fuit igitur, all codd.: fuerit, Regius. That the
difficulty of the passage was felt by the early editors is obvious from
this emendation, and also from the fact that in §40 the traditional reading has been
non est tamen (for non est): sed non est, Spalding:
at non est Osann.
Taking §§37-45
as they stand the sequence of thought seems to be
this: ‘If I am asked to recommend individual writers I shall have to
take refuge in some such utterance as that of Livy. His dictum
was “read Demosthenes and Cicero first, and let others follow in the
order of their resemblance to Demosthenes and Cicero.” Mine is that
there is some good to be got out of almost every author,—except of
course the utterly worthless. But (sed non quidquid, &c. §42) the particular object I
have in view itself supplies a limitation for what would otherwise be an
endless task (infiniti operis §37). My business is the formation of
style. In regard to this matter there is a difference of opinion—a
cleavage between the old school and the new (see esp. §43). This opens up the whole question of the
various genera dicendi, a detailed examination of which I must
postpone: for the present I shall take the various departments of
literature (genera lectionum §45) and mention in connection
therewith certain representative writers who may serve as models for the
students of style ((iis) qui confirmare facultatem dicendi
volent).’
This seems satisfactory enough, especially in the case of so loose a
writer as Quintilian.
194
§§39 and 40 are parallel, instead of being antithetical: §39 says ‘Livy’s prescription was the
safest,’ while §40 gives a
general utterance on the part of Quintilian. In each deliverance
brevitas is meant to be the distinguishing characteristic of
individual representatives of poetry, history, oratory, and
philosophy.
In his Beiträge zur Heilung der Ueberlieferung in Quintilians
Institutio Oratoria (Cassel, 1889), Dr. Heinrich Peters makes some
very drastic proposals in regard to the sections under discussion. He
fails to see any satisfactory connection between the purport of §§40-42 and that of §§37-39. And he thinks the statement
of a summa iudicii in §40 is inconsistent with the special
treatment of individual authors which begins at §46. On these and other grounds he
proposes to transfer §§40-42 (down to accommodatum) to §44 and read: interim non est
dissimulanda nostri quoque iudicii summa. Summa iudicii then
furnishes the antithesis to disseram diligentius: nostri
quoque iudicii receives additional point from the reference to
conflicting views which immediately precede it: an explanation is gained
of the emphasis laid in §§40-41 on the distinction between the
veteres and the novi,—the later sections §§43-44 explain the preceding
(§§40-42): and the transition from Livy’s dictum in §39 to verum antequam de
singulis in §42 is
natural and easy. Then Dr. Peters would propose to continue: quid
sumat (for summatim, see below) et a qua lectione petere
possit qui confirmare facultatem dicendi volet attingam. This gives
a very satisfactory and even a necessary sequel, he thinks, to non
quidquid ... accommodatum. Sections 40-42 are then addressed, not to the
student of rhetoric, but to the disputants who quarrel over the
comparative merits of the veteres and the novi: Quintilian
says ‘something may be learned from everybody.’ Then he continues ‘for
the formation of style a selection is necessary, and that I now proceed
to make under the two heads of what the student is to appropriate and to
whom he is to go for it.’
quae est apud Livium, &c. Schöll unnecessarily conjectured
qua praecipit Livius (cp. ii. 5. 20) or qua apud Livium in ep.
ad fil. praescribitur,—doubting if brevitas could have
an acc. and infin. depending on it. But see note. G gives quae
apud Livium epistula, in being inserted by the second hand,
which H as usual follows.
§42.
ad faciendam φράσιν. This is the reading now proposed by
Kiderlin (in Hermes, vol. xxiii. p. 161), though φράσιν appeared as early as the edition
of Riccius (1570). The following are the MSS. readings ad farisin
G: ad faciendam etiam ad farisin H (affaresim S. Harl.
2662 Bodl. Ball. apharesim Harl. 4295) ad faciendam
affarisin L. Meister adopts the vulgate, ad faciendam etiam
phrasin: Halm reads ad phrasin.
The parallel passage in §87 clearly makes for
faciendam. The probability is that ‘phrasin’ was originally
written in Greek, as at viii. 1 §1: cp. ἕξις in §1: §59: 5 §1, where the MSS. vary between
ex his, lexis, exitum, &c.: τροπικῶς §11. Cp. on §87. Two Paris MSS. (acc. to Zumpt)
show ἀφέρεσιν.
Etiam Kiderlin rejects: perhaps however the true reading may be
protinus et ad faciendam φράσιν.
de singulis loquar, G man. 2 H L and Vall. Halm omits
loquar, with G.
§44.
tenuia atque quae. In a very interesting note (Programm des
königlichen Gymnasiums zu Aurich, 1891, p. 8) Becher establishes
the correctness of this reading, instead of the traditional tenuia et
quae. The Vallensis has tenuia atque que (i.e. atque
quae): for what may appear a cacophony, Becher compares i. 3. 8
atque ea quoque quae, Cic. de Leg. Agr. ii. 33. 90 atque qui. ‘That V
(Vall.) has preserved the true reading is confirmed by the other
codices: not only S, which gives tenia atque que, but also GL
[and H], tenui atque, which is nothing else than tenui
AtQUE, i.e. tenuia atque quae.’ In the Rh. Mus. xi. (‘zur Kritik
der ciceronischen Briefe’ pp. 512-13) Buecheler says, ‘One of the
commonest sources of corruption in the Florentine codex is that when two
“consonant syllables” follow each other, one is omitted. The
195
reason of this phenomenon is probably the fact that in the archetype of
which this MS. is an indirect copy the sounds which were to be repeated
were distinguished by letters of a larger size.’ Becher finds the same
phenomenon in the manuscripts of Quintilian, and gives the following
examples, selected at random from many others: §45 aliquos G(H)LSV, i.e.
aliQUOS = aliquos quos: §54 reddit G(H)V, i.e.
redDIt = reddidit (so cod. Almen.): §79 auditoris S (audituris G,
also H), i.e. auditorIs = auditoriis (as Vall. M: also Ball.
Dorv. Burn. 244 Harl. 4829, 4995): ibid. comparat GMS (and all my codd.)
i.e. compARat = compararat: §84 probandoque G (and H) =
probandoQUE: §89
etiam sit G (see Crit. Note ad loc.) = etiam SIt. Especially
significant is ix. 4. 41 o fortunatam me consule Romam AGM, i.e. o
fortuNATAM me consule Romam.—Becher finds a further ground
for atque, as connecting ‘quae minimum ab usu cotidiano recedunt’
more closely than et, in the fact that already in Cicero
tenuis is used of a person of the commoner sort, ‘unus de
multis,’ de Leg. iii. 10. 24.
lenis ... generis. For lenis Krüger (3rd ed.) reads
levis, adopting a conj. of Meyer (Halm ii. p. 369) for which
cp. §52 (levitas verborum)
and v. 12. 18 (levia ac nitida): supported by Becher Phil. Runds. iii.
14. 430. In this sense levis (λεῖος) is opp. to asper: cp. de Orat. iii. §171
struere verba sic ut neve asper eorum concursus neve hiulcus sit, sed
quodam modo coagmentatus et levis: cp. §172: Orat. §20: Quint.
ii. 5. 9 levis et quadrata compositio: de Orat. iii. §201 levitas
coniunctionis: Brut. §96: de Opt. Gen. Or. §2: Quint. viii. 3. 6.
interim. H. Peters would prefer nunc (if the text
stands as it is), comparing v. 11. 5; 14. 33: ix. 4. 19.
summatim quid et a qua. Kiderlin approves of Meister’s
retention of the vulgate: petere must have an object. So Krüger,
3rd ed. The original reading in G is sumat et a qua, corrected to
sumat quia et a qua, which occurs in HFTL. Bodl. Ball, and my
other MSS. agree with S in reading summa for sumat. Even
if the text stands (without his proposed inversion) H. Peters would
prefer quid sumat et a qua, as nearer the MSS.
§45.
paucos enim qui sunt eminentissimi. Meister and Krüger 3rd ed.
have paucos (sunt enim em.) =‘nur wenige’: cp. hos (sc.
tantum) §91. Halm reads
paucos enim (sunt autem em.) GH give paucos enim sunt
em. L and the British Museum MSS. all read paucos sunt
enim. The text is that of ed. Col. 1527 adopted by Zambaldi, and
approved by Kiderlin: cp. §101 qui sunt dulciores: ix 4. 37
quae sunt asperiores. Osann proposed paucos enim, sunt
enim.
his simillimi, Halm, supported by Becher, who compares §39: his similes Meister and
Krüger (3rd ed.). G has hi similibus, corrected by the same
hand to simillimis: H gives his simillimis: all the
other MSS. his simillimi.
plures is the common reading, and occurs in Harl. 4995, and
also Vall. (Becher). GHFT give plurimis: LS and the later MSS.
generally plurimos. Kiderlin proposes pluris iis as being
nearer plurimis. The pronoun, he argues, is not superfluous,
because Quintilian is distinguishing between ‘qui confirmare fac. dic.
volent’ (i.e. those who have finished their rhetorical studies and want
practice) and the ‘studiosi’ (young men busy with theory). The latter
will read more authors than those for whom this book is intended,
its aim being (§4) to instruct the young orator (after the stage of
theory) how best and most readily to use what he has acquired.—For
aliquos quos see on tenuia atque quae §44 above.
qui a me nominabuntur, ed. Col. 1527; GH have quia
nom.: Vall. LS qui nom. Hertz rejects a me, and he may
be right.
§46.
omnium fluminum. GHL Bodl. annium: S Harl. 2662, 4950,
Ball. amnium vim. Halm, following Osann, read omnium
amnium: but though omnium is necessary (cp. πάντες ποταμοί Il. 21. 196),
Quintilian would surely have avoided such
196
a cacophony as omnium amnium. Wölfflin conjectured omnium
fluminum (Rhein. Mus. 42, Pt. 1, 1887, p. 144), and this is now
accepted by Meister (vol. ii. p. 362 and Pref. to Book x,
p. xiii). Wölfflin supposes that the archetype had omnium
fontiumque, fluminum having fallen out: omnium was
then corrected into amnium. Amnis however is rare, and
fluminum not only secures an apt alliteration, but is constantly
found: cp. §78 puro fonti
quam magno flumini propior: viii. 3. 76 magnorum fluminum navigabiles
fontes: Lucr. iv. 1024: v. 261, 945 (‘fluvii fontesque’): Ovid Met. i.
334.
§47.
ac consiliorum L: hac con. G: et con. Prat. Put.
atque con. 7231, 7696.
§48.
operis sui ingressu: operis si ingressus GH: operis
sui Bodl.: operis Prat. Put. S Harl. 2662, 4995, 4950, Dorv.
Ball. Badius conj. ingressu, and Halm added in, which is
however unnecessary: cp. iv. 1. 34 operum suorum principiis: iv. pr. 4
initiis operum suorum. Becher keeps ingressus, but makes it a
genitive dependent on versibus.
Two Oxford MSS (Bodl. and Dorvilianus) give nam for
non, and in the former case the nam looks very like
viam. It is possible that viam may be the true reading:
cp. ii. 10. 1 quarum (materiarum) antequam viam ingredior ... pauca
dicenda sunt,—though there the phrase refers to entering on the
regular treatment of a subject. Age vero is not always
found with questions, Hand Turs. i. p. 211. Without non, the
reading may possibly be age vero viam utriusque operis ingressus, in
paucissimis, &c. The si after operis may have
arisen from operi s ingressus. The MSS. are unanimous for
ingressus, and the awkwardness of operis sui ingressu in pauc.
vers. makes it very probable that something is wrong. Utrumque opus
ingressus would have been more natural: viam utriusque operis
ingressus is not far off it. Perhaps however it would be preferable
to keep the question and read nonne viam ut. op. ingressus.
nam benevolum. nam et ben, Put. 7231, 7696: so too the
Carcassonensis.
§49.
ceteraque genera. GHL and the Brit. Mus. MSS. give ceteraque
quae: so too Bodl. and Ball. Genera was conjectured by Caesar
(Philol. xiii. p. 757). Schöll (in Krüger 3rd ed.) proposes
ceteraeque viae ... multae: Kiderlin ceteraque, quae probandi
ac refutandi sunt, nonne sunt ita multa ut ... petant? For quae
... sunt he compares §106 omnia denique quae sunt
inventionis.
§50.
ut magni sit. G Burn. 243: Ball.: Bodl.: sint H: ut
magni sit viri Prat. Put. 7231, 7696, S, Harl. 2662, 4995, 4950,
4829, Dorv., Burn. 244 (sint L): ut magnum sit,
Gensler: ut magni sit spiritus, Kiderlin (cp. i. 9. 6).
§51.
et in omni: et om. Prat. and Put.
clarissima LS and most codd.: durissima GHT Prat. Put.
7231, 7696, Dorv.
§52.
utiles circa praecepta, &c. Kraffert proposed utilis circa
praecepta sententiasque levitas verborum ... With praecepta
may there not have been a genitive in the original text: utilis circa
praecepta sapientiae (pr. §19: i. 4. 4: xii. 1. 28), or perhaps
utiles circa morum praecepta sententiae (xii. ii. 9)?
§53.
secundum Prat. Put. 7231, 7696, Vall. LS Harl. 2662, 4995 Dorv.
Ball.: om. GHFT Bodl. Halm, following Hertz, gives parem (cp. §127 pares ac saltem proximo):
aequalem would be as probable, and is given by some MSS. in §55. Schöll now thinks
secundum an old interpolation, and conjectures quam sit aliud
atque aliud proximum esse, cp. i. 7. 2: ix. 4. 90.
§54.
poetarum iudices Prat. Put. 7231, 7696, LS Ball. iudicium
G, iuditium H. Halm suspected it to be a gloss introduced
from the margin (cp. laus Ciceronis §109) and Mayor removed it from the
text.
reddidit cod. Almen.: reddit GHFT Vall. Harl. 4995
Bodl. Burn. 243. Edidit is given in Prat. Put. 7231, 7696 Harl.
2662, 4950, 4829 Dorv. and Ball., besides L and S.
sufficit MSS.: Halm would prefer suffecit (cp. §123). For parem many MSS.
197
give equalem, which must have been a gloss: S has equalem
credidit parem, and so Prat. (Fierville Introd. p. lxxix) Harl. 2662 (A.D. 1434) and 11671 (A.D. 1467).
§56.
Macer atque Vergilius. Unger suggested Valgius for
Vergilius. This is however unnecessary, though it has been proposed to
insert the comma after Vergilius instead of after idem
below.
§59.
adsequimur GHS Prat. Put. 7231, 7696 Bodl. Ball. Dorv. and
British Mus. MSS. (except 4950 which gives C and L’s assequatur
and 4829 which has assecuntur). Halm reads adsequamur, and
is followed by Meister. Krüger (3rd ed.) proposes ut
adsequamur.
§60.
quibusdam quod quoquam minor est. GH give quibus for
quibusdam: Prat. Put. S and all my MSS. have quibusdam quod quidem
minor est: (minoris Bodl. Burn. 243): quod quodam
7696. Wölfflin (Rhein. Mus. xlii. Pt. 2, p. 310) proposes quod
idem amarior est: amarus (§117) indicates the excess of
acerbitas (§96) which might be alleged against Archilochus for
his lampoons on Lycambes. Cp. iamborum amaritudinem Tac. Dial. 10. But
quoquam (Madv. 494 b) does not necessarily imply that there
is any one superior to the great Archilochus, though, outside the
range of iambographi, Homer is always present (§65) to the writer’s
mind. Quoquam is not to be restricted to the narrow circle of
iambic writers, otherwise materiae would have no point.
Quintilian means that Archilochus must be ranked immediately after
Homer, if indeed the disadvantage of his subject-matter forbids us to
place him alongside of Homer. That he had a schoolmaster’s liking for an
‘order of merit’ is shown by §§53, 62, 85, 86.
§61.
spiritu, magnificentia, Put. 7696 S Harl. 2662, 4995, 11671,
Dorv.: spiritus H (sps.) Prat. 7231 Harl. 4950 Burn. 243
Bodl. Ball., and so Halm and Meister. The strongest argument for the
abl. is that the nouns go together in pairs,—spiritu
magnificentia, sententiis figuris, copia ... flumine. So Claussen
(Quaest. Quint. p. 334), who compares Dion. Hal. ἀρχ. κρ. 2. 5, p. 420 R
ζηλωτὸς δὲ καὶ Πίνδαρος ὀνομάτων καὶ νοημάτων εἵνεκα, καὶ
μεγαλοπρεπείας καὶ τόνου, καὶ περιουσίας .... καὶ
σχηματισμῶν.
§62.
Stesichorum Badius: iste sichorus GH: Stesichorus
Bodl. 7696: Stesicorus Harl. 4995: other MSS. Terpsichorus
or Terpsicorus.
§63.
magnificus et diligens et plerumque oratori similis: GH
magnificus et dicendi et plerumque orationis similis; so Burn.
243 and Bodl. (orationi); most other MSS. et diligens
plurimusque (plurimum or plurimumque) Homero
similis: plurimumque oratio, Prat. Put.: plerumque
orationis 7231, 7696. Halm gives dicendi vi, which, after
in eloquendo, would be strange. Wölfflin proposes elegans
et (for dicendi et, diligens et): cp. §§78, 83, 87, 93, 114, and Dion. Hal. l.c. Ἀλκαίου δὲ σκόπει τὸ μεγαλοφυὲς καὶ βραχὺ καὶ ἡδὺ μετὰ δεινότητος
... καὶ πρὸ πάντων τὸ τῶν πολιτικῶν πραγμάτων ἦθος. Halm’s
dicendi vi rested on μετὰ δεινότητος, but we need not suppose that
Quintilian translated word for word from Dionysius. With in eloquendo,
diligens seems quite appropriate: i. §3 cum sit in eloquendo
positum oratoris officium.
Sed et lusit, Prat. Put. Voss. 1 and 3: sed et eius sit
GH: sed in lusus MS Ball. Dorv.: sed editus sit Bodl.
§64.
eius operis: ei GH: eius M Bodl. Burn. 243:
eiusdem Prat. Put. 7231, 7696 S, Harl. 2662, 4995, 4950, 4829,
Burn. 244, Dorv., Ball. In Prat. and Put. the order is in hac parte
omnibus eum eiusdem operis.
§65.
est et in. The MSS. give etsi est: Wölfflin conjectured
est et, and Halm, (following some old edd.) inserted in,
comparing §§64 and 68. So too Meister. Etsi may
have crept into the text to anticipate tamen (ii. 5. 19): or the
true reading may be est et etsi in. Schöll suggests (Krüger, 3rd
ed. p. 92) that the passage ought to run as follows:—ant.
com. cum sincera illa sermonis Attici gratia prope sola retinet
198
vim (dum G, tum vulg.) fac. libertatis, et si
est in insect. vitiis praecip., plur. tamen, &c.
nescio an ulla. This is the reading of Prat. Put. 7231, 7696,
M, S, Harl. 2662, 4995, 4950, 11671, Dorv. Ball., and if it can be
sustained, the sense it gives is quite satisfactory. We must suppose
that poesis (probably the only fem. noun that would suit) was
present in the writer’s mind: see on poeticam §28 above.
But in Quint. poesis occurs only once (cp. on §28),—at xii. 11. 26, where it
is not used of a special branch of poetry, as here; and even there a
doubt has been expressed about the reading. Kiderlin therefore urges
(Hermes 23, p. 163) that it is incredible that Quintilian would
have left his readers to supply for themselves a word which he uses only
once, if at all: ullum genus would surely have occurred to him,
as both genus and opus are constantly used to denote departments of
literature. Again the text gives post not praeter Homerum.
Founding on the reading an illa (GHFT Burn. 243 Bodl.) Kiderlin
therefore suggests an illa poeta ullo post &c.: ‘und ich
weiss nicht, ob nicht jene mehr als irgend ein Dichter (nach Homer
jedoch, &c.).’ The copyist would easily wander from poet. to
post, and it is not unusual to compare old comedy &c. with
the poets and not their works (cp. similior oratoribus: historia proxima
poetis est §31: at non
historia cesserit Graecis §101); especially as here post
Homerum follows at once. For ullo cp. §60 quod quoquam minor est. An
alternative emendation would be poesi ulla.
The aut ... aut immediately below is very much against this
conjecture, which however Krüger (3rd ed.) has received into the text:
we should expect rather nescio an illa quisquam, or nullus
poeta, or keeping illa as nominative nescio an illa poeta
ullo. Quintilian’s use of nescio an (like that of
post-Augustan writers generally) is vague: it is usually an expression
of doubt, the an meaning either ‘whether,’ or ‘whether not’
indifferently. Cp. ix. 4. 1: vi. 3. 6: viii. 6. 22: xii. 10. 2: i. 7.
24. (Mayor cites also Plin. Ep. i. 14. 9: iii. 1. 1: iv. 2. 1: v. 3. 7:
vi. 21. 3: vii. 10. 3: 19. 4: viii. 16. 3: ix. 2. 5; and adds ‘In all
these instances nescio an (dubito an) is ‘I doubt whether’; in
Cicero the meaning is always ‘I rather think.’’) Andresen proposed
nescio an ulla poeseos pars. The passage closely resembles §28, and must be emended on the
same lines.
§66.
tragoedias. Thurot (Revue de Phil. 1880, iv. 1, p. 24)
conjectured tragoediam: cp. §67 hoc opus. He is followed by
Dosson, against all MS. authority. Becher points out that we must supply
with hoc opus in §67
the words ‘tragoedias in lucem proferendi,’ so that opus and
tragoedias square well enough with each other.
§68.
quod ipsum reprehendunt, Meister, Krüger (3rd ed.) and Becher.
This reading also occurs in the Codex Dorvilianus. Other readings are
quod ipsum quod GHT Burn. 243, Bodl.: quo ipsum MS Harl.
2662, 4995, 4950, Ball. Halm conjectured quem ipsum quoque, and
was followed by Mayor and Hild. But as no fault has been found with
Euripides in the foregoing, quoque seems out of place.
Founding on the reading of GHT, &c., also on that of F (which
gives quod ipsum qui) Kiderlin (Hermes 23, p. 165) proposes
to read quod ipsum quidam, comparing §98, where for quem senes quem
(GT) Spalding rightly conjectured quem senes quidem, and 7, §21, where Bn, Bg give
quod for quosdam. He then goes on, in an interesting
paper, to reconstruct the whole passage, which is open to suspicion,
especially in respect that sublimior stands as predicate with
gravitas and cothurnus, as well as with sonus. The
admirers of Sophocles consider his elevation of tone more appropriate
than the strain of Euripides. Sublimior is therefore perhaps
not the predicate of the sentence, however suitable it may be as
the attribute of sonus. The predicate may have dropped out, and
sublimior may have been transferred from its real place to supply
it. It is striking that GFTM (also H and Bodl.) all give sublimior
erit. Kiderlin imagines that a copyist who missed the predicate
wrote in the margin ‘sublimior erit ponendum
199
post esse’: and then another inserted sublimior erit after
esse in the text. For the predicate, magis accommodatus
might stand: in copying, the eye may have wandered from magis
accommodatus to magis accedit: for magis accomm. cp.
ii. 5. 18 and x. 1. 79. Kiderlin therefore boldly proposes to make the
parenthesis run, ‘quod ipsum quidam reprehendunt quibus gravitas et
cothurnus et sublimior sonus Sophocli videtur esse magis accommodatus’:
‘was gerade manche tadeln, welchen das Würdevolle, der Kothurnus, und
der erhabenere Ton des Sophokles angemessener zu sein scheint.’
et dicendo ac respondendo 7231, 7696: dicendo ac
respondo GH: in dicendo et in respondendo Prat. Put. S (et
respondendo M).
praecipuus. Hunc admiratus maxime est. This is Meister’s
reading, except that for eum I give (with Prat. Put. 7231, 7696
Harl. 2662 and 4995) hunc, which is commoner in Quint. at the
beginning of a sentence (§§46, 78, 91, 112). The following are the
readings of the MSS.: GH praecipuus et admiratus miratus: M Bodl.
Harl. 4950, 4829, Burn. 244, C, Burn. 243 Ball. Dorv. praecipuus et
admirandus: S praecipuum. Nunc admiratus et: Prat. Put. Harl.
2262 and 11671 praecipuus hunc admiratus et maxime est ut saepe test.
et sec. quamvis: Harl. 4995, hunc admiratus max. ut s. test. et
eum secutus quamquam. Halm gives praecipuus est. Admiratus maxime
est: Kiderlin insists on the est after praecipuus, to
correspond with accedit, though it seems better to take all that
comes after accedit as an explanation of the statement magis
accedit oratorio generi: he also retains the et of most MSS.
and reads praecipuus est. hunc et admiratus (Blätter f. d. bayer.
Gymn. 24, p. 84). Wölfflin (partly followed by Krüger 3rd ed.)
proposed a more radical change (Rhein. Mus. 1887, 2 H. p. 313)
praecipuus. Hunc imitatus, quoting in support of the conjunction
imitatus ... secutus §122, eos iuvenum imitatur et
sequitur industria: 5 §19, deligat quem sequatur,
quem imitetur: Ovid, Fasti v. 157, ne non imitata maritum esset et ex
omni parte secuta virum. But Kiderlin (l.c.) aptly remarks that if
Quintilian had written imitatus, he would not have said ut
saepe testatur but ut ex multis locis patet (apparet,
videmus): while vii. 4. 17 (on which Wölfflin relies) is not really
to the point. Moreover Quintilian, would never have separated such
synonyms as imitatus and secutus by ut saepe
testatur.
Charisi nomini addicuntur, Frotscher: Charis in homine
adductura GH: Charisii nomine eduntur Prat. Put. 7231, 7696
Harl. 2662 Dorv.
§70.
aut illa iudicia Prat. Put. 7231, 7696 Harl. 4995. GH Harl. 4950
give aut illa mala iudicia: Bodl. Burn. 243 aut alia mala
iud. S Harl. 2662 Dorv. and Ball. aut alia iudicia. The edd.,
following Gesner, have generally given (with Harl. 4950) aut illa
mala iudicia (so Halm and Meister), and have taken mala as
predicate, though the order of the words makes that impossible. Becher
approves of Andresen’s deletion of mala. Krüger (3rd ed.) prints
mala [illa] iudicia, thinking that illa arose by
dittography, and that then the order was changed in the codd. to illa
mala iudicia. Kiderlin (in Hermes 23) gives as an alternative to
deleting mala the conjecture illa simulata iudicia (‘jene
erdichteten nachgemachten Gerichtsverhandlungen’; cp. xi. 1. 56: cum
etiam hoc genus simulari litium soleat). A similar mutilation
occurs, e.g., xi. 1. 20, where b gives secum M secus
instead of consecutum.
§71.
filiorum militum, most codd.: filiorum maritorum militum
Prat. Put. 7231, 7696 S.
§72.
si cum venia leguntur. The reading of the MSS. is upheld by Iwan
Müller, Meister, and Kiderlin. Spalding suggested cum verecundia:
Schöll cum iudicio: Becher cum ingenio. Becher points out
(Bursians Jahresb. 1887) that the expression is meant to cover
decerpere as well as legere, and decerpere
indicates careful and intelligent reading (cp. §69, diligenter lectus): cum
ingenio = ‘mit Verstand’: cp. Cic. ad Fam. xiii. 10. 2 quod
versabatur in hoc studio nostro .. et cum ingenio .. nec sine industria:
Ulp. Dig. 1. 16. 9 patientem esse proconsulem oportet, sed cum
200
ingenio, ne contemptibilis videatur. Finally, Krüger (3rd ed.) proposes
cum acumine or cum vigilantia (cp. v. 7. 10).—Prat.
Put. 7231, 7696 S Harl. 2662 all give Osann’s conjecture
legantur.
prave GH Harl. 4995, 4950 Burn. 243 Bodl.: pravis
Regius, Halm, Meister, Becher draws attention to the parallelism between
the clauses: ut prave praelatus est sui temporis iudiciis, ita merito
creditur (= meruit credi) secundus consensu omnium.
§76.
nec quod desit ... nec quod redundet: H Burn. 243 and Bodl. give
quod .. quod: Prat. Put. MS Harl. 2662, 4995, 4950, Burn. 244,
Dorv. C, and Ball, quid .. quid. The latter reading is supported
by Becher (Phil. Rund. iii. 434). For quod cp. xii. 10. 46: (xii.
1. 20 where for quod adhuc BM give quid adhuc): on the
other hand, in vi. 3. 5 the MSS. are in favour of quid, though
Halm reads quod (followed by Meister). For quid cp. Cic.
pro Quint. §41, neque praeterea quid possis dicere invenio.
§77.
grandiori similis. So all MSS.: Halm and Meister. Several
conjectural emendations have been put forward. Comparing 2 §16 (fiunt pro grandibus
tumidi), Becher suggests grandi oratori,—an easy change, if
the copyist used contractions, but without point: above in §74, ‘oratori magis similis’ is
appropriate enough in speaking of historians, but ‘oratori’ would
be inappropriate here. This is accepted, however, by Hirt (Berl. Jahr.
ix., 1883, p. 312; cp. P. Hirt, Subst. des Adjectivums,
p. 12). Schöll proposes to read gladiatori similis, in view
of the close connection with what follows, strictus ... carnis ...
lacertorum: but plenior and magis fusus are a bad
introduction to gladiatori, and if Aeschines had plus
carnis and minus lacertorum, he cannot really have resembled
a gladiator. This reading is, however, adopted by Krüger (3rd ed.).
Finally, Kiderlin (Hermes 23, p. 166 sq.) has conjectured et
grandi (or grandiori) organo similis, and applies the
figure throughout: ‘voller und breiter lässt Aeschines den Ton
hervorströmen, einem grossen Musikinstrumente gleich’: ‘einer Orgel
gleich,’—he is grandisonus. The translation appears to
limit unnecessarily the meaning of plenus and fusus:
though the former is used of tone i. 11. 6 (cp. xi. 3. 15 of the voice:
ib. §§42, 62: and §55 of the breath): while fusus is used of the
voice xi. 3. 64. For such a use of grandis cp. §58 (cenae): §88 (robora): xi. 2. 12 (convivium):
3. 15 (vox): 68 (speculum): and for organum, i. 10. 25: ix. 4.
10: xi. 3. 20 (where there is a comparison between the throat and a
musical instrument): probably also i. 2. 30. There is an antithesis in
the two parts of the sentence between fulness and breadth, on the one
hand, and real strength on the other; and for the transition to the
second figure Kiderlin compares §33.
§78.
nihil enim est inane: perhaps ‘nihil enim est in eo inane’
(Becher), or nihil enim inest.
§79.
honesti studiosus. Becher’s proposal to alter the punctuation of
this passage is discussed in the note ad loc.—For
auditoriis and compararat, see on tenuia atque quae
§44, above.
§80.
quem tamen. Kiderlin, in Hermes (23, p. 168), raises a
difficulty here. Tamen shows that the clause cannot go with the
main statement (fateor), and its position forbids us to take it
with the quamquam is primum clause: it can only go with quod
ultimus est, &c., ‘though Demosthenes is ultimus fere,
&c., yet Cicero, &c.’ To prevent so awkward a joining of
the clauses, Kiderlin proposes to read eumque tamen: pointing out
that the quae of the MSS. (GH) may have arisen out of que,
and that Quintilian may have written eumque; cp. vi. 2. 13, where
Halm makes utque out of quae (G), and xi. 2. 32, where
Meister reads estque. The meaning will then be: Demetrius is
worthy of record as being about the last, &c., and yet Cicero gives
him the first place in the medium genus.—It seems better,
however, to give tamen a general reference: ‘yet, in spite of all
that can be said on the other side’ (e.g., inclinasse eloquentiam
dicitur). Cp. §99 quae tamen
sunt in hoc genere elegantissima.
201
§81.
prosam (prorsam) orationem et all MSS.; Halm,
Meister, Krüger (3rd ed.) omit et. I find that Becher
supports the view stated in the note ad loc.: he would however
write prorsam, which the best MSS. give also in Plin. v. 31,
112 D.
quodam Delphici videatur oraculo dei instinctus: so Frotscher,
followed by Krüger (3rd ed.). On the other hand Claussen (Quaest.
Quint., p. 356) and Wölfflin (followed now by Meister, pref. to ed.
of Book x., p. 13) propose to delete Delphici, of which
Becher also approves. But the MS. evidence cannot be disregarded. The
following are the various readings: GH quaedam Delphico videatur
oraculo de instrictus, and so FT, the former giving also (by a later
hand) de instinctus, the latter dei instructus. Bodl.
gives quodam delphico videatur oraculo dei instructus. The most
frequent reading is that of Prat. Put. 7231, 7696 Harl. 2662, 4995,
4829, 11671, Ball. and most edd., quodam delphico videatur oraculo
instinctus: S agrees, but is reported to have delphico
after oraculo: Harl. 4950 and Burn. 244 have the same reading,
with institutus corr. to instinctus: Burn. 243 gives
instructus. Delphico was originally deleted by Caesar:
Phil xiii, p. 758. Halm read tamquam Delphico videatur oraculo
instinctus: but Quintilian would take no trouble to avoid the
repetition of quidam (cp. divina quadam, above).—For the
arrangement of words, Krüger (3rd ed.) compares §41 qui ne minima quidem alicuius
certe fiducia partis memoriam posteritatis speraverit.
§82.
quandam persuadendi deam. Nettleship (Journ. of Philol., xxix,
p. 22) conjectures Suadam [persuadendi deam],
comparing Brutus, §59, quoted ad loc. Persuadendi deam would thus
become a gloss on Suadam: but the expression in the text is quite
in Quintilian’s style.
§83.
eloquendi suavitate: eloquendi usus (or usu)
suav. GH and all codd. except Harl. 4950, and Dorv., both of
which give simply eloq. suav. Halm admitted into his text Geel’s
conj. for usus, ‘eloquendi vi ac suavitate,’ and this has
met with some acceptance (Iwan Müller and Becher). But the parallel from
Dion. Hal., Ἀρχ. κρ. 4
is hardly conclusive: τῆς τε περὶ ἑρμηνείαν
δεινότητος ... καὶ τοῦ ἡδέος. Hirt properly remarks that the
agreement between the two is not so great as to allow of correcting the
one by the other. Kiderlin conjectures eloquendi vi,
suavitate, perspicuitate.
tam est loquendi. See note ad loc. for Kiderlin’s conj.
tam manifestus est. Though Meister’s tam est eloquendi is
probably a misprint, it is found in some MSS.—Harl. 4950: Burn.
244.
§84.
sane non affectaverunt. Bodl. and Vall. (veru
subpunctuated in the latter: affectant Prat. Put. 7231 MS Ball.
Dorv. Harl. 2662, 4995, 4829, 11671: sene non adfectitacuerunt GH
Burn. 243: adfectarunt 7696: adfectitant Harl. 4950, and
so Burn. 244 (corrected from affectant).
§85.
haud dubie proximus. Halm inserted ei after dubie,
though it is not found in any MS.: Regius had suggested illi.
Kiderlin (Hermes 23, p. 170) points out that if propiores
alii in §88 is allowed
to stand without a dative, ei is not necessary here. He suggests,
however, illi before alii in §88: both passages must be dealt with
in the same way.—For haud (Vall.), GHS have aut: M
haut. Cp. on 3 §26.
§86.
ut illi ... cesserimus: cum illi GHFT Harl. 4995 Burn.
243: ut illi Prat. Put. 7231, 7696: and so S Harl. 4950 (with
caelesti atque divinae): ut ille M Harl. 2662. Kiderlin
(Hermes, p. 170) proposes to go back to the reading of the older
MSS. cum illi, and instead of cesserimus to read
cesserit, so as to make Vergil the subject throughout. Cum
cannot, he contends, be a copyist’s error, motived by ita; and it
is probable, therefore, that at first cesserit a was
inadvertently written for cesserit; then (in G or some older MS.)
cesserimus ita was made out of that, to correspond with
vincimur below: and then in the later MSS. cum was changed
to ut, because of ita. For the transition, with this
reading, from cesserit to the plural (vincimur, pensamus), he
202
compares §107, where, after
speaking of Demosthenes and Cicero, Quintilian passes to
vincimus.
§87.
sequentur MS Halm and Meister: sequenter G seq̅nt’
H: sequuntur Prat. Put. 7231, 7696.
φράσιν id est.
These words are omitted in the Pratensis, which is Étienne de Rouen’s
abridgement of the Beccensis, now lost. This is an additional
proof that φράσιν was
originally written in Greek: cp. on §42.
§88.
propiores H Prat. Put. Vall. Harl. 2662, 4495, 11671, Burn. 243.
Bodl., Halm: propriores GMS 7231, 7696, Harl. 4950, C, Burn. 244,
Dorv., Meister. In Cicero and Quintilian magis proprii would be
more usual for the latter.
§89.
etiam si sit. This conjecture of Spalding’s (for etiam sit
GH Bodl. &c.: etiam si M Harl. 4950 Dorv.: etiam sic
Prat. Put. S Harl. 2662) I have found in the Balliol codex. 7231
and 7696 give etiam si est. Cp. note on tenuia atque quae
§44, above.
ut est dictum. These words were bracketed as a gloss by Halm,
and are now omitted altogether by Krüger (3rd ed.): see however note
ad loc. Döderlein proposed to place them after poeta
melior, Fleckeisen after etiam si.
Serranum is Lange’s conjecture for ferrenum GHM:
farrenum 7231, 7696 Harl. 2662, 11671: Pharrenum Prat.
Put. Some MSS. (e.g. Vall. Harl. 4995, Burn. 243 and 244) give sed
eum, but it is obvious that the criticism of Severus stopped with
the word locum.
§90.
senectute maturuit ed. Col. 1527 and so 7231, 7696 (Fierville):
senectutem maturbit GH: senectute maturum Prat. Put. MS
Harl. 2662, 4995, 4950, Burn. 244, Dorv. and Ball.: senectus
maturavit Bodl., Burn. 243.
et, ut dicam. Halm’s sed instead of et has been
rejected by later critics. Cp. Claussen (Quaest. Quint., p. 357
note): sed ‘sententiam efficit ab hac operis parte alienam. Nam
cum oratori futuro exempla quaerantur oratoria virtus in quovis
scriptore laudi vertitur (§§46, 63, 65, 67, 74, &c.). Itaque
propter huius censurae consilium Quintilianus Lucani elocutionem
oratoriam laudat, sed ingenium poeticum una reprehendit.’
§91.
propius H Prat. Put. Burn. 243, Harl. 2662 and other codd.: Bodl.
Ball. Harl. 4950 proprius. Reisig conjectured propitius,
which also is apt; but in spite of industrius,
necessarius, cited in its support (cp. iv. 2. 27: vii. 1. 12), it
is too uncertain a form to be received into the text. Iwan Müller thinks
it would have to be magis propitiae. Halm gives promptius:
Wölfflin pronius: while Schöll now suggests propitiae
potius (cp. iv. pr. §5: 2 §27: vii. 1. 12).
§92.
feres G Prat. Put. 7231, 7696 S Harl. 2662, 4829, Dorv., Ball.,
Halm.: feras H, Harl. 4950, Burn. 243, Bodl. C and M, Meister and
Krüger (3rd ed.). Harl. 4995 has fere: from Vall. Becher reports
feras, ‘probably at first feres.’
elegea GH 7696, and so A2 BN Put. S at i. 8. 6.
§94.
abunde salis G Prat. Put. M and all my MSS. except H, Burn. 243,
Bodl. which have abundantia salis.
multum est tersior. The variety of MS. readings seems to point
to an et wrongly inserted after multum, perhaps from a
confusion with ‘multum et ver gloriae’ below. GH give multum et est
tersior: M Harl. 4950, Bodl. Ball. C Dorv. Burn. 243 and also Harl.
4829 multum etiam est t.: Prat. Put. 7231, 7696 S Harl. 2662,
11671 multum est tersior: while Harl. 4995 (and Vall.) has
multo et est tersior. Osann proposed multo eo est tersior:
Wölfflin multo est tersior: Halm and Meister print multum eo
est tersior. For multum, cp. multum ante xii. 6. 1: and see
Introd. p. li.
non labor GH Burn. 243 Bodl. and Meister: nisi labor
7231, 7696 S Harl. 2662, 4995, 4950, 4829, 11671, Burn. 244, Dorv. Ball.
C, and Halm. Prat. and Put. have mihi labor.
203
hodieque et qui: H, Prat., Put., 7231, 7696, Harl. 2662, 4829,
Bodl. Dorv.: hodie et qui Burn. 243: hodie quoque et qui
Vall. Harl. 4995, 4950: hodie quod et qui S.—Becher is
of opinion that the text will not bear the explanation given in the
note, and would read hodie quoque et qui: ‘es giebt auch heute
noch berühmte Satirendichter, die einst &c.’ Et qui he takes
with clari, not with hodie quoque, the et being
omitted in translation: clari (hodie quoque) qui (olim)
nominabuntur.
§95.
etiam prius. Founding on the classification given in Diomedes
(see note ad loc.), according to which the satura of
Pacuvius and Ennius preceded and was distinct from that of Lucilius,
Horace, and Persius, Claussen (Quaest. Quint., p. 337) thinks that
the true reading here may be Alterum illud et iam prius Ennio
temptatum saturae genus, &c. For the satura of Ennius, cp.
ix. 2. 36. Iwan Müller points out that Ennius is not mentioned below
(§97), beside Attius and Pacuvius, probably because neither in tragedy
nor in satire did Quintilian consider him to have produced anything
helpful for the formation of an oratorical style. Other unnecessary
conjectures are etiam posterius, Gesner: etiam proprium,
Spald.: etiam amplius, L. Müller: etiam verius,
Riese: alterum illud Lucilio prius sat. genus, Krüger (3rd
ed.).
sola: solum Prat. and Put.
collaturus quam eloquentiae. These words, omitted in GHS Bodl.
Burn. 243, occur in all my other codd.
§96.
sed aliis quibusdam interpositus: sc. carminibus, Christ. In H
the reading is quibusdam interpositus: so 7231, 7696 Bodl. and
Burn. 243: but M Harl. 4950, 4829 Burn. 244 Dorv. and Ball, give a
quibusdam interpositus: S cuiusdam: Prat. and Put. opus
interpositus. Osann conjectures sed quibusdam, and so Hild.
In the margin of Harl. 4995 is the variant aliquibus
interpositis.
In Hermes, vol. 23, p. 172, Kiderlin makes a fresh conjecture.
Recognising that something must have fallen out before quibusdam,
but dissatisfied with Osann’s sed and Christ’s sed aliis,
he proposes to read ut proprium opus, quibusdam aliis tamen
carminibus (or versibus) a quibusdam interpositus. The
eye of a copyist may easily, Kiderlin thinks, have wandered from the
first to the second quibusdam: cp. v. 10. 64, ut quaedam a
quibusdam utique non sunt, &c., and for quibusdam aliis xi. 3. 66,
et quibusdam aliis corporis signis.
intervenit, which is a conjecture of Osann, I have found
in Harl. 2662, 11671 Prat. Put. 7231, 7696.
lyricorum. Kiderlin thinks there may be something wrong in the
text here. The last sentence (sed eum longe, &c.) shows clearly that
Quintilian had a high opinion of the lyrists of his day: if Bassus was
legi dignus, they were even more so. Would he then have said ‘of
the Roman lyrists Horace is almost the only one worth reading’? Perhaps
we should read lyricorum priorum: after -ricorum,
priorum might easily fall out, and it gives a good antithesis to
viventium. Bassus (quem nuper vidimus) forms the transition: and
the next paragraph begins Tragoediae scriptores veterum,
&c.
§97.
clarissimi. This reading is stated by Halm to be ‘incerta
auctoritate,’ and is referred by Meister to the Aldine edition. It
occurs in Prat. 7231, 7696 Harl. 2662 (A.D. 1434) Vall. 4995, 4829, 11671, Dorv. and Ball.:
Put. gives clarissime: G has gravissima: HFTS
gravissimus, and so also Harl. 4950, Burn. 243, Bodl. and
C. Halm prints grandissimi: Ribbeck (Röm. Trag.
p. 337, 3) inclines to accept the sing. grandissimus,
M, of Pacuvius alone.
Kiderlin (in Hermes 23, p. 173) rejects all the above readings.
Gravissimus and gravissima are obviously due, he says, to
gravitate following: but the word before gravitate must
have begun with the same letter, and so clarissimi cannot stand,
especially as it is inappropriate to the context. For ceterum
shows that the sentence before it must have contained some slight
censure: some defect, or quality excluding others equally good, must
have been mentioned. He therefore conjectures grandes nimis, in
preference to
204
grandissimi, which in tragedy would hardly be a fault. Attius and
Pacuvius, Quintilian says, are ‘zu grossartig, sie kümmern sich zu wenig
um Zierlichkeit (Eleganz) und die letzte Feile (d.h. Sauberkeit im
Kleinen); doch daran ist mehr ihre Zeit schuld als sie selbst.’ He
evidently thinks more of the ‘Thyestes’ of Varius and Ovid’s Medea: cp.
Tac. Dial. 12. With this judgment Kiderlin compares §§66, 67 tragoedias primus in lucem
Aeschylus protulit, sublimis et gravis et grandiloquus saepe usque ad
vitium, sed rudis in plerisque et incompositus ... sed longe clarius
inlustraverunt hoc opus Sophocles atque Euripides, and is of opinion
that the parallelism cannot be mistaken. For the position of
nimis he compares ix. 4. 28 longae sunt nimis: v. 9. 14 longe
nimium: xii. 11. 9 magna nimium.
§98.
quem senes quidem parum tragicum. So Spalding, Bonnell, Halm,
Meister, and Krüger. Quidem occurs in no MS.: GH have
quem, M Vall., Harl. 4995, Burn. 244, Ball, omit it: Bodl. Burn.
243 and Dorv. show the corruption Pindarum. Becher would exclude
quidem, regarding quem in G as an instance of the tendency
of copyists inadvertently to repeat, after a particular word that by
which it has been immediately preceded, e.g. §68 quod ipsum quod (G): ix. 4. 57 ut
cum ut (G): iv. 1. 7 ipsis litigatoribus ipsis (b): iv. 2. 5 aut ante
aut (bT): x. i. 4 iam opere iam (G).—But here the authority of the
Pratensis and its cognates may be invoked. In the archetype from which
they are derived something must have stood before parum, as Prat.
Put. 7696, 7231 all give quem senes non parum tragicum: so Harl.,
2662 (A.D. 1434), and 11671. Above in
§96, G Prat. Put. 7231, 7696
have si quidem for si quem.
§100.
linguae suae. So Köhler (v. Meister pref. to Book x. p. 13):
suae supplies an antithesis to ‘sermo ipse Romanus’: GH give
linguae quae: so Harl. 4950: S Burn. 243, Bodl. linguae:
while Harl. 2662, 4995, 4829, 11671, Dorv. and Ball. omit it altogether:
M has ligweque.
§101.
Titum: GH Prat. Put. M. 7231, 7696.
commendavit: Halm and Meister give commodavit, which is
approved also by Hirt. Halm compares §69 where Menander is said to be
‘omnibus rebus personis adfectibus accommodatus.’ But this would require
the meaning ‘appropriately treated,’ and there is no instance in
Quintilian of the verb used absolutely in this sense. Nor is there any
example to support Hild’s interpretation praestitit, which would
be moreover extremely weak. The recurrence of the word so soon after
accommodata tells against Halm’s reading, though Quintilian is
negligent on this head.—On the other hand, in vi. 3. 14 the
reading ‘ad hanc consuetudinem commodata’ is rightly accepted against
‘commendata’ most edd.
§102.
immortalem GS Meister: illam immortalem Prat. Put. M Halm:
immortalem illam Vall.
velocitatem. So all MSS, except S, Burn. 243, and Bodl., which
have civilitatem. Kiderlin (in Hermes 23, p. 174) thinks
that we might have expected ideoque immortalem gloriam quam
velocitate Sallustius consecutus est: ‘und darum hat er die
velocitas durch (von der velocitas) verschiedene Vorzüge
erreicht.’ Consequi cannot mean ‘to supply the place of’: and
immortalis is inappropriate as an attribute of velocitas:
besides, Quintilian has not spoken of Sallust’s velocitas, even
indirectly. Schlenger conjectured claritatem: Andresen
auctoritatem (‘klassisches Ansehen,’ cp. iv. 2. 125: xii.
11. 3): Kiderlin now proposes divinitatem, which in Cicero =
Vortrefflichkeit, Meisterschaft: cp. xi. 2. 7. Judged by the previous
sentences the expression is not too strong. For immortalem
divinitatem cp. §86 illi
... caelesti atque immortali: and for consecutus est iii. 7. 9
quod immortalitatem virtute sint consecuti.
clarus vi ingenii. This is a conjecture of Kiderlin’s, which I
find has been adopted also by Krüger (3rd ed.). GHFT give clarius
ingenii: Prat. Put. clari ingenii vir: 7231, 7696 clari
vir ingenii: MS Harl. 4995, 4950, 4829, Burn. 243 and 244, Dorv.
205
C and Ball, clarus ingenio; Harl. 2662 and 11671 clarus
(?) or claret vir ingenii. Spalding had already pointed out that
clarus is not found with ingenium, except where
ingenium is used of a person: e.g. §119 erant clara et nuper ingenia: he
therefore wrote elati vir ingenii (following Goth. elatus
ingenio and Bodl. elatus ingeniis). Kiderlin compares §70 sententiis clarissimus, and for
vis ingenii i. pr. 12: ii. 5. 23: x. 1. 44: xii. 10. 10. The
reading clarus vi ingenii points the contrast to what follows in
‘sed minus pressus,’ &c.: it was his style that did not
altogether suit the dignity of history.
§103.
genere ipso, probabilis in omnibus, sed in quibusdam. Till
Kiderlin made this happy conjecture (see Hermes 23, p. 175)
genere had always been joined with probabilis, and the
text was twisted in various directions. GHS, Burn. 243, Bodl. give in
omnibus quibusdam: M Harl. 2662, 4995, 4950, Burn. 244, Dorv. in
omnibus sed in quibusdam, and so apparently Prat. Put. 7231, 7696.
Out of omnibus Halm gives on Roth’s suggestion, operibus:
afterwards he decided for partibus, and this (though
omnibus to partibus is not an easy transition) is adopted
by Meister. Kiderlin’s punctuation makes everything easy: ‘Anerkennung
verdienen seine Leistungen alle, manche stehen hinter
seiner Kraft zurück.’ Even these last, Quint. means, are
probabiles (cp. viii. 3. 42 probabile Cicero id genus dicit quod
non plus minusve est quam decet); but they do not show the great powers
that distinguish his other writings. It is uncertain whether Quintilian
wrote in quibusdam or sed in quibusdam (M). The easiest
explanation of the omission in the other MSS. is to suppose that he
wrote in omnibus in quibusdam: perhaps the copyist of M saw that
omnibus and quibusdam were antithetical, and inserted
sed. Kiderlin notes Quintilian’s liking for chiasmus, without any
conjunction: cp. §106 in
illo, in hoc (where in hoc is wanting in M).
suis ipse viribus: ed. Col. 1527 (Halm), and so (Fierville)
7231, 7696. In Harl. 2662 and 11671 (A.D. 1434 and 1467) suis already appears,
corrected from vis GH. The Juntine ed. (1515) has suis viribus
minor: so Prat. and Put.
§104.
et exornat. Vall. and (apparently) Prat. Put. 7231, 7696, and
most edd.: et ornat M Halm, Meister, Krüger: exornat GHS.
Becher remarks that et exornat might easily pass into
exornat.
nominabitur: Weber and Osann proposed nominabatur
(which appears in Harl. 2662, but corrected to -itur). Krüger at
first accepted this in support of his theory that the whole passage
refers to Cremutius, who ‘in former days (olim), while his works were
under a ban, was only named (i.e. was a mere name, but now is known and
appreciated).’ The parallel passage (§94) is sufficient to dispose of
any such interpretation: sunt clari hodieque et qui olim
nominabuntur.
Cremuti. Nipperdey, Philol. vi, p. 193, Halm, and
Meister: remuti H Prat. Put. 7231, 7696 remremuti G,
rem utili Burn. 243: remitti S. Bodl.: nec imitatores
uti Harl. 2662, 4995, 4950, 4829, 11671. A review of the
various explanations of the whole passage (Superest—quae manent)
will be found in Holub’s Programm ‘Warum hielt sich Tacitus von 89-96 n.
Chr. nicht in Rom auf?’—Weidenau, 1883: but his conjecture
remoti (i.e. relegati) for remuti is not to be thought
of.
dividendi: first in the Aldine edition: all MSS. have
videndi, except M (indicendi) and Prat. Put. Harl. 4995
(vivendi). Cp. i. 10. 49, where the case is the same.
§105.
In the Aurich Programm, Becher gives a more recent statement of his
views: ‘wie zu cum causale, so tritt praesertim auch zu
cum concessivum, in diesem Falle wiedenzugeben mit, “was um so
auffallender ist, als.” Der Sinn ist also: “Ich weiss sehr wohl, welchen
Sturm des Unwillens ich gegen mich errege, und dies (dieser Sturm) ist
um so auffallender, als ich jetzt gar nicht die Absicht hege, meine (in
Potentialis gesprochene) Behauptung (fortiter opposuerim) wahr zu
machen, resp. comparando durchzuführen. Ich lasse ja dem Demosthenes
seinen Ruhm—in primis legendum vel ediscendum potius.”’
206
§106.
praeparandi. For Kiderlin’s conj. praeparandi,
narrandi, probandi see ad loc.
[omnia] denique, GH, Burn. 243, Bodl. omit omnia
(which is in all my other MSS.), and Meister now approves (following
Spalding, Osann, and Wölfflin), on the ground that Demosthenes and
Cicero were not alike in everything that belongs to
inventio. Halm thinks that omnia is to be found in
racioni of the older MSS.: but Kiderlin points out that this
error may have arisen from the carelessness of a copyist who, after
thrice writing the termination i, gave it also to the fourth
word.
illi—huic Prat. M, S Vall. Harl. 4995, 2662 Bodl.
&c.: illic—hic GH Put. 7231, 7696, Halm.
§107.
vincimus, H, G2, and most MSS.: (cp. §86): vicimus G.
§109.
ubertate Harl. 4995. This is also the reading of codd. Vall. and
Goth.: all the
other MSS. give ubertas.
totas virtutes Bn Bg N Prat. Ioan. 7231, 7696: totas
vires M b.
§112.
ab hominibus Halm and Meister: ab omnibus Bn Bg HFT Ioan.
Prat. 7231, Sal. and most codd.: hominibus S Harl. 4995 Bodl.
§115.
urbanitas. Kiderlin proposes to read et praecipua in accusando
asperitas et multa urbanitas: cp. §117: §64: 2 §25: ii. 5. 8.
Ciceroni, for Ciceronem of the MSS. In the Rev. de
Phil. (Janv.-Mars, 1887) Bonnet quotes from the Montpellier MS. a note
of the sixteenth century deleting the name as a gloss (on
inveni). Certainly all codd. give Ciceronem, not
Ciceroni. Bonnet thinks that the insertion does not accord with
Quintilian’s habitual deference towards Cicero: ‘Quintilien se trouvant
dans le cas de contredire Cicéron ne le nomme pas.’—Becher reports
Ciceroni, a correction in the Vallensis.
castigata, B (i.e. Bn and Bg) Ioan. Prat. 7231, 7696 Harl.
2662, 4995, 11671: custodita H M b F T Alm. Harl. 4950, 4829,
Burn. 243, 244, Bodl. Dorv. and Ball. For gravis (bH M Vall. and
seemingly Prat.) B Sal. 7231, 7696 and Ioan. give brevis.
si quid adiecturus sibi non si quid detracturus fuit, Vall.
Harl. 4995. For the repetition, see on haud deerit 3 §26. Halm and Meister print
si quid adiecturus fuit—(sc. virtutibus suis, cp. §§116, 120)—the reading of B (i.e. Bn
and Bg), which is also that of Ioan. Prat. N 7231 Harl. 2662, 11671:
while M Harl. 4950, 4829, Burn. 244 have si quid adiecturus fuit, non
si quid detracturus. The reading of H is si quid adiecturus sibi
non si quid detracturus [Sulpicius insignus] fuit ut
servius sulpicius insignem &c.: so also T, Burn. 243, Bodl. The
brackets in H are by a later hand, indicating a gloss which arose from a
mistake made by the copyist of H. In Bg the passage
stands:—
|
sibi |
non si |
quid |
detracturus |
si quid adiecturus: |
fuit |
et |
servius |
sulpicius |
The words added above the line are by the hand known as b.
In copying H wrote: si quid adiecturus sibi non si quid
detracturus (then omitting fuit continues) et Serv.
Sulp. (then goes back and resumes) fuit et servius &c.
This is the origin of the confusion which exists in all the MSS. of this
family.
§117.
et fervor. This is Bursian’s conjecture, adopted by Halm and
Krüger (3rd ed.), and now approved by Becher. BM have et sermo,
which is also the reading of N Prat. Sal. 7231, 7696 Ioan. Harl. 2662,
4950 and Ball.: Hb et summo: Harl. 4829, 11671, Burn. 244 et
smo: while Bodl., Dorv., and Burn. 243 give the correction in T
eius summa, out of which the second hand in the Vallensis
(Laurentius Valla) made et vis summa, a reading which occurs also
in Harl. 4995. Meister reads et sermo purus; while Kiderlin
proposes et simplex sermo (cp. iv. 1. 54: viii. 3. 87: ix. 3. 3:
4. 17: viii. pr. 23: x. 2. 16).
ut amari sales. Francius conjectured ut amantur sales,
but this loses the antithesis between amari and amaritudo
ipsa. Kiderlin’s ut amantur amari sales (viii. 3.
207
87: vi. 1. 48) is an improvement; but if ridicula is taken in a
good sense it seems impossible that after censuring Cassius for giving
way unduly to stomachus, Quintilian should go on to say,
‘moreover, though bitter wit gives pleasure, bitterness by itself is
often laughable.’ Is it possible that we ought to read ut amari sales
risum movent ita amaritudo ipsa ridicula est? Such an antithesis
might have been written ‘per compendium,’ and the words risum
movent may then have dropped out. See the note ad loc.: and
cp. especially vi. 1. 48 fecit enim risum sed ridiculus fuit, and
οὐ
γέλωτα κινεῖ μᾶλλον ἢ καταγελᾶται, quoted in the note on 1 §107.—Krüger (3rd
ed.) adopts frequentior for frequenter, which gives a good
sense, except that freq. amar ipsa is awkward.
§121.
lene Halm and Meister: leve B Prat. N 7231 M 7696 C.
Here again Becher prefers leve, comparing Cic. de Orat. iii.
§171, quoted on §44 above:
levitasque verborum 1. 52: and levia ... ac nitida, v. 12. 18.
§123.
scripserint. So Bn Bg H Ioan. Prat. 7231, 7696 Vall. Harl. 4995,
2662, 11671, Bodl., Dorv., Spalding, and Bonnell. Becher compares among
other passages 2 §14
(concupierint), and points out that Quintilian is not thinking of
individual writers on philosophy, but of the class, as opposed to the
class of orators, historians, &c.—Halm, Meister, and Krüger
have supersunt (Put. M, Ball. Burn. 243 Harl. 4950).
§124.
Plautus, Prat. N, 7231 Ioan. Harl. 2662, 4829, 11671:
plantus M Harl. 4950: Plantatus Sal.: plaustus Hb:
Plancus edd. vett. and Harl. 4995.
Catius. The name is rightly given in Harl. 4995.
§126.
iis quibus illi. Iis is the conjecture of Regius, followed
by Halm, Meister, and Krüger. Becher would retain in quibus
illi,—the reading of BN Prat. Ioan. Vall. M Harl. 4995, 2662,
4950, 11671, Burn. 244 Dorv. Ball. The difficulty of construing probably
led to the omission of in in bH Bodl. Burn. 243, 7231, 7696,
Spalding and Bonnell.
ab illo B Ioan. 7231, 7696 Sal. Harl. 2662, 4950, 4829: ab
eo bHM Burn. 243.
§127.
foret enim optandum: fore enim aliquid optandum bHFT.
Spalding conjectured alioqui optandum, which Kiderlin
approves.
ac saltem all MSS.: Meister has aut saltem, probably
relying on a wrong account of the Bambergensis: see Halm vol. ii,
p. 369.
illi viro B: illi virus bHM: illi virtutibus
Halm: illi viro eos (or viro plurimos) Kiderlin.
§128.
multa rerum cognitio: so all codd. except Ioannensis and Harl.
4995, which have multarum rerum cognitio. b omits cognitio
and is followed by HFT.
§130.
si obliqua contempsisset, si parum recta non concupisset.
I adopt the reading recently proposed for this vexed passage by Ed.
Wölfflin in Hermes, vol. xxv (1890), pp. 326-7, though it is right
to note that he was partly (as will be seen below) anticipated by
Kiderlin. Obliqua seems thoroughly appropriate in reference to
Seneca’s unnatural, stilted, affected style,—‘jene unnatürliche,
durch unmässigen Gebrauch von Tropen und Figuren auf Schrauben gestellte
Ausdrucksweise, welche statt der Klarheit ein Schillern zur Folge hat.’
Wölfflin compares ix. 2. 78 rectum genus adprobari nisi maximis
viribus non potest: haec diverticula et anfractus suffugia sunt
infirmitatis, ut qui cursu parum valent flexu eludunt, cum haec quae
adfectatur ratio sententiarum non procul a ratione iocandi abhorreat.
Adiuvat etiam, quod auditor gaudet intellegere et favet ingenio suo et
alio dicente se laudat. Itaque non solum si persona obstaret rectae
orationi (quo in genere saepius modo quam figuris opus est)
decurrebant ad schemata ... ut si pater ... iacularetur in uxorem
obliquis sententiis. This passage supplies (what is indeed
suggested by obliqua itself) the antithesis parum recta:
cp. ii. 13. 10 si quis ut parum rectum improbet opus.
208
In the Jahrbücher f. Philologie (vol. 135, 1887: p. 828)
Kiderlin had previously dealt with the passage on similar lines. The
traditional reading si aliqua contempsisset (b) he considers too
indefinite, though not impossible: in point of authority, though
preferable to the si nil aequalium cont. of the later MSS., it
cannot rank so high as the reading of Bn and Bg, which give simile
quam without any attempt at emendation. This Kiderlin thinks must be
nearest the original: he therefore rejects such conjectures as Jeep’s
si antiqua non, on the ground that it is improbable that
simile quam arose out of antiqua. He introduces his own
conjecture by referring to ix. 2. 66 and 78 (see above), and to the
contrast between schemata and rectum genus, recta
oratio; the former are called lumina or lumina
orationis (xii. 10. 62). Cp. viii. 5. 34. He would read: nam si
mille ille schemata (or illas figuras) similiaque lumina
contempsisset, si parum rectum genus (or sermonem) non
concupisset, &c. Similiaque occurs ix. 4. 43:
mille (for sescenti) is used v. 14. 32: for
contempsisset cp. ix. 4. 113. Si mille illa and
similiaque may easily have run together, when schemata (or
figuras) would fall out: quam in the older MSS. may
represent que lumina, which again reappears in the qualium
of the later codd. (si nil aequalium). As an alternative for
parum rectum genns (or sermonem) Kiderlin suggests
Wölfflin’s reading parum recta: and compares ix. 2: ii. 5. 11: v.
13. 2: ix. 1. 3; 3. 3: x. 1. 44; 89: ii. 13. 10.
Of the MSS. Prat. 7231 Sal. 7696 N Ioan. Harl. 2662 and 11671 agree
with Bn and Bg in giving simile quam: b has si aliqua:
HFT, Burn 243, Bodl. aliqua: M Harl. 4995, 4950, 4829, Burn. 244,
Dorv. C si nil aequalium. Among previous conjectures are si
multa aequalium, Törnebladh: si ille quaedam, Halm (where
ille is surely superfluous): si antiqua non, Jeep. Meister
accepts the reading si aliqua non: Becher thinks that si nil
aequalium may be right.
It is generally admitted that a word must have fallen out after
parum: the codd. all give si parum non concupisset. Jeep
proposed si pravum (= corruptum: cp. ii. 5. 10)
non conc.: on which Halm, comparing omnia sua, remarks,
‘debebat saltem prava.’ But prava seems too strong a word
for Quintilian to have used in a criticism where he is so studiously
mixing praise and censure. Halm suggested si parum sana, and is
followed by Meister: cp. Fronto’s ‘febriculosa’ of Seneca, p. 155
n. Sarpe proposed si prava or parva or
plura: Buttmann si parum concupiscenda (or
convenientia): Herzog si parvum: Madvig si partim
or partem (i.e. paulo plus quam aliqua, and in opp. to
omnia sua, below): Hoffmann si opiparum: Seyffert si
garum: Kraffert si non parum excussisset (cp. §101, §126: v. 7. 6; 7. 37; 13. 19: xii. 8.
13, &c.): Gustaffson si parva (cp. i. 6. 20 frivolae in
parvis iactantiae): Andresen si similem ei quem contempsit se
esse (sc. concupisset; cp. Tac. Ann. xiii. 56: xii. 64: Hist.
i. 8: Livy xlv. 20. 9) si parem non concupisset (i.e. si
Ciceronianum genus dicendi imitari quam diverso genere gloriam eius
aemulari maluisset): or, nam si similem ei quem contempsit se
esse, non parem concupisset: Krüger (3rd ed.) si parum arguta: Hertz (who
argues that the word which has fallen out must, with parum,
correspond to corrupta above) si parum pura.
utrimque Meister and Becher, following old edd., Spalding, and
Bonnell: utrumque B N 7231, 7696: virumque M:
utcumque Halm, ‘in every way,’ ‘one way or
another,’—proposed by Gesner at 6 §7.
209
§2.
atque omnis. Kiderlin (Blätter f. d. bayer. Gymn. 1887,
p. 454) proposes to put commas at sequi and velimus,
and make this clause also subordinate.
§3.
aut similes aut dissimiles. Andresen suggests aut similes aut
non dissimiles or aut similes aut certe haud dissimiles.
§6.
tradiderunt (BNM Harl. 2662, 4995, 4829, Burn. 243, and Dorv.) is
powerfully supported by Becher in his latest tractate (Programm des
königlichen Gymnasiums zu Aurich, p. 13) against
tradiderint, the reading of b Prat. Bodl. and Vall. (corrected in
the last from tradiderunt), Burmann, Spalding, Bonnell, Halm,
Meister, and Krüger. Becher holds that in Quintilian, as frequently in
Cicero, cum with the indicative is often used in such a way
(quoting from C. F. W. Müller) ‘ut non prorsus idem sit, sed
simillimum ei, quod barbare dicere solemus identitatis. Nam ut “cum
tacent clamant” non est “si tacent,” multo minus “quo tempore” aut
“propterea quod” aut “quamquam,”—sed “tacent idque idem est ac si
clament,” sic “cum hoc facis qui potes facere illud?” et sim., German,
item “wenn du dies thust” valet: “hoc facis ex eoque per se
efficitur, non ratione, sed ipsa natura, ut illud non possis facere.” Ut
pro Q. Roscio 3. 9 quam ob rem, cum cetera nomina in ordinem
referebas, hoc nomen in adversariis relinquebas? non significat nec
“quamquam” nec “quando,” sed “wenn.”’ Becher adds the following
parallel passages: Cic. pro Cluent. 47. 131 id ipsum quantae
divinationis est scire innocentem fuisse reum, cum iudices sibi
dixerunt non liquere, and Verg. Ecl. 3. 16 quid domini facient,
audent cum talia fures? (Cp. Madvig de Fin. p. 25.) In the same way
he treats cum ... sunt consecuti 7 §19 below, which seems,
however, to be somewhat different. Here there is an antithesis, and in
such cases cum (‘whereas’) may very well take the indicative:
there the clause ‘cum sint consecuti’ is added to show the
reasonableness (cum = ‘since’) of the demand that extemporary
facility shall be made fully equal to cogitatio—see ad
loc. Neither instance can be explained on the analogy of cum
with the indic. used of ‘identity’ (as ‘cum tacent, clamant,’ quoted
above): in such cases the subject is generally the same in both clauses.
And in such a passage as pro Cluent. §131 cum is usually
explained as = quo tamen tempore.
eruendas M Harl. 4995: all other codd. erudiendas.
mensuris ac lineis. Krüger (3rd ed.) quotes with approval the
conjecture of Friedländer (Darst. aus der Sittengesch. Roms iii. 4.
p. 194. 4) eisdem mensuris ac lineis, and recommends
the insertion of eisdem in the text,—after lineis,
where it is more likely to have fallen out. But this is unnecessary.
§7.
turpe etiam illud est. Hild puts a comma after sciant, and
by supplying before turpe est an ita to correspond with
quemadmodum, makes out a comparison of which quemadmodum,
&c., is the first clause and turpe etiam illud est the
second. This is certainly to misunderstand the passage. The
quemadmodum clause goes with what is before, not with what
follows, so that a comma after alieni would be enough, were it
not for the necessity of having the mark of interrogation (cp. §9 below). Then turpe etiam illud
est comes in, resuming pigri est ingenii in §4, just as immediately afterwards
rursus quid erat futurum §7 resumes quid enim futurum
erat §4. The whole
passage is an elaboration of the dictum with which §4 opens, ‘imitatio per se ipsa non
sufficit.’ Quintilian first says that we, as well as those who have gone
before us, may make discoveries (cur igitur nefas est reperiri aliquid a
nobis quod ante non fuerit?). Surely we are not to confine ourselves to hard and
fast lines like servile copyists.
210
Then he goes on to add in §7 that we must surpass our models
(plus efficere eo quem sequimur), instead of resting content with mere
reproduction (id consequi quod imitamur): otherwise Livius Andronicus
would still be the prince of poets, we should still be sailing on rafts,
and painting would still be nothing more than the tracing of outlines.
The necessity for progress is first shown (§§4-6) by an appeal to the
example of the past, and by the unfruitful work of such painters as are
mere copyists: then in §7
poetry, history, navigation, as well as painting are put in evidence for
the argument ex contrario.
§8.
mansit, Meister: sit codd.: est Fleckeisen (and
Halm): fuit Gensler.
§9.
adpetent Bg HFT: appetent Prat. Ioan. Harl. 4995 Bodl.
&c.: appetunt N Harl. 2662, 11671, Burn. 243.
hoc agit Halm, followed by Meister (cp. 7 §4): hoc ait b H,
om. Bn Bg N Ioan. Prat. Harl. 2662, 11671: agit (sine
hoc) Harl. 4995, 4950 M, and most codd.
§10.
quaeque pares maxime may be a gloss: it is found only in those
MSS. which give simplicissimae for simillimae: b H Harl.
4950 M Burn. 243 Bodl.
utique (b M Vall. Harl. 4995, 4950, Burn. 243 Bodl. Dorv.) may
also be suspected: it does not occur in Bn Bg N Ioan. Prat. Harl. 2662,
4829, 11671.
§11.
orationibus, Bg: Ioan, gives oratione: so also Voss. 1 and
3 (Zumpt).
accommodatur b H Ioan. Harl. 4995, 4950, 4829, Bodl. Dorv. and
Meister: commodatur Bn N Prat. Harl. 2662, 11671, and Halm.
§12.
inventio vis B Harl. 2662, 11671: inventionis b H Harl.
4495, 4950, 4829, C, Burn. 243, Bodl., Dorv.
§13.
cum et, ed. Colon. 1527: et cum B H Ioan. Prat. N (et
quum) M: cum Vall. Harl. 4995. On the usual interpretation of
this difficult passage ut quorum ... collocata sunt forms one
parenthesis: but this is an unnecessary extension of the explanation of
intercidant invalescantque temporibus. See ad loc.
accommodata sit, codd. except Harl. 4995, which omits
sit: acc. est Halm, followed by Hild (depending on
prout, not cum: see note ad loc.). Madvig’s
conjecture accommodanda sit is approved by Kiderlin (cp. ix. 4.
126 adeoque rebus accommodanda compositio). But the correctness of the
reading in the text (and also of the explanation given in the note ad
loc.) will be evident to any one who considers the whole sentence
carefully. To cum et verba intercidant corresponds exactly the
double clause et compositio ... rebus accommodata sit on the one
hand, and et compositio ... ipsa varietate gratissima (sc.
sit—repeated from accommodata sit) on the other.
This double clause is rather awkwardly joined by cum ... tum. To
take accommodata sit as depending on the cum which follows
compositio is to destroy the balance of the sentence. In this
case an independent sit would have to be supplied with
gratissima (to make et compositio ... gratissima sit
correspond to et verba intercidant above): and the translation
would then be: ‘it is just when (cum ... tum), or exactly in
proportion as, it is adapted to the sense (rebus accommodata)
that the very variety (thereby secured) gives the arrangement its
greatest charm.’ But if this had been Quintilian’s meaning he would
surely have written cum rebus accommodatur (or—ata
est) tum ipsa varietate sit gratissima.
§14.
quos imitemur. The D’Orville MS. gives quos eligamus ad
imitandum,—probably an emendation by the copyist, though it
may explain the origin of the reading of b and H quos at
imitandum.
quid sit ad quod nos. The ad is due to Regius: most
codd. have quid sit quod nos, except Harl. 4995, which is again
in agreement with Goth. Vall. Voss. 2 and the second hand in Par. 2:
quid sit quod nobis.
§15.
et a doctis, inter ipsos etiam. The explanation given in the
notes is due to Andresen (Rhein. Mus. 30, p. 521), who, however,
wished to insert et before inter
211
ipsos. The comma makes that unnecessary. So Kiderlin (Berl.
Jahrb. XIV, 1888, p. 71 sq.).
dicunt, Harl. 4995: dicant all codd.: ‘emend. Badius’
(Halm).
ut sic dixerim Vall. (Becher): cp. pr. 23: i. 6. 1: ii. 13. 9:
v. 13. 2. BM Prat. have ut dixerim. Halm wrote ut ita
dixerim, comparing i. 12. 2: ix. 4. 61: but ut sic is more
common in the Latinity of the Silver Age.
§16.
compositis exultantes. Kiderlin (Berl. Jahrb. XIV, 1888,
p. 72) would prefer compositis rigidi (cp. xi. 3. 32: xii.
10. 7: ix. 3. 101: xii. 10. 33), comptis (cp. i. 79: viii. 3. 42)
exultantes = ‘statt wohlgeordnet steif, statt schmuckliebend
putzsüchtig.’ Another unnecessary emendation is laetis exultantes,
compositis corrupti (Lindau): or compositis exiles
(Düntzner).
§17.
quidlibet, most codd.: quamlibet M, Vall. Harl. 4995,
4950: qui licet bH. Iwan Müller (Bursian’s Jahresb. 1879,
p. 162) condemns illud, and would read either quamlibet
frigidum (cp. 3 §19 and ix. 2. 67: quamlibet
apertum), or quidlibet frigidum, which latter is approved by
P. Hirt. Eussner suggests the deletion of illud frigidum et
inane, thinking that these words may be the remains of a gloss on §16.
Attici sunt scilicet. Spalding’s reading seems on the whole to
be preferred. The retention of sunt (represented in some MSS. by
a simple s,—hence the reading Atticis scilicet)
makes it less necessary to follow Meister in inserting a sunt
after qui praec. concl. obscuri: in so loose a writer as
Quintilian the first sunt would do duty for both. Halm follows Bn
and Bg, which apparently (as also N Harl. 2662, 4829, and 11671) have
Attici scilicet: Meister (with bHM and Harl. 4950) gives
Atticis scilicet. In the Ioannensis I find Attici s (for
sunt): Dorv. and Burn. 244 give Atticis s. Scilicet (om.
Prat.) may be a gloss, and the true reading may be Attici sunt.
Some codd. (Bodl. Burn. 243) give Atticos scilicet
(Athicos Harl. 4995): qy. Atticorum similes? (cp. Cic.
Brut. §287).—Becher now prefers Atticis (sc. se pares
credunt).
§22.
proposito. This conjecture by Gertz (Opuscula philol. &c.,
p. 134) I have found in the Ioannensis (*ppo) and in Harl.
2662 and 11671. It is approved also by Kiderlin. BNHb Prat. Sal. give
propositio: all other codd. proposita. Perhaps we should
read (with Ioan.) sua cuique proposito est lex, suus decor est.
Prat. omits the second est.
§23.
tenuitas aut iucunditas, Halm and Meister: tenuitas ac
iucunditas b H, Burn. 243, Bodl.: tenuitas aut nuditas N
Ioan. M Harl. 2662, 11671: tenuitas ac nuditas Prat. Harl. 4995,
4950, 4829, C, Burn. 244, Dorv.: aut iuditas Bg.
§25.
quid ergo? non est satis, &c. Gertz proposes to read, shortly
afterwards, mihi quidem satis esset; set si omnia consequi possem,
quid tamen noceret vim Caesaris ... adsumere? (= sed etiam
si satis mihi esset, tamen nihil noceret vim Caesaris ... adsumere, si
omnia haec consequi possem).
§28.
deerunt, Francius: deerant (derant) all codd. Becher
defends deerant: ‘der Rhetor meint dass qui propria bona
adiecerit öfter Veranlassung gehabt haben wird, Fehlendes zu
ergänzen als zu beschneiden si quid redundabit.’
oporteat bHFT Bodl. M Harl. 4950 Burn. 243: oportebat B
Prat. N Sal. Ioan. Harl. 2662, 4995, 4829, 11671 Burn. 244 Dorv. The
latter (which is adopted by Halm) would indicate (cp. viii. 4. 22) a
condition which ought to have been and may still be realised: the former
(adopted by Meister and approved by Becher) is the conjunctive
potential, and is quite in Quintilian’s manner (cp. xi. 2. 20): it
conveys the expression of a present duty and obligation, the realisation
of which may now be expected, and it connects also more intimately with
erit in the following sentence.
212
§1.
nobis ipsis, codd.: e nobis ipsis Gertz.
utilitatis etiam. Ioan. gives etiam utilitatis, which
Spalding quotes also from Goth.
§2.
alte refossa. This (the reading of N) I have found also
in Ioan. and Prat.: alter effossa BH: altius effossa Harl.
4995 M Harl. 4950, 4829 Burn. 244 Bodl. Dorv.: alte effossa Harl.
2662, 11671.
fecundior fit. Fit appears as a correction in T and
Vall.: it does not occur in B M Prat. H T Ioan. S Harl. 4995 or 2662.
Perhaps fecundior is the true reading, and est is to be
supplied in thought: Introd. p. lv.
effundit B Prat. Ioan. N and most codd.: effunditur
b H. et
fundit Vall.2 M, Harl. 4995, Halm and Meister.
parentis: parentium Ioan.: parentum Dorv. Harl.
4950 Burn. 244 C: parentibus bH Bodl.
§4.
iam hinc. Obrecht iam hunc: see note ad loc. Harl.
2662 and 11671 agree in iam hic.
§6.
scriptorum. This reading, attributed to Badius by Halm and
Meister, is found in Ioan. Harl. 4995 Burn. 243 Harl. 2662 (the last
corr. from -em). It is also in the editio princeps (Campanus),
and the ed. Andr. Becher reports it as a correction in Vall.
§9.
sequetur Bn and Bg N Sal. Dorv. Harl. 2662, 4950, 4829, 11671:
persequetur b Harl. 4995 Burn. 243: prosequetur HM Bodl.
and Prat. Prosequetur (Spald. and Bonnell) may be right: there is
a graphic touch about the compound.
§10.
ut provideamus obelized by Halm (after Bursian): but see note.
Becher proposed provideamus ut resistamus et ... coerceamus:
Krüger suggests rather resistamus et provideamus ut ...
coerceamus: Jeep, ut provide eamus, also, for efferentes
se, efferventes. The passage is discussed by Kiderlin
(Blätter f.d. bayer Gymn. 1888, p. 85), who recommends the excision
of et before efferentes, as it is found in no MS. He
translates: ‘Aber gerade dann, wenn wir uns jene Fähigkeit (schnell zu
schreiben) angeeignet haben (bei solchen, welche noch nicht schnell
schreiben können, fehlt es an Ruhepausen obnehin nicht), wollen wir
innehalten, um vorwärts zu blicken, die durchgehenden Rosse wollen wir
gleichsam mit den Zügeln zurückhalten.’ He considers ut
provideamus a necessary addition, in order to make the meaning of
resistamus clear. ‘Was jeder Besonnene beim Schreiben thut, dass
er manchmal innehält, um vorwärts zu blicken, d.h. um sich zu besinnen,
welche Gedanken nun am besten folgen und wie sie am besten ausgedrückt
werden, rät hier Quint. seinen Lesern.’ The best MSS. read resist. ut
provid. efferentes equos frenis: Hb Bodl. Burn. 243 give ut
for et: Harl. 4995 has resist. ut prohibeamus ferentes equos
fr. quib. coerc.: 4950 and Burn. 244 resist. ut prohibeamus
efferentes equos quos fr. quib. coerc. The reading et efferentes
se is due to Burmann. Something might be said for et ferentes
se: ‘ferre se’ is often used by Vergil of ‘moving with conscious
pride,’ e.g. Aen. i. 503: v. 372: viii. 198: ix. 597: xi. 779.
§12.
patruo. Harl. 2662 and 11671 both give patrono: which,
with other coincidences, establishes their relationship to the
Guelferbytanus (Spald.).
§14.
quod omni, see note ad loc.: edd. vett ex quo.
§15.
plura et celerius Prat. N: and so now Becher reports from B and
Ambrosianus ii. Et had escaped Halm’s notice, and Meister
follows, plura celerius.
213
sed quid: sed is supplied by the old edd., but does not
appear in any MS. Halm (ii. p. 369) conjectures at, which
may easily have slipped out after obveniat.
§17.
quae fuit: (manent) quae fudit Harl. 4995 (as also
Goth. Voss. 2 and Vall.)
§19.
urget. Kiderlin supports (in Blätter f. d. bayer. Gymn. 1888,
p. 86) his proposal to read urgetur, which would however
give a different antithesis. ‘When we write ourselves, our thoughts
outstrip our pen, but when we dictate we forget that the scribe is
writing under similar conditions, and give him too much to do.’
§20.
in intellegendo. This conj., which is due to H. J. Müller
and Iwan Müller, has been adopted by Becher and Meister: legendo
BM Ioan, and most codd. (Halm). See note ad loc. The true reading
may be si tardior in scribendo aut incertior, et in intellegendo
velut offensator fuit. This is supported by et diligendo (bH
Burn. 243 Bodl.), for which Spalding conjectured et delendo,
Gertz in tenendo (‘significatur notarium imperitum et oscitantem
verba quae dictantur non statim intellegere aut fideliter tenere, ut
saepius eadem dictanda sint’). A number of codd. (Ioan. Vall. Harl.
4995, 4950, 4829, Burn. 243 and 244, Dorv.) have inertior for
incertior: but this gives no antithesis to tardior: it
appears, however, in ed. Colon. 1527. The same codd. (and also M)
have fuerit, for fuit, which may be right.
concepta Regius: conceptae codd. Becher points out that
concipere and excutere are ‘termini technici’: cp. Scrib.
ep. ad C. Jul. Callist. p. 3 R ne praegnanti medicamentum quo
conceptum excutitur detur: and Ovid, excute virgineo conceptas pectore
flammas.
§21.
altiorem. This reading, ascribed by Halm and Meister to ed.
Colon. (1536) I have found in Harl. 2662 (A.D. 1434) and 11671 (A.D. 1467). B N Ioan, and other codd.
aptiorem: Prat. apertiorem, and so a later hand in
Vall.
frontem et latus interim obiurgare. B, Prat. M, Ioan., Harl.
2662, 4950, 4829, 11671, Burn. 244 and Dorv. all give simul et
interim: Harl. 4995 (again in agreement with the 2nd hand in Vall.)
and Burn. 243 have simul vertere latus et interim (the reading of
many old edd.): so Bodl. except that it omits et. It is to b that
we must apply for what must be at least a trace of the true reading; and
b gives sintieletus, which H shows as sintielatus.
Considering how liable s (ſ) and f are to be confused,
I venture to think that ſinti may conceal fronte.
Bursian’s femur et latus (Halm and Meister) is not so near the
MSS.: it is based on ii. 12. 10 and xi. 3. 123 (quoted ad loc.),
but the latter passage would warrant frontem quite as much as
femur, and frontem ferire seems to have been considered by
Quintilian a more extravagant action than femur ferire, of which
he says ‘et usitatum est et indignantes decet et excitat auditorem.’ In
any case the man who is in the agony of composition is as likely, if
alone, to ‘rap his forehead’ and ‘smite his chest,’ as to ‘slap his
thigh.’
Frotscher and Bonnell’s sinum et latus cannot be supported by
any parallel for such an expression as sinum caedere,
ferire, obiurgare. Becher approves Gertz’s conjecture
semet interim obiurgare, which is adopted also by Krüger (3rd
ed.) as = increpare: ‘obiurgat semet ipse scribens et convicium
sibi facit ut stulto, si quando tardior in inveniendo est.’
Another interesting conjecture is put forward by Kiderlin (Blätter f.
d. bayer. Gymn. 1888, p. 87). He proposes to read (on the lines
of b) singultire, latus int. ob. This would need to be taken
of those more or less inarticulate sounds which the solitary writer
addresses πρὸς ὃν
θυμόν, when there is no one there to listen. Kiderlin refers to
singultantium in 7 §20, of broken utterance: but
we cannot take the reference here of ‘sobs’ or ‘gasps’: the writer is
not practising with a view to theatrical effect, he is supposed to be
indulging in little peculiarities that become ridiculous in another’s
presence. As an alternative Kiderlin suggests singultu latus interim
obiurgare, comparing for the ablative §15 cogitationem murmure agitantes.
Singultus is common
214
enough: and Kiderlin thinks that as singultire is nearer the MSS.
than singultare, it may possibly have been used here by
Quintilian.
§22.
secretum in dictando. So bH Harl. 4995, 4950, Burn. 243, Bodl.,
M, Dorv.: quod dictando BN Prat. Ioan., Harl. 2662, 4829, 11671,
Burn. 244 (corr. to in). With the reading quod dictando perit,
atque liberum ... nemo dubitaverit (Halm and Meister) it is
senseless to quote 2 §20 (Bonn., Meister, and
Dosson) as parallel. Krüger (3rd ed.) reads secretum dictando perit.
Atque liberum arbitris, &c.
§23.
mihi certe iucundus. After these words H has videmoni (and
so the cod. Alm.): Flor. vindemoni. This word greatly puzzled
Spalding, and has been allowed to disappear from the critical editions
of Halm and Meister. Jeep transformed it into mihi certe vitae
inani iucundus, &c. An ingenious suggestion is made by Mr.
L. C. Purser (in the Classical Review, ii, p. 222 b). He
thinks that it may be “the gloss of a monk, on a somewhat ornate passage
about poetry, who recollected how (as Bacon says in his ‘Essay on
Truth’) one of the Fathers had in great severity called Poesie vinum
daemonum.” Cp. Advancement of Learning ii. 22. 13, where Mr. Wright
tells us that Augustine calls poetry vinum erroris ab ebriis doctoribus
propinatum, Confess. i. 16; and that Jerome, in one of his letters to
Damasus, says Daemonum cibus est carmina poetarum, while both these
quotations are combined in one passage by Cornelius Agrippa, de Incert.
&c. c. 4. Hence the phrase vinum daemonum may have been
compounded.—If the gloss is to be credited to the copyist of H (as
seems probable), it perhaps arose from something that caught his eye in
the Bambergensis four lines further down, where tendere ani(mum)
is shown in a form that could easily be mistaken by a sleepy scribe.
§24.
ramis, referred by Halm and Meister to ed. Camp., appears in
Harl. 4995: it is reported by Becher also from the Vallensis. All other
codd. rami.
voluptas ista videatur most codd.: videatur ista
voluptas N.
§25.
oculi. Kiderlin thinks it allowable to infer from the words ex
quo nulla exaudiri vox that aures aut has fallen out before
oculi. Cp. §28
nihil eorum quae oculis vel auribus incursant.
velut tectos: velut rectos all codd. There is the same
confusion at ix. 1. 20 where M has recteque for tecteque
(i.e. tectaeque). For Becher’s explanation of the vulgate tectos
(first in ed. Leid.) see ad loc. Kiderlin (Blätter f. d. bayer.
Gymn. 1888, p. 88) is not satisfied, and objects that for tectos
teneat we should have expected tegat. The figure also seems
to him out of place, as the context speaks not of the attack of an
enemy, but of the distractions which draw the mind of the student away
from his task: §23
avocent, respexit: §24 ad se trahunt: §25 aliud agere. He
proposes, therefore, velut recto itinere, comparing iv. 2. 104 ut
vi quadam videamur adfectus velut recto itinere depulsi, and ii. 3. 9 et
recto itinere lassi plerumque devertunt. Itinere may first have
fallen out, and then recto may have been changed to
rectos.—Halm conjectured velut secretos, or
coercitos; Wrobel, velut relictos.
§26.
haud deerit: aut deerit BN Ioan, and all codd. except a
later hand in Vall. Kiderlin (Blätter l.c.) comments on the infrequent
use of haud in Quintilian, though haud dubie 1 §85 (where however GH have
aut) must have escaped him (cp. i. 1. 4); and founding on
the consensus of the MSS. for aut he proposes to read aut non
deerit or aut certe non deerit. But haud goes closely
with deerit, and does not (like non, ac non)
introduce an antithesis to supererit. Aut deerit might be
made to mean that the sleepless man is to work: but this would be
too cruel!
§29.
et itinere deerremus: et ita ne BN Ioan. Harl. 2662, 4829,
11671, Dorv. and Ball.: ita erremus HMb Bodl. (erramus).
The reading in the text is given by Halm and Meister as from the old
editions: it occurs in Vall. and Harl. 4995.
§31.
crebra relatione appears in Harl. 4995 (and Vall.) corrected from
crebro relationi which is the reading of B Ioan. and all codd.
Jeep suggested crebra dilatione,
215
Kiderlin crebriore elatione. Other proposals are crebra
relictionis, q. i. c., repetitione, Gottfried Hermann (in
Frotscher), crebra relictione, q. i. c., et repetitione,
Zumpt (in Spald. v, p. 423). Becher thinks crebro may be
right, adverbs being often used in Latin where we should use adjectives:
crebro would then go closely with morantur and
frangunt.
§32.
adiciendo ‘for making additions’: so Bursian, Halm, and
Becher. BN Prat. Ioan, and most codd. have adicienda: b
adiciendi sint: Harl. adjiciendi sit. Meister adopts
adicienti from ed. Col. 1555: so Spalding: cp. iv. 5. 6 quo
cognoscenti iudicium conamur auferre (where B has
cognoscendi).
ultra modum esse ceras velim: Ioan, omits esse, and is
thus in agreement with N.
§3.
habet: habeat, Halm quoting from ed. Camp. Habeat
occurs in Burn. 243: most codd. have habet, but some (H and
Bodl.) give habent.
§1.
ἕξιν parantibus: for
the ex imparantibus of Bn N and Ioan. Bursian added non est
huius. So Halm. Harl. 4995 gives nec exuberantis id quidem est
operis ut explicemus.
factum est iam, Halm and Meister: est etiam all codd.
except Ioan, which has factum etiam.
iam robustorum: so all codd. except bHFT which omit
iam: and Harl. 4995, Burn. 244 which give iam
robustiorum.
§2.
id Messallae: B Ioan. M and most codd. Ball. and Dorv. however
give M. id Messalae: and Harl. 4995 Marco id Messalae. The
spelling Messallae is adopted in the text as more correct.
§4.
eadem: so most edd. and Spalding, followed by Mayor and Krüger
(3rd ed.): eandem all codd., with the single exception of M, and
so Halm and Meister, though without giving any indication of the
meaning. The only way to explain eandem seems to be to continue
the sentence in thought sc. quae non proprie, or quae apud poetas: cp.
eandem i. 9. 1. The sense will then be: ‘the poet’s inspiration has an
elevating influence, while his licences of style do not carry with
them in advance, or involve, the corresponding ability to use
the language of ordinary prose: something is left for the reproducer.’
This suggests that there may be something in the reading of B (also
Vall. and Harl. 4995), which have no non with praesumunt,
at least if we may read eadem: ‘poetical licence implies that the
orator can say the same things propriis verbis.’ Bursian
suggested nec (for et) verba ...
praesumunt.
§5.
post quod. Harl. 4995 again agrees with Goth. and Voss. 2,
praeter quod: so Vall.
§13.
reus sit. Krüger (3rd ed.) revives Halm’s conj. rectene reus
sit, to correspond with rectene occiderit and honestene
tradiderit in what follows: along with Gertz’s quaeramus, an
to correspond with veniat in iudicium an, Becher, however
(Philol. xiv, p. 724), has pointed out that if the object of such a
change is to secure complete symmetry, we should need to read,
‘Cornelius rectene codicem legerit’ quaeramus, an ‘liceatne magistratui
... recitare’: otherwise, in the other two cases the text ought to run,
‘Milo quod Clodium occidit’ veniat in iudicium, an..., and ‘Cato quod
216
Marciam tradidit Hortensio’ an. Qnintilian has avoided this excess of
parallelism without coming into conflict with logic.
Just as at iii. 5. 10 we have Milo Clodium occidit, iure occidit
insidiatorem: nonne hoc quaeritur, an sit ius insidiatorem occidendi?,
so here the finita or specialis causa shows the form of a
positive statement (Cornelius reus est), as frequently in Seneca.
Reus sit and legerit are motived only by the disjunctive
interrog.: it might have run ‘utrum dicamus, Cornelius reus est,’ or
only ‘Corn. quod legit ... reus est.’ The infinita quaestio, on
the other hand, appears as in the above example in the form of a
question, and this form the writer adheres to in the two following
finitae and infinitae quaestiones. The finita
quaestio rests on the generalis quaestio: acquittal of the
charge (here laesa maiestas) depends on the answer to violeturne,
&c. In a word, it is as if Quintilian had written (as at iii. 5. 10)
Cornelius quod codicem legit, reus est: nonne hoc quaeritur: violeturne,
&c.
§14.
dum adulescit profectus, B Harl. 2662, 4995, 4829, Burn. 244,
Ball.: inventus Hb Bodl. Burn. 243: Bonnell’s conj.
invenis appears in Dorv. Bursian and Jeep conj. dum adul.
profectui sunt util.
quia inventionem, Halm: quae inventionem all codd. Qy.
quod?
§16.
materia fuerit. Meister suggests erit: perhaps
rather fuerit—necesse erit.
§17.
assuescere Zumpt: assuefieri Philander. All MSS. have
assuefacere. Frotscher wrote inanibus se simulacris ...
assuefacere, and was followed by Halm. Most MSS. also (B Ioan.
Ball. Harl. 2662, 4995, 4829, 11671) give difficilis digressus:
but in view of the consensus for assuefacere the alternation
difficilius digressos (H Bodl. Dorv. Harl. 4950 Burn. 243)
is worth considering: inanibus simulacris would then go (though
awkwardly) with detineri (for the rhythm cp. x. 2. 1), and
the rest of the sentence makes excellent sense.
§18.
transferrentur N Dorv. Ball. Harl. 2662.
§20.
decretoriis Harl. 4995, probably from a correction in Vall.:
Voss. 2 and Goth. (Spald.) derectoriis BJ Ball. Dorv. Burn. 244:
detectoris b: delectoris H: delectoriis Bodl.:
de rhetoriis Harl. 2662, 4829, 11671: vel
rhetoricis M.
satis so most codd. But Bodl. Dorv. Burn. 243 litis: Hb
sitis.
§21.
idoneus bHM: si idoneus Bn Bg Sal.: sudoneus N:
is idoneus Halm.
§22.
sustinere Halm and Meister: sustineri Bn Bg HN Sal.
recidet occurs in Dorv., and is reported by Becher as a
correction in Vall.: all other codd. recidere.
§23.
diligenter effecta all codd. Regius proposed una diligenter
effecta, Badius una enim diligenter effecta, and so many edd.
Una would come in well before quam; but Becher rightly
holds that it is unnecessary, the opposition being not quantitative
alone, but qualitative as well. He reports una enim as a
correction in the Vallensis.
quidque. Fleckeisen proposed quicquid; see Madvig on de
Fin. v. §24.
§1.
vacui nec otium patitur. The reading in the text, which is quite
satisfactory, occurs in Harl. 4995, 4950, and Dorv. Bn and Bg give
vacuum otium pat., and are followed by N Ioan. Harl. 2662 and
11671. For otium patitur b (followed by HFT) gives the remarkable
reading experientium (experientiam Burn. 243, Bodl.),
which reminds one of the confusion at the opening of ch. v: may the true
reading perhaps be nec ἕξιν parantibus otium patitur? Jeep suggested
expetit otium: nec perire otium patitur has also been
suggested.
217
§2.
desit. After this word there is a considerable space left blank
in Bn and Bg, as well as in some later MSS., e.g. Harl. 2662 and 11671.
In Harl. 4995 there is no blank, but in the margin the words ‘hic
deficit antiquus codex.’
inhaeret ... quod laxatur: a later hand in Vall., Meister, and
Krüger. BMN give inhaeret ... quae laxatur, which appears in ed.
Camp. (and Halm) as inhaerent ... quae laxantur.
§4.
tandem Madvig, Emend. Liv. p. 61, tamen libri.
§5.
redire. I find this reading in Bg Ioan. C Harl. 2662, 4995, 4829,
and restore it to the text, in place of regredi (Halm and
Meister), which seems to have arisen out of redi HF, and occurs
in Harl. 4950, Burn. 243, 244, and Dorv.
§6.
domo Harl. 4995: domū B Ioan. MN Sal.
§7.
utrimque Bonnell and Meister. The codd. give utrumque.
Gesner (followed by Halm: cp. i. §131) proposed utcumque:
Spalding utique: Jeep si tutius utcumque quaerendum est
(cp. iv. 1. 21), founding on the reading of b strict
* * * (margine adcisa), which reappears in HFT
(strictius—strutius).
§1.
praemium quoddam Harl. 4995, probably following a correction in
the Vallensis: primus quid amplius Bn Bg Ioan. Sal. HFTM Harl.
2662, 4950. Amplissimum Stoer.
intrare portum Bn Bg H Ioan. N Sal. and most MSS. Halm adopts
Meiser’s conj. instar portus. On this reading the advocate who
has nothing but (solam) the scribendi facultas, and who
therefore is found wanting at a crisis, is compared to a harbour which
seems to promise a refuge to every ship at sea, but which really (owing
to rocks and sand-banks) can afford protection only when the sea is
calm, and so not praesentissimis quibusque periculis. Neither of
the two justifies the expectations formed. But it must be admitted that
the comparison of a man to a harbour is awkward. Other suggestions are
monstrare portum: instaurare p.: and in terra
portum (?) Jeep.
§2.
statimque. I follow Krüger (3rd ed.) in the punctuation: see
ad loc. The editors print statimque, si non succ.
§3.
quae vero patitur, &c. In the text possit (for
sit of MSS.) is due to Frotscher, omittere (for
mittere) to Bonnell. Ratio (for oratio Bn Bg H
Ioan. M) occurs in Harl. 4995. Krüger (3rd ed.), following Gertz,
reads quae vero patitur hoc ratio ut quisquam sit orator aliquando?
mitto casus: quid, &c. Aliquando he takes as = ‘only
sometimes,’ ‘not always’ (i.e. tum demum cum se praeparare potuerit).
For mitto casus (‘praeteritio’) he compares v. 10. 92: xi. 2.
25.
§5.
quid secundum ac deinceps: so Harl. 4995. The MSS. clearly point
to this reading, though Halm and Meister print ac sec. et deinc.
Bn and Bg (as also N Ioan. and Sal.) have ac sec. ac dein.: but
in Bg above the first ac the letter d appears (evidently
for quid, not ad as H), and over the second
ac, et is written, and is adopted by HFTM. In place of the
first ac Harl. 2662 gives atque, and so Spalding reports
Guelf. (with which 2662 is frequently in agreement). The Carcassonensis
also has quid secundum.
§6.
via dicet ducetur, bHFM Harl. 4950 Burn. 244: ducet
ducetur Bn Bg Ioan. Sal. Dorv. Harl. 4995 shows the variant viam
discet (as Goth. Voss. 2 Vall.) Meister, following Eussner, inverts
the words, reading ducetur, dicet to avoid a ‘tautology’:
cp. iii. 7. 15: ix. 4. 120. Bonnet changed ducetur into
utetur. Kiderlin cannot believe that Quintilian wrote ducetur
... velut duce, and suggests that certa may have fallen
218
out after serie (Rhein. Mus. 46, p. 24). This gives, he
thinks, additional point to the clause introduced by propter
quod: men who have had but little practice do not always speak
methodically (via), but in telling stories they have no difficulty in
keeping to the thread of their discourse, because the sequence of events
is ‘a trusty guide.’
§8.
paulum, BM Harl. 2662, 4829, 11671, Burn. 244, Dorv.:
paululum bHN Ioan. Harl. 4995, 4950, Burn. 243, Bodl.
sed ipsum os coit atque concurrit, Halm, by adding os
to the reading of B (Harl. 2662, 4995). sed ipsum os quoque
concurrit, Spalding after Gesner. In Ioan. I find sed id
ipsum coit atque conc., which may show that we ought to read os
ipsum.
elocutioni, b: om. B (also N Ioan. Harl. 2662 Sal.) ‘haud scio
an recte,’ Halm.
§9.
observatione una, Harl. 4995 M Dorv. and Meister:
observationen (-nū Bg) in luna Bn Bg Ioan. N Sal.
Harl. 2662, 4829, 11671: observatione (-um H) in
una bH: observatione simul Halm.
§13.
superfluere video, cum eo quod, Harl. 4995, Voss. 2 Goth. Spald.
and most edd.: superfluere video: quodsi Halm, and a later hand
in Vall. (Becher): videmus superfluere: cum eo quodsi Meister,
followed by Hild and Krüger (3rd ed.). The commonest MS. reading is
superfluere cum eo quod (BHFTN Sal. Ioan. Harl. 2662, 4829,
11671, Burn. 243, Bodl., Dorv.), from which video seems to have
disappeared: the later hand in Bg gives videantur.
Meister seems to be right in retaining cum eo quod, though his
adoption of videmus for video is unnecessary, considering
mirabor in the same sentence. Cum eo quod (see ad
loc.) is defended by Günther (de Conj. Caus. apud Quint. usu: Halle,
1881, p. 24): he holds that it is more probable that video
dropped out of the text than that it ‘in illo corrupto cumeo
latet’ (Halm). Becher (Phil. Runds. I, n. 51: 1638) denied that ‘cum eo
quod’ could mean ‘mit der Einschränkung dass,’ either in Cic. ad Att.
vi. 1. 7 or anywhere in Quintilian. He found the necessary limitation in
quodsi (‘wenn dagegen’: Cic. ad Fam. xii. 20) and supported
Halm’s reading (which is also that of Par. 2. sec. m.), explaining the
whole passage as follows: ‘Ich bin kein Freund des extemporierten
Vortrages: wenn aber Geist und Wärme belebend wirkt, trifft es sich oft,
dass der grösste Fleiss nicht den Erfolg eines extemporierten Vortrages
erreichen kann.’ But in his latest paper (Programm des Gymnasiums zu
Aurich) he advocates the reading and explanation adopted in the
text.
§14.
ut Cicero dictitabant. The reading is far from certain, but it
seems best to adhere (with Halm) to the oldest MS., Bn, which is in
agreement with N Sal. Ioan., Harl. 2662, 11671, and Dorv. The best
alternative is ut Cicero dicit aiebant (C, Par. 1, also in margin
of Harl. 4950: Bonnell-Meister): b H Bodl. and Burn. 243 give dicit
agebant, which shows that the older codex from which b is derived
probably had this reading, if indeed it is not a mistake for
dictitabant. Bg gives dictabant: Harl. 4995 Goth. Voss. 2,
Par. 2, sec. m. aiebant: Regius conjectured ut Cicero ait
dictitabant: so ed. Camp, and Meister, cp. xii. 3. 11. For the
inclusion of Cicero among the veteres cp. ix. 3. 1 ‘ut omnes
veteres et Cicero praecipue.’
§16.
tum intendendus. Krüger (3rd ed.) brackets tum (which
is omitted in bHM) on the ground that this sentence does not contain,
like the next (addit ad dicendum ...) a new thought, but rather (after
the parentheses pectus est enim ... mentis, and ideoque imperitis ...
non desunt) forms only a further development of what went before
(omniaque de quibus dicturi erimus, personae ... recipienda): hence also
the repetition of participles, habenda ... recipienda ... intendendus.
H. 2662 gives tamen (and is here again in agreement with
Guelf.).
addit ad dicendum, B: addiscendum (om. addit)
bHFT. The loss of addit seems to have given rise to
interpolation: M shows addit ad discendum stimulos habet et
dicendorum expectata laus. Bonnell prints Ad dic. etiam pudor
stim. habet et dic. exp. aus: so Vall. For the gerund used as subst.
cp. pudenda xi. 1. 84: i. 8. 21: praefanda
219
viii. 3. 45: desuescendis iii. 8. 70 and xii. 9. 17 num ex tempore
dicendis inseri possit.
§17.
pretium, all codd.: praemium Halm, following Regius.
§18.
praecepimus, edd. vett, occurs in Harl. 4995 and
Vall.2: other codd. praecipimus.
§19.
cum ... sint consecuti bHM: cum ... sunt consecuti Bn
Bg N. I cannot follow Becher in adopting the indicative here,
as at 2 §6
(tradiderunt), where see note. Here cum is more or less
causal: there it is antithetical. In point of form the two sentences are
no doubt very much alike. Here the meaning seems to be ‘he who wishes to
acquire extemporalis facilitas must consider it his duty to
arrive at the point where..., seeing that many,’ &c.
Gertz put a full stop at tutior, and for cum read
quin, holding that, on the traditional reading (i.e. with
extemporalis facilitas as subject), potest would be
expected instead of debet. This suggestion is adopted in Krüger’s
third edition. H. J. Müller suggested Nam ... sunt
consecuti.
§20.
tanta esse umquam debet. This conj. of Herzog I find in the cod.
Dorv., and receive it into the text; Halm and Krüger adopt Jeep’s
tanta sit umquam. Bn Bg N Ioan. Harl. 2662 give tanta esse
umquam fiducia: M has tantam esse umquam fiduciam: Vall.
esse unquam tantam fid.: Harl. 4995 esse tantam unquam.
Regius made the addition of velim after facilitatis:
Becher thinks it may have dropped out before ut non. Meister
follows: perhaps rather tantam velim (tm) esse
unquam.
§22.
consequi, Spald.: non sequi bH: sequi MC Harl.
4995, 4950: om. Bn, Bg, N Sal. Ioan. Harl. 4829. Becher would omit it,
explaining utrumque non dabitur as ‘vim omnem et rebus et verbis
intendere.’
§23.
satis Krüger (3rd ed.) brackets, considering it to be the result
of a dittography, and comparing what follows deinde ... aptabimus vela
et disponemus rudentes. It seems however quite genuine.
§24.
non labitur. Perhaps the most that can be said for this reading
(which is that of Spalding, following earlier edd.) is that it is
undoubtedly better than non capitur, which occurs in Bn Bg H
Ioan. M and most codd., and is adopted by Halm and Meister.
Capitur is explained in the Bonnell-Meister ed. by reference to
such phrases as ‘altero oculo capi’ and ‘mens capta’ alongside of ‘mente
captus’ in Livy: it is not ‘lamed’ or ‘weakened.’ This can hardly stand.
Another reading is rapitur, which Halm thought might be right:
but the notion of ‘snatching away’ seems too violent for the context,
though appropriate enough in the passages quoted in support, vi. pr. §4
a certissimis rapta fatis, and Hor. Car. iv. 7. 8 quae rapit hora diem.
Hild suggests animo (or mente) non labitur: Jeep
non carpitur (cp. Sen. Nat. Quaest. 2. 13 totum potest excidere
quod potest carpi): Becher non abit (cp. ix. 4. 14 abierit omnis
vis, iucunditas, decor). The passage invites emendation: non
cadit might stand alongside of Becher’s non abit, or such a
future as servabitur or retinebitur could take the place
of the negation, though we should then look for deperdet instead
of deperdit.
non omnino B and codd.: omnino non Gesner, followed by
Halm.
§25.
est alia exercitatio, Harl. 2662 (Guelf.), 4995, 4950, 4829,
11671, Burn. 244, M, C, and so Krüger (3rd ed.): est illa BH
Bodl. Burn. 243 Dorv.: est et illa Spalding Halm and Meister (cp.
ix. 3. 35 est et illud repetendi genus, quod...).
utilior (Halm and Meister, following Spalding and ‘edd.
vett.’) Vall.2, Harl. 4995: all other codd. utilitatis
(Halm: ‘ex utilis magis?). In support of his proposal to read maioris
utilitatis, Kiderlin (Blätter f. d. bayer. Gymn. 24, p. 90)
compares ii. 4. 20 quod non simplicis utilitatis opus est: and xi. 1. 60
quod est sane summae difficultatis.
§26.
quam illa: so all codd. Gertz quam in illa (sc.
exercitatione), and so Meister. This is opposed by Becher (Bursian’s
Jahresb. 1887, p. 49), ‘Zu componitur
220
ist Subjekt exercitatio cogitandi totasque m. vel silentio
(dum tamen ... ipsum) persequendi, d.h. dem Sinne nach
tacita oratio, wie dum t. q. dicat i. s. i. zeigt, zu
illa ist Subjekt vera oratio; componitur oratio
aber ist nicht auffälliger als explicatur exercitatio.’
§27.
ut Cicero ... tradit. Krüger (3rd ed.) follows Gertz in
transferring this parenthesis to the end of the previous sentence, after
ubique. Becher rejects it as a gloss.
aut legendum b M: om. BN Sal.: vel ad legendum Vall.
Becher would omit it, on the ground that the whole chapter is concerned
only with writing and speech, and even with writing only so far as it
promotes the ‘facultas ex tempore dicendi.’
§28.
innatans Stoer: unatrans BN Ioan. Sal.: inatrans
bH: iura trans Harl. 2662: intrans FM
Vall.2.
§29.
an si, Meister (following ed. Camp.): ac si bHFT Burn.
243: an Bn Bg M.
debent, all codd.: debemus Krüger (3rd ed.) after
Gertz. Either seems quite appropriate to the conditional use of the
participle: ‘when men are debarred from both, they ought all the same,’
&c.
sic dicere. The grounds on which I base this emendation are
stated in the note ad loc. Bn Bg HN and most codd. have
inicere, which looks as if some copyist had stumbled over the
repetition of the letters -ic in what I take to be the original
text, whereupon the preceding tamen (or tam̅) would assist
the transition to inicere. Cp. the omission of sic in most
codd. in ut sic dixerim 2 §15. Halm (after Bursian)
wrote id efficere, and so Meister. Other attempted emendations
are vincere M, Harl. 4950, Burn. 244 Vall.2: tantum
iniicere Harl. 4995: inniti or adniti edd.: id
agere Badius: evincere Törnebladh.
§32.
et in his: in his Halm and Meister: ne in his BN
Ioan. HMC Dorv. Bodl.: ne in iis Harl. 2662: vel in iis
Spald.: vel in his Bonnell and Krüger (3rd ed.). I venture
on et, which seems to help the antithesis with in hoc
genere above: v. ad loc.
velut summas ... conferre. So Bonnell (Lex. p. 139) Halm,
Meister, Krüger (3rd ed.). The MSS. vary greatly: vel in summas
in (sine bH: sive Harl. 4995) commentarium Bn
Bg Dorv. Bodl. Harl 2662: velin summas et (suprascr. in)
commentarium N: vel insinuamus sine commendarios M:
commentarioram et capita Harl. 4950. Other conjectural
emendations are velut in summas commentarium Spald.: mihi quae
scr. velut in commentarium summas et c. conf. Zumpt: nec in his
quae scrips. velim summas in commentarium et capita conferri
Frotscher; vel in his quae scrips. rerum summas (cp. Liv. xl. 29.
11 lectis rerum summis) in commentarios conferre Jeep: ex iis
quae scrips. res summas in commentarium et capita conferre,
Zambaldi,—(on the ground that with conferre, ex his
gives a better sense than in his). To these may perhaps be added
et in his quae scrips. velut summas in commentariorum capita
conferre.
In the Blätter f. d. bayer. Gymn. (1888) 24, pp. 90-91 Kiderlin
discusses the whole passage. Keeping to the reading of the oldest MSS.
(ne in his) he proposes ne in his quae scripserimus
erremus: ‘damit wir nich bei dem Vortrage dessen, was wir
geschrieben haben, den Faden verlieren’: cp. the use of errare
xi. 2. 20 and 36. He rejects the various conjectures suggested above for
vel in summas on the ground that it is impossible to explain
‘summas in commentarium et capita conferre.’ What is the meaning of
‘entering the chief points in a note-book and heads’ (‘den Hauptinhalt
in ein Gedenkbuch und einzelne Hauptabschnitte
einzutragen’—Bonnell-Meister)? Can the note-book and the ‘heads’
be conjoined in this way? You can make an entry in your notes, but not
in ‘capita’: ‘in ein Gedenkbuch kann man eintragen, in Hauptabschnitte
aber nicht.’ Baur’s version is excluded by the order of words: ‘den
Hauptinhalt und die einzelnen Punkte in ein Gedenkbuch eintragen.’
Lindner’s is even less satisfactory:
221
‘welcher zufolge man auch von dem, was man geschrieben hat, den
Hauptinhalt nach gewissen Hauptabschnitten eintragen soll.’
Kiderlin thinks the context shows that the essence of Laenas’s advice
was to enter the chief points in a memorandum. This demands the
elimination of the unmeaning et which wrongly conjoins
commentarium and capita. Again as summa and
caput are synonyms for ‘Hauptpunkt’ (cp. iii. 11. 27 and vi.
1. 2) one of the two may very well be a gloss: and the vel
in vel in summas seems to show that these words were originally a
marginal gloss to explain (in) capita. Kiderlin therefore
proposes to transform the text as follows: ne in his quae
scripserimus erremus [vel in summas] in
commentarium capita conferre.
quod non simus, Regius, Frotscher, Becher, Meister, Krüger
(3rd ed.): quod simus Bn Bg Ioan. M Dorv.: and so Halm: non
simus bHT Bodl. In explanation of quod simus Spalding says
‘ubi satis fidere possumus memoriae ne scribendum quidem esse censeo’;
and so Prof. Mayor (Analysis, p. 56), ‘We are even hampered by
writing out at all what we intend to commit to memory: bound down to the
written words, we are closed against sudden inspirations.’
hic quoque, Bn Bg and most codd.: hoc quoque Harl.
4995: id quoque bHM.
223
(The references are to chapters and sections.)
Achilles, i. 47, 50, 65.
Aelius (Lucius) Stilo, i. 99.
Aeschines, i. 22,
77.
Aeschylus, i.
66.
Afranius, i.
100.
Alcaeus, i. 63.
Antimachus, i.
53.
Antipater Sidonius, vii. 19.
Apollonius, i.
54.
Aratus, i. 55.
Archias, Aul. Licinius, vii. 19.
Archilochus, i.
59.
Aristarchus, i. 54,
59.
Aristophanes, i.
66.
Aristophanes of Byzantium, i. 54.
Aristotle, i.
83.
Asinius Pollio, i.
22, 24, 113: ii. 17, 25.
Asprenas, C. Nonius, i.
22.
Attici—Attic Orators, i. 76-80: cp. ii. 17; i. 115.
Attius (Accius), i.
97.
Aufidia, i. 22.
Aufidius Bassus, i.
103.
Bibaculus, M. Furius, i.
96.
Brutus, M. Iunius, i.
123, 23: v. 20: vii. 27.
Caecilius Statius, i.
99.
Caelius, M. Rufus, i.
115: ii. 25.
Caesar, C. Iulius, i.
114: ii. 25.
Caesius Bassus, i.
96.
Calidius M., i.
23.
Callimachus, i.
58.
Calvus, i, 115: ii.
25.
Carbo, vii.
27.
Cassius Severus, i.
22, 116.
Catius, i.
124.
Cato, v. 13.
Catullus, i.
96.
Cestius, v. 20.
Charisius, i.
70.
Cicero, i. 33, 40, 80, 81, 105-112, 123: ii. 18: iii. 1: v. 2, 11, 16: vii. 19, 27, 30.
Cinna, C. Helvius, iv.
4.
Clitarchus, i.
75.
Clodius, v. 13.
Cornelius, C., v.
13.
Cornelius Celsus, i.
23, 124.
Cornelius Gallus, i.
93.
Cornelius Severus, i.
89.
Crassus, iii. 1:
v. 2.
Cratinus, i.
63.
Cremutius, i.
104.
Crispus, i. 23.
Demetrius of Phalerum, i.
33, 80.
Demosthenes, i. 22,
24, 39, 76, 105: ii. 24: iii. 25, 30.
Domitian, i.
91.
Domitius Afer, i.
23, 86, 118.
Empylus Rhodius, vi.
4.
Ennius, i. 88.
Ephorus, i. 75.
Epicurus, ii. 15:
cp. i. 124.
Euphorion, i.
56.
Eupolis, i. 65.
Euripides, i.
67.
Gallus (Cornelius), i.
93.
Helvius (C. Cinna), iv.
4.
Hercules, i.
56.
Herodotus, i. 73,
101.
Hesiod, i. 52.
Hipponax, see on i.
59.
Homer, i. 24, 48 sqq., 57, 62, 81, 85.
Horace, i. 24, 56, 61, 94, 96.
Hortensius, v. 13:
vi. 4: cp. i. 23.
Hyperides, i. 77:
v. 2.
Isocrates, i. 79, 108: iv. 4.
Iulius Africanus, i.
118.
Iulius Florus, iii.
13.
Iulius Secundus, i.
120: iii.
12.
|
Laelius, Decimus, i.
23.
Laenas Popilius, vii.
32.
Ligarius, i.
23.
Livius Andronicus, ii.
7.
Livy, i. 32, 39, 101.
Lucan, i. 90.
Lucilius, i. 93
sqq.
Lucretius, i.
87.
Lysias, i. 78.
Macer, i. 56, 87.
Marcellus, i.
38.
Marcia, v. 13.
Menander, i. 69
sqq.
Messalla, i. 22, 24, 113: v. 2.
Metrodorus Scepsius, vi. 4.
Milo, i. 23: vii. 13, 20.
Minerva, i. 91.
Nicander, i. 56.
Ovid, i. 88, 93, 98.
Pacuvius, i. 97.
Panyasis, i.
54.
Patroclus, i.
49.
Pedo Albinovanus, i.
90.
Pericles, i.
82.
Persius, i. 94: iii. 21.
Philemon, i.
72.
Philetas, i.
50.
224
Philistus, i.
74.
Phryne, v. 2.
Pindar, i.
109.
Pisandros, i.
56.
Plato, i. 81.
Plautus, i. 99.
Plautus (Stoicus), i.
124.
Pomponius Secundus, i.
98.
Porcius Latro, v.
18.
Priam, i. 50.
Propertius, i.
93.
Quintilian:
Life, Introd. pp.
i-xiii.
The Institutio Oratorio, pp. xiii-xxii.
Literary Criticism, pp. xxii-xxxix.
Style and Language, pp. xxxix-lvii.
Manuscripts, pp.
lviii-lxxv.
Rabirius, i. 90.
Saleius Bassus, i.
90.
Sallust, i. 31, 101, 102: ii. 17: iii. 8.
Scipio, i. 99.
Seneca, i.
125-131. Introd. p.
xxiv. sqq.
Serranus, i.
89.
Servilius Nonianus, i.
101.
Sextii (father and son), i. 124.
Simonides, i.
64.
Simonides of Amorgos, see on i. 59.
Sophocles, i. 67
sqq.
Stesichorus, i.
62.
Sulpicius, i. 22,
116: v. 4: vii. 30.
Terence, i. 99.
Theocritus, i.
55.
Theophrastus, i.
27, 83.
Theopompus, i.
74.
Thucydides, i. 33,
73, 101: ii. 17.
Thyestes, i.
98.
Tibullus, i.
93.
Timagenes, i.
75.
Tiro, vii.
31.
Trachalus, i.
119.
Tubero, i. 23.
Tyrtaeus, i.
56.
Valerius Flaccus, i.
90.
Varius, i. 98: iii. 8.
Varro (M. Terentius), i. 95.
Varro Atacinus, i.
87.
Vergil, i. 56, 85: iii. 8.
Verres, i. 23.
Vibius Crispus, i.
119.
Volusenus Catulus, i.
23.
Xenophon, i. 33, 82: v. 2.
|
225
(The first reference is to the chapter and section of the text; the
second to the page and column of the explanatory notes. References to
the Introduction are given separately.)
The above paragraph was in the original text. For this e-text, only the
section numbers are linked; sections are generally very short, and notes
adjoin the text.
abruptus, ii. 19:
131b.
abunde, i. 94:
91a.
abusio, i. 12:
21b.
accedere, i. 86:
83a.
actio, i. 17:
24b.
actus rei, i. 31:
35a.
acutus, i. 77:
73b.
acumen, i. 106:
107b.
adde quod, Introd. p. liii.
adducere frontem, iii. 13: 142a.
adfectus, i. 27:
31b.: and i. 48:
49a.
adhuc, Introd. pp.
l-li.
Adjectives, use of: Introd. p. xlvi. sqq.
advocatus, i. 111:
110a.
alioqui, Introd. p.
li.
ἄλογος τριβή, vii. 11: 174a.
altercatio, i. 35:
39b.
ambitio, Introd. p.
xliv.
ambitus rerum, i.
16: 24a.
amplificationes, i.
49: 50b.
Annales Pontificum, ii.
7: 126a.
ante omnia, Introd. p. liii.
antiqui, ii. 17:
130b.
argumenta et signa rerum, i. 49: 50b.
artes, i. 15:
23b.
atticus, i. 44:
45b.
auctor, i. 24:
30a.
auditorium, i. 36:
40a.
aureum plectrum, i.
63: 60a.
auspicatus, i. 85:
82a.
basilica, v. 18:
164b.
beatus, i. 61:
59a.
bellicum canere, i.
33: 36b.
bona fide, iii.
23: 146b.
calumnia, i. 115:
113b.
calcaribus egere, i.
74: 70a.
candidus, i. 73:
68a.
candor, i. 101:
100b.
caro, i. 77:
73a.
cerae, iii. 30:
149a.
certe scio, ii. 5:
124b.
circa, i. 52:
52a.
circulatorius, i. 8:
18b.
citra, i. 2:
12b.
civilia officia, iii.
11: 140a.
classis, v. 18:
166a.
claudicare, i. 99:
97a.
cogitatio, vi. 1:
167a.
color, i. 116:
114b.
Comedy, Greek, i. 65: 61a.
„Latin, i. 99: 97a.
commendare, i.
101: 101a.
communes loci, v.
12: 159b.
compositio, i. 52:
52b. and i. 79:
77b.
compositus, i.
119: 117a.
concludere, i.
106: 107a.
conferre, i. 1:
12a.
confirmatio sententiarum, v. 12: 159a.
contorta vis, vii.
14: 176a.
conrogati, i. 18:
26b.
cothurnus (Sophocli), i. 68: 64a: and ii. 22: 133a.
cultus, Introd. p.
xliv.
cum interim, i. 18:
26b.
cum praesertim, i.
105: 105a.
cum eo quod, vii.
13: 175a.
declinata figura oratio, v.
8: 157a.
decor, i. 27:
32a.
decretoria (arma), v.
20: 165b.
demum, Introd. p.
li.
densus, i. 68and 73.
destructio sententiarum, v. 12: 159a.
dicendi veneres, i.
79: 76a.
dicendi ex tempore facultas, iii. 2: vii. 1, 5, 24.
declamatores, i.
71: 65b.
dictare, iii. 19:
144a.
digerere cibum, i.
19: inordinata, iv.
1: commentarios, vii. 30.
digressiones, i.
33: 36b.
dilectus, iii. 5:
138a.
disertus, i. 118:
115b.
Dramatic Poetry, Greek, i. 65: Latin, i. 97.
dubitare, i. 73:
67a.
ducere (colorem), i.
59: 57a.
ducere opus, iii.
18: 144a.
dulcis, i. 73:
68a.
dum non, iii. 7:
138b.
226
efferre se, iii. 10:
140a.
elegans, i. 65:
62a.
Elegy, Greek, i. 58: Latin, i. 93.
Epic Poetry, Greek, i. 46 sqq.: Latin, i. 85 sqq.
epilogus, i. 50:
51b: and i. 107:
108b.
epodos, i. 96:
94a.
exactus, ii. 14:
128a.
exempla, i. 49:
50b.
exilis, ii. 16:
129b.
expositus, Introd. p.
xlv.
extemporalis color, vi.
5: 168b.
extemporalis actio, vii. 18: temeritas, vi. 6.
exultare, ii. 16:
130a.
facere (bene) ad aliquid, i. 33: 38a.
facilitas, i. 1: ii. 12: iii. 7: vii. 19.
fas erat, v. 7:
157a.
favorabilis, v. 21:
166a.
figurae, i. 12:
22a.
Figures (military, &c.), Introd. pp. lvi-vii.
forsitan, ii. 10:
126b.
frequenter, i. 17:
25b.
frugalitas, iii.
26: 147b.
genera dicendi, i. 44:
44-5.
genera lectionum, i.
45: 46b.
grammatici, i. 53:
53a.
grandis, i. 65:
62a.
habere laudem, i. 53:
53a.
ἕξις, i. 1: 12a.
History, i.
31: 34a; Greek, i. 73: 66a; Latin, i. 101: 100a.
hodieque, i. 94:
91b.
horride, ii. 17:
130a.
|
Iambic Poetry, Greek, i. 59: 57b; Latin, i. 96.
ideoque, i. 21:
28b.
igitur, i. 4:
15a.
index, i. 57:
56b.
indiscretus, i. 2:
12a.
infelicitas, ii. 8:
126a.
infinitae questiones, iii. 11: 158a.
interim, i. 9:
19b.
inventio, i. 106: 106b.
ipse, Introd. p.
xlix.
iucundus, i. 46:
48a.
lacerti, i. 33:
37a.
lactea (ubertas), i.
32: 36a.
laetus, i. 46:
48a.
lascivia (recens haec), i. 43: 43b.
lascivus, i. 88:
84b.
lene dicendi genus, i.
121: 117b.
lima, iv. 4:
152a.
loci communes, v.
12: 159b.
lucrativa opera, vii.
27: 180b.
Lyric Poetry, Greek, i. 61: 58b; Latin, i. 96.
medium dicendi genus, i.
52: 52b; i. 80:
78b.
membranae, iii.
31: 150a.
memoria posteritatis, i. 31: 35b.
mensurae verborum, i.
10: 20a.
merere, i. 72:
66b.
nam (elliptical), i. 9:
19a.
nescio an ulla, i.
65.
nisi forte, i. 70:
65a.
nitidus, i. 9: 19b;
i. 79: 75b.
non sit, ii. 27:
135a.
numeri, i. 4: 15a;
i. 70: 65b.
obiurgare, iii. 20:
145a.
offensator, iii.
20: 145a.
olim, i. 104:
103a.
opinio, v. 18:
164a.
opus, i. 9: 19b.
Oratory, Greek, i. 76: Latin, i. 105.
Orators, Canon of the Ten, i. 76: 71a.
ostentatio, i. 28:
32b.
otiosus, i. 76:
72b.
palaestra, i. 79:
76a.
paraphrasis, v. 5:
155b.
parem facere, i.
105: 103b.
parum (non), i.
124: 119a.
pedestris oratio, i.
81: 79b.
periculum, i. 36:
42b.
Philosophy, i.
35: 38b: Greek, i. 81: 78b; Latin, i. 123: 118a.
φράσις, i. 42: 43a.
pilarii, vii. 11:
174b.
Poetry, the study of, i. 27 sqq.
pontificum annales, ii.
7: 126a.
praescriptum, ii.
2: 123b.
praesertim (cum), i.
105: 105a.
praestringere, i.
30: 33b.
praesumere, v. 4:
155a.
pressus, i. 44:
44b.
procinctu (in), i.
2: 13a.
profectus, iii. 2:
136b.
professor, v. 18:
164a.
propria, i. 6:
16a.
proprietas, i. 46:
48a.
prosa (oratio), i.
81: 79b.
protinus, i. 3:
14a.
proximus—secundus, i. 53: 53b.
quia, Introd. p.
liv.
quicunque, i. 12:
22a.
quisque, i. 2:
12b.
quoque (etiam), i.
20: 28a; i. 125:
120b.
quotas quisque, i.
41: 42b.
rarum est ut, vii.
24: 179b.
ratio c. gerund, iii.
31: 149b.
ratio constat, ii.
1: 123a.
ratio (in scribendo), iii. 15: 143a.
rectum (dicendi genus), i. 44: 44a.
repraesentare, vii.
2: 170b.
ridiculus, i. 117:
115a.
sales, i. 107:
108a.
sanguis, i. 60:
58a.
Satire, i.
93: 89b.
sententiae, i. 50,
52, 68, 90, 102, 129, 130: ii. 17: v. 4.
signa rerum et argumenta, i. 49: 50b.
silva, iii. 17:
143b.
similitudines, i.
49: 50b.
sine dubio, Introd. p. liii.
Socratici, i. 35:
39b.
solum (non, sed), i.
6: 17a.
sordidus, i. 9:
19b.
spiritus, i. 27:
31b.
stilus, i. 2: 12b;
iii. 1, 32; vii. 16.
Stoici, i. 84:
81b.
subtilis, i. 78:
74a.
summus, Introd. p.
xlvi.
supinus, ii. 17:
131a.
supplosio pedis, vii.
26: 180b.
tacitus, i. 19:
26a.
tenuis, i. 44:
45a.
tenuitas, ii. 23:
133b.
theses, v. 11:
158a.
togatae, i. 100:
99b.
tori athletarum, i.
33: 37a.
227
Tragedy, Latin, i. 97: 94b; Greek, i. 66.
transversus, i.
110: 110a.
τριβὴ ἄλογος, vii. 11: 174a.
τροπικῶς, i. 11: 21a.
ubicumque, Introd. p.
liii.
urbanitas, i. 115:
112b.
utinam non, i.
100: 99b.
utique: i. 20:
28a.
utrimque, i. 131:
122b.
valetudo, Introd. p.
liv.
validius, iii.
12: 140b.
velocitatem (Sallusti), i. 102: 101a.
veneres dicendi, i.
79: 76a.
ventilator, vii.
11: 174b.
verbum—vox, i.
11: 21a.
versificator, i.
89: 85b.
vibrantes sententiae, i. 60: 58a.
vis dicendi, i. 1:
11b.
voluntas recti generis, i. 89: 86b.
vox—verbum, i.
11: 21a.
|
223
(The references are to chapters and sections.)
Antipater Sidonius, vii. 19.
Archias, Aul. Licinius, vii. 19.
Asinius Pollio, ii. 17, 25.
Attici—Attic Orators, ii. 17.
Brutus, M. Iunius, v. 20: vii. 27.
Caelius, M. Rufus, ii. 25.
Caesar, C. Iulius, ii. 25.
Calvus, i, 115: ii. 25.
Carbo, vii. 27.
Cato, v. 13.
Cestius, v. 20.
Cicero, ii. 18: iii. 1: v. 2, 11, 16: vii. 19, 27, 30.
Cinna, C. Helvius, iv. 4.
Clodius, v. 13.
Cornelius, C., v. 13.
Crassus, iii. 1: v. 2.
Demosthenes, ii. 24: iii. 25, 30.
Empylus Rhodius, vi. 4.
Epicurus, ii. 154.
Helvius (C. Cinna), iv. 4.
Hortensius, v. 13: vi. 4.
Hyperides, v. 2.
|
Isocrates, iv. 4.
Iulius Florus, iii. 13.
Iulius Secundus, iii. 12.
Laenas Popilius, vii. 32.
Livius Andronicus, ii. 7.
Marcia, v. 13.
Messalla, v. 2.
Metrodorus Scepsius, vi. 4.
Milo, vii. 13, 20.
Persius, iii. 21.
224
Phryne, v. 2.
Porcius Latro, v. 18.
Sallust, ii. 17: iii. 8.
Sulpicius, v. 4: vii. 30.
Thucydides, ii. 17.
Tiro, vii. 31.
Varius, iii. 8.
Vergil, iii. 8.
Xenophon, v. 2.
|
225
(The first reference is to the chapter and section of the text; the
second to the page and column of the explanatory notes. References to
the Introduction are given separately.)
The above paragraph was in the original text. For this e-text, only the
section numbers are linked; sections are generally very short, and notes
adjoin the text.
abruptus, ii. 19: 131b.
adducere frontem, iii. 13: 142a.
ἄλογος τριβή, vii. 11: 174a.
Annales Pontificum, ii. 7: 126a.
antiqui, ii. 17: 130b.
basilica, v. 18: 164b.
bona fide, iii. 23: 146b.
cerae, iii. 30: 149a.
certe scio, ii. 5: 124b.
civilia officia, iii. 11: 140a.
classis, v. 18: 166a.
cogitatio, vi. 1: 167a.
communes loci, v. 12: 159b.
confirmatio sententiarum, v. 12:
159a.
contorta vis, vii. 14: 176a.
cothurnus (Sophocli), ii. 22: 133a.
cum eo quod, vii. 13: 175a.
declinata figura oratio, v. 8: 157a.
decretoria (arma), v. 20: 165b.
destructio sententiarum, v. 12:
159a.
dicendi ex tempore facultas, iii. 2: vii. 1, 5, 24.
dictare, iii. 19: 144a.
digerere inordinata, iv. 1:
commentarios, vii. 30.
dilectus, iii. 5: 138a.
ducere opus, iii. 18: 144a.
dum non, iii. 7: 138b.
226
efferre se, iii. 10: 140a.
exactus, ii. 14: 128a.
exilis, ii. 16: 129b.
extemporalis color, vi. 5: 168b.
extemporalis actio, vii. 18:
temeritas, vi. 6.
exultare, ii. 16: 130a.
facilitas, ii. 12: iii. 7: vii. 19.
fas erat, v. 7: 157a.
favorabilis, v. 21: 166a.
forsitan, ii. 10: 126b.
frugalitas, iii. 26: 147b.
|
horride, ii. 17: 130a.
infelicitas, ii. 8: 126a.
infinitae questiones, iii. 11:
158a.
lima, iv. 4: 152a.
loci communes, v. 12: 159b.
lucrativa opera, vii. 27: 180b.
membranae, iii. 31: 150a.
non sit, ii. 27: 135a.
obiurgare, iii. 20: 145a.
offensator, iii. 20: 145a.
opinio, v. 18: 164a.
paraphrasis, v. 5: 155b.
pilarii, vii. 11: 174b.
pontificum annales, ii. 7: 126a.
praescriptum, ii. 2: 123b.
praesumere, v. 4: 155a.
profectus, iii. 2: 136b.
professor, v. 18: 164a.
rarum est ut, vii. 24: 179b.
ratio c. gerund, iii. 31: 149b.
ratio constat, ii. 1: 123a.
ratio (in scribendo), iii. 15:
143a.
repraesentare, vii. 2: 170b.
sententiae, ii. 17: v. 4.
silva, iii. 17: 143b.
stilus, iii. 1, 32; vii. 16.
supinus, ii. 17: 131a.
supplosio pedis, vii. 26: 180b.
tenuitas, ii. 23: 133b.
theses, v. 11: 158a.
227
τριβὴ ἄλογος, vii. 11: 174a.
validius, iii. 12: 140b.
ventilator, vii. 11: 174b.
|
This and all associated files of various formats will be found in https://www.gutenberg.org/2/1/8/2/21827/
Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will
be renamed.
Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United
States without permission and without paying copyright
royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™
concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive
specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this
eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook
for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports,
performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given
away—you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks
not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the
trademark license, especially commercial redistribution.
To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project
Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
Project Gutenberg™ License available with this file or online at
www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™
electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in your
possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person
or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg™ electronic works if you follow the terms of this
agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg™
electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the
Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual
works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
that you will support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting
free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg™
works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You can easily
comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when
you share it without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
other Project Gutenberg™ work. The Foundation makes no
representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
country outside the United States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear
prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work
on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the
phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed,
performed, viewed, copied or distributed:
1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is
derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project
Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™
trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™ License for all works
posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
beginning of this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™
License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg™ License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format
other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official
version posted on the official Project Gutenberg™ web site
(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the
full Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works
provided that
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than
are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The
Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg™
trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™
electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
cannot be read by your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right
of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
without further opportunities to fix the problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO
OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in
accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™
electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or
additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any
Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg™
Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
from people in all walks of life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™’s
goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will
remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
and permanent future for Project Gutenberg™ and future
generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification
number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws.
The Foundation’s principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the
mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its
volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous
locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt
Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to
date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s web site and
official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
Dr. Gregory B. Newby
Chief Executive and Director
gbnewby@pglaf.org
Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without wide
spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
status with the IRS.
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate
Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg™ electronic works.
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could be
freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose network of
volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed
editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
edition.
This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg™,
including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.